Manual SAP® Workforce Performance Builder Producer

Manual SAP® Workforce Performance Builder Producer
Manual
SAP® Workforce Performance Builder
Producer
Target Audience
■ Consultants
■ Administrators
■ Others
Public
Document version 20/08/2012
SAP AG
Dietmar-Hopp-Allee 16
69190 Walldorf
Germany
T +49/18 05/34 34 24
F +49/18 05/34 34 20
www.sap.com
© Copyright 2012 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
Apple, App Store, iBooks, iPad, iPhone, iPhoto, iPod, iTunes, MultiTouch, Objective-C, Retina, Safari, Siri and Xcode are trademarks or
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any
registered trademark of Apple Inc.
form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG.
The information contained herein may be changed without prior
IOS is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems Inc.
notice.
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors
RIM, BlackBerry, BBM, BlackBerry Curve, BlackBerry Bold,
contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.
BlackBerry Pearl, BlackBerry Torch, BlackBerry Storm, BlackBerry
Storm2, BlackBerry PlayBook, and BlackBerry App World are
Microsoft, Windows, Excel, Outlook, PowerPoint, Silverlight and
trademarks or registered trademarks of Research in Motion Limited.
Visual Studio are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Google App Engine, Google Apps, Google Checkout, Google Data
IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, System i, System i5, System p,
API, Google Maps, Google Mobile Ads, Google Mobile Updater,
System p5, System x, System z, System z10, z10, z/VM, z/OS,
Google Mobile, Google Store, Google Sync, Google Updater, Google
OS/390, zEnterprise, PowerVM, Power Architecture, Power Systems,
Voice, Google Mail, Gmail, YouTube, Dalvik and Android are
POWER7, POWER6+, POWER6, POWER, PowerHA, pureScale,
trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
PowerPC, BladeCenter, System Storage, Storwize, XIV, GPFS,
HACMP, RETAIN, DB2 Connect, RACF, Redbooks, OS/2, AIX,
INTERMEC is a registered trademark of Intermec Technologies
Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Tivoli, Informix and Smarter Planet are
Corporation.
trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance.
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and
other countries.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, PostScript, and Reader are either
Motorola is a registered trademark of Motorola Trademark Holdings,
trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in
LLC.
the United States and/or other countries.
Computop is a registered trademark of Computop
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its
Wirtschaftsinformatik GmbH
affiliates.
SAP, R/3, SAP NetWeaver, Duet, PartnerEdge, ByDesign, SAP
UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the
BusinessObjects Explorer, StreamWork, SAP HANA, and other SAP
Open Group.
products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective
Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame,
logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany
VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of
and other countries.
Citrix Systems, Inc.
Business Objects and the Business Objects logo, BusinessObjects,
HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered
Crystal Reports, Crystal Decisions, Web Intelligence, Xcelsius, and
trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts
other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well
Institute of Technology.
as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Business Objects Software Ltd. Business Objects is an SAP company.
their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Terms for Included Open
Source Software
Sybase, Inc. Sybase is an SAP company.
This SAP software contains also the third party open source software
Sybase and Adaptive Server, iAnywhere, Sybase 365, SQL Anywhere,
and other Sybase products and services mentioned herein as well as
products listed below. Please note that for these third party products
Crossgate, [email protected] EDDY, B2B 360°, and B2B 360° Services are
the following special terms and conditions shall apply.
registered trademarks of Crossgate AG in Germany and other
1. This software was developed using ANTLR.
countries. Crossgate is an SAP company.
2. gSOAP
Part of the software embedded in this product is gSOAP software.
All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of
Portions created by gSOAP are Copyright (C) 2001-2004 Robert A.
their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves
van Engelen, Genivia inc. All Rights Reserved.
informational purposes only. National product specifications may
THE SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN PART PROVIDED
vary.
BY GENIVIA INC AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
These materials are subject to change without notice. These materials
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies ("SAP Group")
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
any kind, and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP Group
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
products and services are those that are set forth in the express
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any.
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
warranty.
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
Disclaimer
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
Some components of this product are based on Java™. Any code
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
change in these components may cause unpredictable and severe
SUCH DAMAGE.
malfunctions and is therefore expressly prohibited, as is any
3. SAP License Agreement for STLport SAP License Agreement for
decompilation of these components.
STLPort between SAP Aktiengesellschaft Systems, Applications,
Products in Data Processing Neurottstrasse 16 69190 Walldorf,
Any Java™ Source Code delivered with this product is only to be used
Germany (hereinafter: SAP) and you (hereinafter: Customer)
by SAP’s Support Services and may not be modified or altered in any
a) Subject Matter of the Agreement
way.
A) SAP grants Customer a non-exclusive, non-transferrable, royaltyfree license to use the STLport.org C++ library (STLport) and its
Documentation in the SAP Help Portal
documentation without fee.
You can find this documentation at the following address:
B) By downloading, using, or copying STLport or any portion thereof
http://help.sap.com/wpb
Customer agrees to abide by the intellectual property laws, and to all
of the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
C) The Customer may distribute binaries compiled with STLport
(whether original or modified) without any royalties or restrictions.
D) Customer shall maintain the following copyright and permissions
notices on STLport sources and its documentation unchanged:
Copyright 2001 SAP AG
Permission to modify the code and to distribute modified code is
E) The Customer may distribute original or modified STLport sources,
granted, provided the above notices are retained, and a notice that the
provided that:
code was modified is included with the above copyright notice.
o The conditions indicated in the above permissions notice are met;
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and
o The following copyright notices are retained when present, and
its documentation for any purposes is hereby granted without fee,
conditions provided in accompanying permission notices are met:
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
Coypright 1994 Hewlett-Packard
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
Company
supporting documentation. SAP makes no representations about the
Copyright 1996,97 Silicon Graphics
suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided with a
Computer Systems Inc.
limited warranty and liability as set forth in the License Agreement
Copyright 1997 Moscow Center for
distributed with this copy.
SPARC Technology.
SAP offers this liability and warranty obligations only towards its
Copyright 1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev
customers and only referring to its modifications.
Copyright 2001 SAP AG
b) Support and Maintenance SAP does not provide software
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and
maintenance for the STLport. Software maintenance of the STLport
its documentation for any purposes is hereby granted without fee,
therefore shall be not included.
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
All other services shall be charged according to the rates for services
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
quoted in the SAP List of Prices and Conditions and shall be subject to
supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no
a separate contract.
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose.
c) Exclusion of warranty
It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.
As the STLport is transferred to the Customer on a loan basis and free
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and
of charge, SAP cannot guarantee that the STLport is error-free,
its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
without material defects or suitable for a specific application under
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
third-party rights. Technical data, sales brochures, advertising text and
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
quality descriptions produced by SAP do not indicate any assurance of
supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no representations
particular attributes.
about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided “as
d) Limited Liability
is” without express or implied warranty.
A) Irrespective of the legal reasons, SAP shall only be liable for
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and
damage, including unauthorized operation, if this (i) can be
its documentation for any purposes is hereby granted without fee,
compensated under the Product Liability Act or (ii) if caused due to
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
gross negligence or intent by SAP or (iii) if based on the failure of a
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
guaranteed attribute.
supporting documentation. Moscow Center for SPARC makes no
B) If SAP is liable for gross negligence or intent caused by employees
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It
who are neither agents or managerial employees of SAP, the total
is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.
liability for such damage and a maximum limit on the scope of any
Boris Fomitchev makes no representations about the suitability of this
such damage shall depend on the extent to which its occurrence ought
software for any purpose. This material is provided "as is", with
to have anticipated by SAP when concluding the contract, due to the
absolutely no warranty expressed or implied.
circumstances known to it at that point in time representing a typical
Any use is at your own risk. Permission to use or copy this software
transfer of the software.
for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided the above
C) In the case of Art. 4.2 above, SAP shall not be liable for indirect
notices are retained on all copies.
damage, consequential damage caused by a defect or lost profit.
D) SAP and the Customer agree that the typical foreseeable extent of
damage shall under no circumstances exceed EUR 5,000.
E) The Customer shall take adequate measures for the protection of
data and programs, in particular by making backup copies at the
minimum intervals recommended by SAP. SAP shall not be liable for
the loss of data and its recovery, notwithstanding the other limitations
of the present Art. 4 if this loss could have been avoided by observing
this obligation.
F) The exclusion or the limitation of claims in accordance with the
present Art. 4 includes claims against employees or agents of SAP.
4. Adobe Document Services Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat,
PostScript, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and / or other
countries. For information on Third Party software delivered with
Adobe document services and Adobe LiveCycle Designer, see SAP
Note 854621.
Contents
Contents
SAP Workforce Performance Builder Producer ................................ 10
Technical Support ...................................................................................... 10
System Requirements................................................................................ 11
Installing Producer ..................................................................................... 11
Upgrading an older Version ...................................................................... 12
Uninstalling Producer ................................................................................ 14
Settings ................................................................................................. 16
Required System Settings ......................................................................... 16
Recording and Editing ............................................................................... 18
Browser settings ........................................................................................ 18
Settings for the SAP Client ........................................................................ 22
Working with the Producer under Citrix ................................................... 25
Settings for Microsoft Excel ...................................................................... 27
Simulations - Recording ...................................................................... 28
Requirements for Recording ..................................................................... 28
Basic Principle ........................................................................................... 28
Recording a Lesson ................................................................................... 29
ReRecording a Lesson .............................................................................. 35
Automatic Text Generation ....................................................................... 49
Simulations - Editing ........................................................................... 50
Designing simulation pages ...................................................................... 50
Editing the simulation macros .................................................................. 51
Editing highlights and bubbles ................................................................. 52
How to insert book page objects .............................................................. 53
Form Structure ........................................................................................... 54
Branches within a lesson .......................................................................... 56
Inserting a placeholder .............................................................................. 58
Mode Change while a mode is being played back .................................. 59
Translation of a Lesson using Translation Templates............................ 59
Text-to-Speech ........................................................................................... 63
Troubleshooting in a Project ..................................................................... 64
Simulation Modes ................................................................................ 65
Generating a Lesson .................................................................................. 65
Playing back a Lesson ............................................................................... 65
Link actions for trainer and book reader .................................................. 66
Mouse simulation ....................................................................................... 67
Concurrent mode viewing window ........................................................... 67
Printing the task window ........................................................................... 69
6
08 2012
Navigations - recording and editing ................................................... 70
Prerequisites .............................................................................................. 70
Variants of creating navigations ............................................................... 72
Creation using existing simulations ......................................................... 72
Context Assistant ....................................................................................... 73
Process-Assistant ...................................................................................... 78
Bubble Types .............................................................................................. 81
Edit navigations.......................................................................................... 83
Playing back navigations .......................................................................... 90
Publishing navigations .............................................................................. 92
Quizzes .................................................................................................. 95
General Principle ........................................................................................ 95
Creating Quizzes ........................................................................................ 95
Central Settings for Quizzes ................................................................... 102
Translating Quizzes using Translation Templates ................................ 103
Creating Quiz Documentation ................................................................. 103
Customizing the Quiz Styles ................................................................... 105
Books and Book Pages ..................................................................... 106
Basic principle and structure .................................................................. 106
Creating a book ........................................................................................ 106
Creating a book page ............................................................................... 109
Objects of the book pages ...................................................................... 114
Modeling business processes ................................................................ 126
Object editing ........................................................................................... 127
Actions and effects on book pages ........................................................ 132
Global settings for book pages ............................................................... 141
Books and book page view ..................................................................... 141
Supported file formats in book pages .................................................... 142
Exporting a book page archive ............................................................... 142
Translating books using translation templates ..................................... 143
Text Unit .............................................................................................. 144
Structure ................................................................................................... 144
Content-based separation through typification..................................... 146
Sample applications................................................................................. 147
Documentation ................................................................................... 151
Basic Principles of Documentation Creation ......................................... 151
Working in the Documentation View ...................................................... 152
Creating a Single Document ................................................................... 152
Editing of Documentations ...................................................................... 156
Process Flow ............................................................................................ 157
Heading Levels ......................................................................................... 159
08 2012
7
Contents
Process documents ................................................................................. 161
Creating a Master Document ................................................................... 166
Generating a compound Document........................................................ 168
Selecting document templates ............................................................... 170
Special documentation fonts .................................................................. 171
Publication .......................................................................................... 172
Local Playback ......................................................................................... 172
Publishing a Workarea ............................................................................. 172
Directly publishing individual objects .................................................... 175
Publication on a Server ........................................................................... 176
Publication on an Intranet Share ............................................................ 176
Defining a start link .................................................................................. 176
Generate SCORM/AICC ............................................................................ 177
Creating a context-sensitive help file ..................................................... 182
Administration in Producer ............................................................... 184
The Workarea ........................................................................................... 184
Central Workarea...................................................................................... 195
BPM Import ............................................................................................... 196
Using Filters in the Workarea .................................................................. 198
The search function ................................................................................. 202
Spell checker ............................................................................................ 203
Bubble Type Editor .................................................................................. 203
Customizing Glossary Texts ................................................................... 207
File Formats .............................................................................................. 211
Topics........................................................................................................ 211
Reference Counter ................................................................................... 212
Dependencies ........................................................................................... 212
Macro Overview .................................................................................. 214
The Standard Macroset (Simulations) .................................................... 214
The Navigation Macroset ......................................................................... 246
Producer Interface ............................................................................. 248
Program Window ...................................................................................... 248
Recording bar for Recording .................................................................. 265
Menu Overview ................................................................................... 270
Workarea Menu ........................................................................................ 270
Central Workarea Menu ........................................................................... 275
Project Menu ............................................................................................. 277
Book Page Menu ...................................................................................... 279
Edit Menu .................................................................................................. 280
Audio Menu ............................................................................................... 283
Action Menu .............................................................................................. 284
8
08 2012
Documentation Menu ............................................................................... 285
View Menu................................................................................................. 286
Tools Menu ............................................................................................... 289
Window Menu ........................................................................................... 296
Help Menu ................................................................................................. 297
Central Configuration Dialog ............................................................ 299
Initialization and fallback default parameters ........................................ 299
Application ................................................................................................ 302
Standard.................................................................................................... 306
trainer Configuration................................................................................ 308
Glossary .............................................................................................. 310
08 2012
9
Contents
SAP Workforce Performance Builder
Producer
Welcome to Producer, the SAP Workforce Performance Builder tool that enables you the
easy creation of web-based lessons that will take the user step by step through the contents
of your web or Windows application.
Technical Support
Please use the SAP Message Wizard on the SAP Service Marketplace to submit your
incidents on the following components:

KM-WPB // Workforce Performance Builder

KM-WPB-PRO // Workforce Performance Builder – Producer

KM-WPB-IPR // Workforce Performance Builder – Instant Producer

KM-WPB-MGR // Workforce Performance Builder - Manager

KM-WPB-NAV // Workforce Performance Builder - Navigator
If you are not familiar with the SAP Service Marketplace, please read the following
information:
10

To access the SAP Support Portal you need an S-user ID and password. You can
request access data from your SAP Super Administrator or register online on the SAP
Service Marketplace page under „Registration„.

With this user, you have read-access to all the contents of the SAP Support Portal,
you can use the SAP Community Network and SAP Help Portal, and you can also
book courses under SAP Education.

If you want to work with the support applications (Message Wizard, license key
request, system data maintenance, software download and so on), you need the
corresponding authorizations, which your SAP Super Administrator can give you.

You can find information for new users and about support applications on the Support
Portal Homepage under „Learn More„. There you can also register for a personal
overview demonstration of the SAP Support Portal.
08 2012
Note:
The Producer diagnosis function can also be used to check the technical data of the
installation on your computer (version, operating system, browser, etc.). Open Producer
and select Diagnosis… over the Help menu. The Producer transmits the required
information automatically and lists this in a corresponding dialog box. This information can
also be saved as a text file and sent as an E-mail attachment to the SAP support staff.
System Requirements
In order to successfully install and use Producer, your computer must fulfill the following
requirements:
Type
Specifications
Operating system
Windows XP (at least Service Pack 3), Vista and Windows 7
64 & 32 bit version
Processor
Pentium IV, at least 1 GHz
Memory
A minimum of 1 GB
Hard drive
200 MB of free space
Browser
Internet Explorer 7.0 – 9.0
Soundcard
Any soundcard
For production of audio lessons and book pages
Microphone
Any microphone
For recording of audio
Scenario
Requirement
SAP Business Suite
SAP GUI Scripting activated
Windows XP and Vista
Windows Automation API
Documentation Generation
MS Office (Word and PowerPoint) 2003 or higher
PDF Generation
MS Office 2007 and Plug-In Microsoft Save as PDF
MS Office 2010
Installing Producer
This section explains how to install the Producer and what you have to look out for in the
process.
08 2012
11
Contents
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites apply when installing the Producer:

To be able to install the Producer you require administrator rights for the PC on which
the Producer is to be installed.

Before installing, close all browser window so as to avoid subsequent conflicts with
Internet Explorer when working with the Producer.
Please note that require sufficient rights for installing add-ons and browser bars. This
is necessary as the Producer installs and uses its own Browser Helper Object (BHO),
the Extension.
The authors must also possess sufficient rights for using add-ons and browser bars in
order to be able to launch and use the BHO.
Note:
To install on a Citrix terminal server please refer to the chapter on working under Citrix.
The installation
To install Producer, perform the following steps:
1. The Producer is available in various language versions. To install, select the file in
the appropriate language version.
2. To open the installation program, double-click on the installation file program icon.
3. The installation program will guide you through all the steps for installing the
Producer. Now follow the instructions in the displayed dialog.
1. A welcome dialog with the Producer version will be displayed. Click on the
Next button.
2. Read the license agreement and accept it. Click on the Next button.
3. Select the installation folder. This will be proposed to you by the Producer in
C:/programs/SAP.
The Browse... button allows you to change the installation location. A dialog will
open allowing you to select a different folder.
4. Initiate the installation process by clicking on the Install button. The installation
will now be executed.
4. Once the Producer has been installed, you can close the installation program by
clicking on the Finish button.
If the launch Producer setting is activated, the Producer will be opened when the
dialog is closed.
In general use, you can launch the Producer by double-clicking on the Producer icon on the
desktop or via the start menu, from Programs -> SAP.
Upgrading an older Version
Should you already have worked with an older version of the Producer, you should observe
a number of points before and after installing the new version. You need to do this as faults
may otherwise occur.
12
08 2012
Using existing Workareas
Each new version of Producer revises the resources available for a Workarea. The ability to
use an existing Producer Workarea in a more up-to-date version of the Producer requires
the following procedure:
Note:
Before updating a Workarea we recommend making a copy to which you can revert in the
event of any problems.
1. Open the latest Producer and if necessary select the desired Workarea from the
Workarea -> Select Workarea menu.
2. Once the Workarea has been selected, an advisory dialog box will appear alerting you
to obsolete resources. Confirm this with Ok.
3. Now update the Workarea. This is done from the Edit configuration... menu, which can
be launched in the Project Explorer from the Workarea -> Administration menu.
4. A dialog box will open listing all of the standard installation resources. The resources
to be updated are selected and accompanied by the comment upgrade. Change the
selection if so required. Click on Ok to confirm the dialog.
Note:
Only the standard installation resources are offered and updated when updating a
Workarea. Individually produced resources are ignored. If need be please get in touch with
Support for information on whether your resources require updating.
5. In the next dialog, select the Overwrite existing option to replace the existing
resources with the updated resources. Again confirm the dialog by clicking on Ok.
6. The resources will then be imported into the Workarea. You will be able to view the
progress in a dialog. When importing has been completed, click on Ok to confirm the
dialog.
The Workarea has now been updated and you can begin work creating and editing learning
content. Once you have updated a macro set's resources the dialog will first prompt you to
reboot the Producer.
Using different versions of the Producer in parallel
Producer can be installed and used in parallel with an older installation of the Producer. But
please note that the Workareas used in the different versions are not mutually compatible
and that separate Workareas need to be created as a result.
In the event of you working with an older version than Producer you need to bear the
following in mind before and after installation so as to avoid faults and errors:
Avoiding version conflicts
To avoid version conflicts in the event of a parallel installation, you should deactivate the
older version's add-ons in Internet Explorer and activate the current version's add-ons. These
bear the name Extension with the corresponding version number.
08 2012
13
Contents
You will find the required setting:

in Internet Explorer 7 - 9 under Tools -> Manage add-ons
Automatic Update
The Producer allows automatic resource updates to be set up. To this end, the resources to
be updated can be held centrally. This storage location will then appear in the Producer.
When the Producer starts up, it checks whether resources are available and then imports
them into the Workarea.
Note:
Please note that when resources to be updated are administered centrally, users require
appropriate access rights to the storage location.
Defining the update function
You define the update function as follows:
1. Create a resources file *.dkp containing all the necessary resources to be updated. To
do so, export them from the Producer using the Export Archive function.
2. Now create update.xml. This identifies the resource files to be updated and the
corresponding Producer version. You will find the XML file structure below.
3. Set up a folder in your target directory, on a server, for example. File update.xml here
along with all the resource files to be updated.
4. Now specify the folder in the Central Configuration Dialog of the Producer to be
updated under Application -> Directories in the parameter Updates' path. To do so, go
to Search for folder to select the storage location.
Once the Producer has started the available resources will automatically be imported into
the Workarea. Individual resources can now continue being filed in the folder and will be
imported automatically each time the Producer starts.
Note:
Please ensure when using the update function that it overwrites any resources in the
Workarea.
update.xml
The update.xml structure may appear as follows:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<Update>
<Application name="producer">
<AppVersion Minimum="7"/>
<Resource mandatory="true">ressource.dkp</Resource>
</Application>
</Update>
Uninstalling Producer
If you would like to uninstall the Producer, this is done from the Settings -> System control ->
Software menu:
1. A dialog will open listing all the programs on your PC. Select the Producer.
2. Click on the Remove button.
14
08 2012
3. A dialog will open. Initiate the uninstallation process by clicking on the Yes button.
4. The Producer will be deleted from your PC. When uninstallation is complete you can
close the Software dialog.
Note:
When uninstalling the Producer only the program is deleted. The Workareas that were
created are retained for further use.
Alternatively you can also perform the uninstallation using the Producer.msi installation file
from the corresponding version of your Producer:
To do so, launch the installation program by double clicking on the installation file. Then click
on Next. Select the option Remove and confirm your selection by clicking on the Remove
button. The Producer will now be uninstalled.
08 2012
15
Contents
Settings
This chapter explains the required settings for recording and editing lessons in the Producer
as well as for playing back lessons in the trainer.
Required System Settings
This section describes the system settings for Windows operating systems. These settings
are necessary to allow the Producer recorder function to identify Windows application
objections without error.
If an existing setting does not match the required settings for the application profile, a dialog
box will appear to warn you when you start the recording. You can then cancel the recording
and configure the required settings.
The following sections details the required system settings for the operating system in
question and explains where to find the settings. Also note the system requirements for
Producer.
Windows XP
On Windows XP you can change the interface view in Screen properties, which are available
via Control Panel -> Display or via the Context menu -> Properties when you right click the
screen wallpaper.
Windows Design
You can specify the Windows design in the Appearance tab. Select the Windows XP Style
option for Windows and buttons along with the Blue (Standard) Color Scheme.
Color depth
In the Display settings tab select Highest (32bit) for Color quality.
Font smoothing
You must disable font smoothing. To do so, open the Effects dialog in Appearance and
disable the option Use the following method to smooth edges of screen fonts.
DPI setting
In the Settings tab you can press Advanced to access the display properties dialog. In the
dialog set the DPI setting in General to Normal size (96 DPI).
16
08 2012
Windows Vista
You can define the correct settings for the Windows Vista operating system as follows:
Windows Design
On Windows Vista you can change the interface view in Appearance settings, which are
available via Control Panel -> Window color and appearance or via the Context menu - >
Personalize when you right click the screen wallpaper. Select Windows Vista Basic as the
scheme.
Color depth
In the Display settings dialog Color dropdown select Highest (32bit). You can also access this
setting via Control panel -> Appearance and personalization -> Personalization -> Display
settings.
Font smoothing
You must disable font smoothing. To do so, open Appearance Settings -> Effects and disable
the Use the following method to smooth edges of screen fonts option.
DPI setting
Use Personalize -> Adjust font size (DPI) to access the dialog for DPI scaling. In the dialog
set the DPI scaling to Default scale (96 DPI).
Windows 7
You can define the correct settings for the Windows 7 operating system as follows:
Windows Design
On Windows 7 you can change the interface view in Appearance settings, which are
available via Control Panel -> Appearance and Personalization -> Change the theme or via
the Context menu - > Personalize when you right click the screen wallpaper. Select Windows
7 Basic as the scheme.
Color depth
In the Display settings dialog Color dropdown select Highest (32bit). You can also access this
setting via Control panel -> Display -> Screen resolution.
DPI setting
Use Personalize -> Adjust font size (DPI) to access the dialog for DPI scaling. In the dialog
set the DPI scaling to Default scale (96 DPI).
Font smoothing (anti-aliasing)
The edge smoothing function for screen fonts must be disabled. To disable this, open the
ClearType text optimization option under Start -> Control Panel -> Appearance and
Personalization -> Adjust ClearType text (Fonts).
ClearType text optimization
1. Disable the option Turn on ClearType.
2. Verify the native resolution for your monitor and click on Next.
3. The following four pages will provide you with examples of the font display. Select the
best version to meet your needs and click on Next.
4. In the last dialog box, click on Finish to confirm the changes.
08 2012
17
Contents
How to disable font smoothing system-wide
In some cases, deactivating the ClearType may not be sufficient for achieving error-free
graphic object recognition. If this happens, you can disable the smoothing option for screen
fonts system-wide. Please first consult your customer advisor before deactivating this option
on your own.
The option to disable is Smooth edges of screen fonts which is found under Control panel ->
System and Security -> System -> Advanced System Settings -> Settings (Performance).
Recording and Editing
According to your operating system, certain attitudes and practices for recording and
processing of projects considered.
Recording under Windows Vista and 7
Windows Vista and Windows 7 allows you to run an application as a user or administrator.
This is done via the command Launch as administrator in an application link's shortcut menu.
To allow applications to be recorded free from errors, you should ensure that the Producer
and application to be recorded are called with matching rights.
Editing highlights
In certain cases, it may possible that highlights for control elements are not properly
displayed during the recording or the rerecording and therefore cannot be edited. In such
instances, it is recommended to activate the option Show windows content while dragging,
which is found under System Properties -> Advanced.
Browser settings
A few changes are required to the security settings of the browser used so that the relevant
browser works perfectly with SAP products.
Note:
The attributes and settings for displaying and executing library, trainer and book reader
are stored in cookies. You should therefore activate cookies in your browser to ensure that
applications are run free from defects.
Note:
Possibly it may happen that Flash contents are displayed incorrect. In this case please
uninstall and reinstall the Flash plugin (don't do update only).
System Requirements
The following requirements need to be complied with to ensure that the library, trainer and
book reader can be used without problem and that lessons can be successfully played back:
18
08 2012
Browser
Version
Operating system
Internet Explorer
7.0 – 9.0
Windows 2000, XP, Vista or Windows 7
Firefox
3.6 – 6.0
Windows 2000, XP, Vista, Windows 7 or Mac OS X
10.5.x
Safari
4.0 – 5.1
Windows 2000, XP, Vista, Windows 7 or Mac OS X
10.5.x
Internet Explorer settings
To apply Internet Explorer settings, open Explorer and navigate to the Internet Options
command in the Tools menu.
Security settings
The following settings are to be set to Activate in the security settings under Security ->
Internet/Intranet -> Customize level:

ActiveX controls and plug-insBinary and script behavior



Display video and animation on a webpage that does not use external media
player
Miscellaneous

Allow META REFRESH

Allow script-initiated windows without size or position constraints

Allow websites to open windows without address or status bars

Launching programs and files in an IFRAME

Submit non-encrypted form data
Scripting

Active scripting
Advanced settings
The following setting is to be set to Activate under Advanced -> Browsing:

Enable third-party browser extensions
The following setting is to be set to Activate under Advanced -> Multimedia:

Play sounds in webpages
To play back lessons using the trainer locally or from CD, the following settings need to be
set to Activate on the Advanced tab in the Security area:

Permit running of active content in files on the local computer

Permit running of active content from CDs on the local computer
Popup blocker
The pop-up blocker needs to be deactivated to display lessons in the trainer. This option can
be accessed via the Tools -> Pop-up blocker menu.
Alternatively, you can input the corresponding URL in the pages that are enabled for pop-ups,
in the Pop-up blocker settings.
08 2012
19
Contents
Printing the stop page
To print the stop page of the trainer correctly you have to allow the print of background
elements. Activate the option Print background colors and images which is to be find within
the Advanced tab ancillary to the point Printing.
Additional settings for Internet Explorer 9
To enjoy error-free playback of learning contents it is necessary to deactivate the Protected
Mode.
Internet Explorer’s zone model
Security settings are divided into specific zones in Internet Explorer. Internet Explorer
distinguishes between four zones: Internet, Local Intranet, Trusted sites and Restricted sites.
It is possible to configure the settings in detail for the permitted actions within each zone. In
corporate networks, it is generally the administrator who configures these settings in
accordance with the company policy. Otherwise, users may also define the settings
themselves.
A document is assigned to a specific zone based on two characteristics:

Path / URL for documents – The paths/URLs for documents can be configured in
Internet Explorer for each of the four zones (Internet, Local Intranet, Trusted sites and
Restricted sites). All other paths/URLs are automatically allocated to the zone
Internet.

The file's source (when downloading via the Windows file system) - When a document
is downloaded from an external source, the zone that the file was in upon
downloading is automatically allocated to the file. In this case, Internet Explorer‟s
security settings for the zone (ZoneID) detected in the file will apply.
Attention:
To ensure that everything runs smoothly, it is recommended that you verify that the security
zone settings for the server as well as for the published lessons and the trainer on the end
user's side allow the lessons to be played back without any problems.
Settings for Mozilla Firefox
The following browser settings are required for trouble-free display in Mozilla Firefox.
Changes in the settings dialog
Select the Settings item in the Tools menu in the open browser. Now go to the Content item
in the settings dialog to see the required options.

Deactivate the setting Block pop-up windows.

Enable the use of JavaScript using the Activate JavaScript option.

Click on the Advanced button to open Advanced JavaScript settings. Activate
the following options: Position window before or after other windows

Hide status bar

Change status bar text
Settings using about:config
Additional browser configuration settings are available to you in Firefox. You can access
these settings by entering about:config in the address bar and confirming with Enter.
20
08 2012
The following options are to be set to the value true:

dom.allow_scripts_to_close_windows
This setting allows the browser windows to be closed.

signed.applets.codebase_principal_support
This setting displays browser windows in fullscreen mode.
A setting can be activated by double-clicking on it. It is then displayed in bold text and the
value true is set.
Note:
Because of the settings that have been activated, when starting the library or a lesson in the
trainer you will see a security message. Confirm this with Allow.
If necessary, activate the option Remember this decision so that the security message is not
displayed each time the library is started.
Note:
The default bubble audio effects in lessons and in the book reader actions are in WAV
format. A Windows Media Player plugin is required in order to be able to play back the files
in Firefox.
You will find further information on the subject at: https://addons.mozilla.org/enUS/firefox/browse/type:7
Firefox 3
When using Firefox 3, the following settings also have to be set to false using about:config:

dom.disable_window_open_feature.resizable
This setting prevents the size of an open browser window from being changed.

security.fileuri.strict_origin_policy
This setting allows links to be executed if an HTML page is launched from a local
drive.
Printing the stop page
To print the stop page of the trainer correctly you have to allow the print of background
elements. Activate the setting Print background (Colors and Images) which is to be find within
the page setup dialog under File -> Page setup.
Safari Settings
Specific browser settings are required for trouble-free display in Safari.
To do so, open the browser's settings dialog using the Edit -> Settings menu. In this menu,
select the Settings area and apply the following settings:

Activate JavaScript by selecting the Activate JavaScript option.

Deactivate the pop-up blocker by deselecting the Block pop-ups option.

Permit the use of cookies by activating the option Always or Only from websites that I
visit.
Printing the stop page (OS X only)
To print the stop page of the trainer correctly you have to allow the print of background
elements. Activate the option Print background in print dialog.
08 2012
21
Contents
Settings for the SAP Client
If lessons are to be recorded using the Producer via an SAP client, certain settings need to
be applied if the recording is to proceed without a hitch.
Settings up to SAP GUI 7.1
The following settings refer exclusively to the SAP client and are to be applied in Customizing
the local layout
in the New design and Options menus.
Settings under New Design


In the General area:

For Active theme select theme as application profile will be used by you, i.e.
Tradeshow for using SAP R/3 Tradeshow.

Under General set the value 100% for Font size.
In Color settings select exact the same theme as chosen in General.
Option settings
22

The tool tips are to be deactivated. To do so, select the setting None under Options ->
Quick info.

History under Local data is to be switched off.

Deactivate option Activate multibyte functionality for... under Internationalization in
area I18N.

To increase the controls' recognition accuracy during recording you should select the
option Narrow cursor under Cursor.

Under Scripting, script recognition during recording must be permitted. In this case,
the Enable Scripting option must be activated. This is necessary, as the objects in the
ECC window will be more easily recognized by means of the scripting interface.
Both client and server-side scripting has to be activated so that appropriate object
information can be read out. If scripting is enabled on both sides, a red / white icon will
be displayed on the bottom right of the application window.
08 2012
Note:
Please note that graphical object recognition is not possible when scripting is active. For
graphical object recognition, additional requirements are necessary which are not standard
for the Producer. Please contact your SAP consultant if you have any questions regarding
this.
In order to avoid disruptions from SAP messages, the sub-points Notify When a Script
Attaches to a Running GUI and Notify When a Script Opens a Connection must be
deactivated.
Settings as of SAP GUI 7.2 and higher
As of SAP GUI 7.2, there are several differences in the settings when compared to previous
versions.
The following settings can be defined from the option Customize Local Layout
.
Theme
Here you can select a theme for the corresponding application profile, such as SAP
signature, tradeshow…
Font
It is recommended that you use the standard font settings, which can be found here: Visual
Design -> Font Settings.
Cursor
In order to improve the accuracy for recognizing control elements during recording sessions,
the option Narrow cursor should be activated. This option can be found in your SAP client
under: Interaction Design -> Visualization & Interaction -> Cursor Width.
Tooltip:
Tooltips should be deactivated. To do so, go to: Notifications -> Tooltip Delay -> No Tooltip.
Scripting
Script recognition during a recording session can be activated under: Accessibility & Scripting
-> Scripting -> Enable Scripting. Scripting must be enabled so that the objects in the ECC
window can be properly recognized via the scripting interface from SAP.
The scripting must be activated on both the client and server side so that the object
08 2012
23
Contents
information can be extracted. If the scripting is activated on both sides, a red/white symbol
will appear in the bottom right-hand corner.
Note:
Please note that graphical object recognition is not possible when scripting is active. For
graphical object recognition, additional requirements are necessary which are not standard
for the Producer. Please contact your SAP consultant if you have any questions regarding
this.
In order to prevent SAP notifications from interfering during a recording session, the options
Notify when a script attaches to SAP GUI and Notify when a script opens a connection must
be deactivated.
History
The History option must be deactivated, which can be found under: Local Data -> History.
Settings for modal dialogs
The option R/3-Dialog (modal) is to be activated for optimal recognition of objects on modal
dialogs. The setting is located on the F4 Help tab of the settings dialog, which can be
launched from the Help -> Settings menu.
Font settings
Position-based objects such as explanation bubbles, interactive surfaces and highlights are
dependent on the predefined font properties in SAP; having differing settings can change the
layout of the interface. It is important that the settings are the same when recording as well as
when playing back the lesson (on users‟ PCs) in order to ensure that the objects are
displayed properly at all times.
In order to adjust the font in your SAP system, go to the font settings in your SAP GUI:
Font settings (up to SAP GUI 7.1)
The settings can be changed from the menu Options -> Font (I18N)...
If this menu entry is not enabled, you can activate the setting Activate Multi-Byte Functions
under I18N.
Font settings (SAP GUI 7.2 and higher)
You can adjust the settings under Visual Design -> Font Settings.
Page titles in page keys for SAP ECC
In the recording of SAP ECC it may be possible that advanced system information will be
included in the page key (e.g.: WA1(1)/000 SAP Easy Access instead of SAP Easy Access).
By performing a rerecording or playback a navigation this can result in an incorrect page
recognition. To avoid additional information in the page key, the following adjustment in the
registry of the operating system should be done:
1. Open the registry editor with the command regedit about the Run… dialog.
2. Select the entry HKEY_CURRENT_USER -> SOFTWARE -> SAP -> SAPGUI Front > SAP Frontend Server -> Administration in the editor.
3. Create a new DWORD value about Edit -> New:
Value name: ShowAdditionalTitleInfo
Value data: 1
4. Restart your SAP system so that the registry entry can take effect.
24
08 2012
5. Change the value in the registry to 0.Thus you can deactivate the display of the title
information.
Note:
Changes in the registry of the operating system should only be done by administrators.
Working with the Producer under Citrix
Certain requirements and settings are necessary in order to be able to use the Producer in a
Citrix environment to ensure that lessons are successfully recorded.
Note:
The Producer should preferably be installed on the terminal server as, with local installation,
recording using the Citrix client is only possible with graphical object recognition.
The Citrix clients
So-called clients are required to access the Producer and the applications on the terminal
server.lease note:

Use a version 11.0 Citrix client or later. With older versions, there can be no
guarantee that working with the Producer will be trouble-free.
Installation on the Citrix terminal server
You can install the Producer directly on a terminal server, thereby making it available to the
authors.
This is the recommended installation as it allows the Producer to access the various object
recognition interfaces instead of being blocked by the Citrix client when installed locally.
Internet Explorer, for postprocessing of the lessons, as well as Microsoft Office for generating
documentation are also to be installed on the same server and started in the same session.
The authors should also possess user rights for the Producer BHO, required for
postprocessing.
Note:
When working with Producer, ensure that you always implement each application you are
using on the same server and start it in the same session. This is necessary for trouble-free
recording, postprocessing and publication of the lessons.
Customizing display characteristics
The following system settings are also to be applied:

Set a color depth of 24 bits for the terminal server, workstation and Citrix client.
Please ensure that you apply matching settings for the systems.

Deactivate Screen font anti-aliasing on the terminal server and author workstation.
Seamless Load-Balancing Citrix
With a seamless transmission and for load-balancing, take care to ensure that the Producer
and the application to be recorded are launched in one session from the same server.
08 2012
25
Contents
Special attributes when using load-balancing:

The Producer has to be installed on each server in the cluster. Do not install the
Producer on the virtual server, which is there to balance the load between the
servers.
Special attributes when using seamless:

Set the same parameters (resolution, color depth, encryption) when publishing the
Producer via Citrix and for the target application.
Functional test for seamless transmission
Once the Producer has been provided via seamless transmission, a test should be run to
establish whether Internet Explorer can be launched from within the Producer.
If the Producer cannot be launched, seamless transmission must be converted to desktop
for each author on a one-time basis. The Producer is then launched using desktop
transmission and Internet Explorer is started.
If launch is possible, the transmission can be switched back to seamless.
Setting up an author environment
When creating lessons, it is recommended that an author environment be set up for the
authors on a separate server on which the authors are given access to all the necessary
applications, settings and rights. This ensures that the
Producer will operate smoothly and free from errors.
Please also pay attention here to the section: Installation on the Citrix terminal server.
The author workstations can be regular workstations or else be set up as thin PCs. Thin PCs
are workstations on which only one operating system is installed and which draw their data
and applications from a server.
The following overview summarizes the necessary requirements to be borne in mind for an
author environment:
Author workstations & Terminal server
26
Author environment

Producer installation

Installation of applications to be
recorded

Internet Explorer with corresponding
access rights

Microsoft Office for creating
documentation

Matching settings for color depth and
resolution

Deactivation of screen font antialiasing.

For the recording: Launching of the
Producer and target application in the
same session
08 2012
Settings for Microsoft Excel
The following setting is necessary for optimal object recognition for Excel recordings:

Disable the setting Window in the menu Freeze panes. This prevents incorrect
recognition of cell positions.
08 2012
27
Contents
Simulations - Recording
In this part of the online help, the basic procedures for using the automated recording
functions of Producer are explained.
With Producer, you use macro templates to make recordings, which automatically generate
dedicated text-based lessons for various different uses. A variety of control mechanisms
within the macros monitor the user's input on the basis of plausibility criteria and keep him or
her on a defined path within the system to be described in the lesson. Besides turn-based
recording, in which every single step in the lesson is recorded using a specific macro, the
JavaScript engine of the Producer enables the recording process to be fully automated. The
macros are embedded in a JavaScript that decides independently which macro is to be used
for a certain action. It also semi-automatically sets the parameters for (and generates) the
explanatory texts in bubbles for the macros in the recording. Additionally, context-dependent
dialogs and text can be shown during recording if this is useful or necessary for the recording
process at that time.
Requirements for Recording
For recording to take place fully automatically, a Workarea must be selected, a new project
set up and the standard macroset loaded into the project. This already happens when a new
project is created.
A detailed description of the various macro types and their functions can be found in the
Macro Reference section of this manual.
Basic Principle
When Producer is installed, the standard macroset is installed with it.
Essentially, macros consist of a sequence of certain events of a defined length which are
compiled therein. In producing the lesson, the parameters needed are automatically assigned
in a dialog window. In what is known as turn-based recording, this procedure has the
advantage that the recording can be made in relation to each individual topic, instead of
having to do it in real time for every single event. Moreover, production without macros, event
by event, would have meant that some of the functionality could only have been implemented
with a great deal of time and effort. The use of a macro set that is run automatically by
JavaScript also means that you do not have to select the macros manually in turn for each
separate topic, entering input where required for the parameters of a macro; instead, you can
concentrate completely on the recording process itself, simply clicking your chosen way
through the application.
Additionally, the use of macros makes it possible to produce lessons easily for a variety of
purposes at the same time, since only one project file is used right up to the point that the
finished lessons are exported. The macros – and the ability to export the lesson in different
modes – are retained in the form of a DPR file when the project is saved.
The use of macros has even more advantages. Aside from the standardization of lesson
structure and event sequences, these include the ability to produce lessons for an application
for all four modes: Demo mode, Practice mode, Test mode and Concurrent mode
simultaneously. This makes it possible to produce lessons that are absolutely identical in their
sequences and their structures; however, each is designed to interact with the user
differently. It is possible to wait until after creating a lesson before deciding which mode will
be published – or even, if necessary, several modes in parallel for various scenarios.
28
08 2012
Recording a Lesson
The following sections describe the procedure for using the Producer's recording function for
applications.
Note:
Recordings in the browser should only use Internet Explorer as the recording application
profiles are envisioned for this browser.
Settings for Recording
In the central configuration dialog under the Settings... menu item in the Tools menu in the
category Application -> Record Application, the options should be set as follows:
Area – Screen area
and
Rectangle – Workarea
If an HTML template has been defined, it is used for recording Windows, and the screenshots
generated are embedded into it, instead of using the standard page that was installed with
Producer.
For more information about the available options in the dialog, please refer to the related
chapter about the central configuration dialog in this help file and please note the
explanations at the bottom of dialog window.
Preparations for Recording
To commence recording, proceed as follows:
1. Open the application to be used for the recording. Choose the application page where
the process should begin and make any necessary changes before you start.
2. Open the recording bar using the Record application
command in the toolbar or
from the Action menu. It will then appear at the upper edge of the screen.
3. Choose application
You will now be asked to select an application for recording. Use the mouse pointer to
click in the desired application window. The Producer will now attempt to recognize
the correct application profile for recording. The chosen application profile will then be
displayed in the recording bar.
If it was not possible to identify a suitable application profile, the Producer will use the
default application profile. Please take note, however, that in this case the recognition
accuracy of the actions and elements in the application window might be limited,
depending on the application.
The profile used can be altered manually in the recording bar at any time afterwards.
This may for example be necessary if a change application was carried out.
Tip:
To facilitate starting your application, you can use the shortcut keys ALT + TAB to open it.
08 2012
29
Contents
4. Settings in the record bar
The record bar is divided into two parts, with status information on the left hand side
and controls on the right hand side. The status information shows whether the
Producer is ready for an action by the user, or is occupied with recording in the
background. In addition, helpful icons and text messages are displayed.

By going to Tools -> Settings...
, you get direct access to the category
Application -> Record Application of the Central Configuration Dialog.
Starting the Recording
1.
Start the recording using the Record
button in the recording bar.
2.
Should there be problems with the recording settings, this will be displayed in a
dialog.

Click on Cancel to resolve the problems indicated. Then restart the recording.

To proceed with the recording regardless, click on Ignore. But because of the
problems specified, the recording may fail or object recognition be restricted.
Performing a Recording
To record with an application, proceed as follows:
1. Navigate through the application as needed for the lesson. Your actions will be
recorded automatically.
Execute the actions slowly so that the Producer can correctly record the individual
actions.
2. The basis of automated recording is the recognition of objects and controls.
Algorithms are used to try to recognize each object that you click on in an application.

When an object is recognized, a corresponding macro (e.g. Input Text or Click
Link) is generated.

If an object is not recognized, it is recorded as Hotspot in accordance with the
Fallback method setting in the Central Configuration Dialog or else the Control
Selection Dialog will open:
Hotspot recognition
Recognition of the Hotspot creates a Click on link macro or a Text input macro
that can be edited once recording has been completed. This defines a specific
area which was clicked on and populates the macro parameters with standard
values.
30
08 2012
Control Selection Dialog
The Control Selection Dialog is where the control and text module to be used
can be defined.

You have the possibility to influence the automatic recognition of elements
during recording, should you not be satisfied with the results. Click on the Edit
Control button
. This opens the Control Selection Dialog.
Undo an action
If an error has been made during the recording, it is now possible to undo this action. By
clicking on Undo
, the macro created for the action is deleted, then you can simply
proceed with your recording as desired. Please note that the Undo function will only work with
the last action made. You cannot delete multiple actions.
In some instances it may be necessary to manually reset the data entered in the application
or change back to a previous application. To do so, simply pause the recording, make the
necessary changes and then proceed with the recording.
Interrupt a Recording
Automated recording can be interrupted using the Pause
Recording can be resumed using the Record
exact point at which it was interrupted.
button in the recording bar.
button. The recording is picked up at the
Inserting additional macros during recording
You can influence the design of your lessons even while recording is in progress. For
example, you have the opportunity to insert an additional screenshot in the form of a New
page macro or Explanation macro.
To do this, you have at your disposal in the recording bar at the menu Insert the Add
explanation and Add screenshot buttons. Clicking on one of the buttons inserts the
corresponding macro in the lesson. Then continue as usual with your recording. Upon
completion of the recording you can continue editing the macros as appropriate.
These functions can also be used in combination by you inserting a screenshot and then,
superimposed on it, an explanation in order to clarify a particular fact.
If you have minimized the recording bar, you can invoke these functions via the icon's context
menu in the taskbar.
Adding an explanation
An explanation can draw attention to a specific situation. Insertion while recording is in
progress makes it easier for you to take immediate account of specific content and not have
to look it up at a later date.
Selecting the function inserts an Explanation macro for the current topic.
Adding a screenshot
The Add screenshot (Ctrl+Shift+b) function allows you, while recording is in progress,
manually to set up an additional screenshot for the application page currently being displayed
without having to take any action in the application. This sets up a topic with a New page
macro.
08 2012
31
Contents
You can use this screenshot for additional information between actions or else separately to
draw attention to particular functions on the application page.
Change application during recording
You can change the application during recording if required by your process cycle.
Options in the central configuration dialogue
If a change of application is intended for a recording you have the opportunity to prepare it
beforehand in the central settings under Record applications:

With the option Automatic profile change, it is possible to switch applications. This
option can be activated from the main configuration dialog box. When choosing
another application during the recording, this setting allows you to define whether or
not the corresponding profile should be automatically chosen.

If you would like to show the change of application in the task bar of the tutorial, the
recording area needs to be enlarged for the task bar. In order to do so change the
Rectangle option.
Recording change of application
1. First of all, click on the Pause button
recording.
to accomplish a change of application during
2. Then go to the Tools menu in the recording bar and click the Choose application
function.
3. Click on the new application in order to select the application and determine the
application profile.
4. Continue the recording by selecting the Recording
function in the recording bar.
Ending the Recording
To end the recording of a project, click on the Stop
icon in the record bar.
This causes the End Lesson macro to be inserted automatically at the end of the lesson. That
makes sure that the playback of the lesson in trainer ends correctly.
Clicking on the button Close
in the recording bar will be closed an the recording finished.
Note:
If you only want to interrupt recording without ending it, please do use the Pause button in
the recording bar.
Fallback Method for Object Recognition
It may happen during recording that one control cannot clearly be recognized. In this
eventuality there are two methods for manually defining and recording the control:

Recognizing and recording the Hotspot

Defining the controlled using the control selection dialog
The particular method can be defined in the Central Configuration Dialog using the Fallback
method option. This is located in the Application -> Record application -> Fallback method for
object recognition area.
32
08 2012
Recording a Hotspot
Recording the Hotspot defines an area for a control in respect of an unrecognized control at
the point that has been clicked. The Producer creates a Click Link macro or where text entry
is involved a Input Text macro and populates the relevant macro's parameters with standard
values. This does not involve any object information being read out of the application.
Recognition of the Hotspot allows the recording to proceed without interruption and postediting can then be carried out in the Macro Editor and in the Topic View.
Note:
There is no visible difference between a recorded Hotspot macro and a regular control
macro. A Hotspot can be recognized from the element type that can be read out of the
Macro Editor in the Rerecord subcategory. A Click on Link macro has the value
WINHotspotArea and a Text entry macro has the value WINHotspotEdit.
Activating Hotspot Recognition
Hotspot recording is to be activated in the Central Configuration Dialog using the Fallback
method option. To do so, select the menu item Recognize Hotspot.
The Hotspot Size setting in the Fallback method option defines the Hotspot's width and
height. The size is defined in pixels and describes a rectangle arranged around the clicked
point. The button adjacent to the text field opens an editing dialog box for the size.
Note:
Please note that recorded Hotspots will affect a possible ReRecording of a lesson. As the
Producer does not save any object information for the control, the Hotspot itself is
rerecorded during ReRecording even if there is no control at this point.
In this regard please consult the section on ReRecording Hotspots.
Note:
Before creating a Hotspot the Producer first performs a graphical object recognition. It is
therefore possible that the size used will not be the one defined for the Hotspot but the size
of an object area identified during recognition.
Editing the Hotspot during Recording
Even during recording you can edit the Hotspot in which you can define the area for the
control. This involves activating the Edit Hotspots option in the Standard -> Settings ->
Windows recording area of the Central Configuration Dialog.
If now a control is not recognized, a selection frame and the associated bubble will appear
around it. The selection frame can be positioned over the control by moving it vertically and
horizontally. The bubble can also be moved to the desired position. Then click on the Enter
button to confirm your adjustments.
The Control Selection Dialog
If while recording is in progress, the Producer fails to recognize one of the controls you have
selected, a control selection dialog will appear. This dialog allows you to define the control for
the application manually.
08 2012
33
Contents
To define a control manually, proceed as follows:
1. Highlight the control to select it. The selected area will be displayed in close-up in the
dialog window, allowing you to align it with precision.
The screenshot thus created will be set up as the Field icon.
2. Enter a name for the control in the Name field. This will then appear in the macro as
Field name.
3. Select under Type which type of control you would like to define.
4. Then set the Subtype for a more accurate definition. The available selection is a
function of the specified Type. The automatically generated text will be set up in
accordance with the Subtype.
5. You can use Value and End Value to define an initial and, if so required, an end value
for a control. This is only necessary for certain controls where a value is required. As
a rule you can ignore these fields.
6. Click on OK to confirm the dialog. The recording or ReRecording will then continue.
The Move button allows you to relocate the dialog on the screen view to give you an
uninterrupted view of the application user interface.
Activate Control Selection Dialog
The control selection dialog can be activated in the Central Configuration Dialog in the
Application -> Record application area. To do so, go to the Fallback Method for Object
Recognition subcategory and select the Control Selection Dialog option in the selection
menu.
34
08 2012
Editing a control while recording is in progress
You can customize a selected control and its automatically generated text even while
automated recording is in progress. This requires you to click on the Edit Control
button
in the recording bar once you have executed a control. The control selection dialog will then
open.
You can use this to influence the Field icon selection or customize the Field name. Then click
on OK to resume recording.
Note:
In order to be able to edit the control using the control selection dialog while recording is in
progress it is not necessary to activate the Control selection dialog option as a Fallback
method in the central settings. This is the case as the Edit control option is not a Fallback
method for an unrecognized control but merely enables editing of a control during recording.
Recording in Internet Explorer
Recording in Internet Explorer requires a distinction to be made between whether the
displayed browser content or the browser content and browser interface are to be recorded.
Optimal recognition of the controls requires specific settings to be applied in the configuration
dialog (area Application -> Record Application) depending on the variant in question.
Note:
When recording in the Internet Explorer please make sure, that the zoom setting is set to
100%. Other settings can lead to errors during recording.
Note:
When recording web applications in Internet Explorer version 7 and higher, fonts may not be
displayed in the clear type format. This is necessary to make it possible for fonts to be
correctly identified. To do this, deactivate the Always use ClearType for HTML setting in the
Internet options under Advanced -> Multimedia.
Recording the browser content
You can only record the browser content i. e. only the actual webpage or application. The
browser's user interface is not recorded during the process and is therefore not visible on the
screenshot. This requires the following setting to be applied:

Select the Foreground window setting in the Area parameter.
Recording the browser content and browser user interface
Apply the following settings if you want to record the browser window content as well as the
browser user interface, to display menus and settings for example:

Select the Screen area setting in the Area parameter.

Activate the Customize application window setting.
ReRecording a Lesson
When using various applications, companies often encounter a variety of problems when
creating the corresponding training material.
08 2012
35
Contents
The applications are often used across locations in different countries and language regions
and therefore consist of multiple language versions. However, the processes and operations
when using the applications in the various language versions are more or less identical.
Therefore, it is necessary that companies have consistent training material explaining a
particular process available in the relevant languages in which the task is to be carried out.
Another problem lies in the new versions of an application and the changes to its interface
that come part and parcel with these newer versions. This requires a fast and simple update
of the existing training material in order to be able to describe processes according to the
current version of the relevant application.
Problem definition
The following problems arise:

Localization: The goal is to create a language variant for the corresponding lesson
based on a target application in a different language.

Program update: The goal is to update the lesson based on a new version of the
target application.
Troubleshooting in the Producer
The Producer offers the possibility of ReRecording. With this method it is possible to
rerecord a lesson in a different language as well as update the screenshots so that they
correspond to new versions of the application. This process is executed automatically by the
Producer and has the advantage that a lesson does not have to be manually recorded once
again by the author.
ReRecording thus greatly simplifies coherent creation and updating of training material,
thereby drastically reducing the amount of effort needed when making a revised version.
Project changes
The following is some but not all of the information saved in the macros after a project has
been recorded:
1. Automatically generated instruction text
2. Field Name / Identifier
3. Field-Icon / Graphic
36
08 2012
4. Screenshot application page
This information has to be customized to update or localize a project. The corresponding
changes can be automated to a large extent using ReRecording:
Area
Example
Description
Automatically generated
instruction texts
Click on...
The instructions generated
while recording have to be
customized according to the
target application, e.g.
translated into a different
language.
Identifier of the recognized
objects / Field Name
Save
ReRecording automatically
modifies the recognized
objects‟ identifiers.
Generated graphics / Field
Icons
ReRecording automatically
customizes the graphics of
the objects contained in the
bubble texts.
Generated screenshots
ReRecording automatically
localizes the application page
screenshots into a different
language or a new version of
the target application.
Manually edited instruction
texts
This function applies your
inputs to the system.
Manually edited texts cannot
automatically be translated
with ReRecording. These
texts will be exported in
translation templates in XLIFF
or Word format, translated
externally and then reimported.
ReRecording functionality
During the original automated recording of an application, the Producer creates a macro for
each executed action. This way, a lesson contains a sequence of macros, which when put
together describe the process.
When ReRecording takes place, the Producer repeats in this process in the recorded
08 2012
37
Contents
application. Here a lesson is gone through macro by macro and each action is executed and
recorded once again in the corresponding application.
This process is usually automatic and, depending on the settings actions, can also be
executed manually. This way the user can select a control element during the ReRecording
process and thus has the option of changing the recording process. To recognize and
execute the recorded control of an action during ReRecording, the Producer compares the
object parameters such as position, identifier and size.
Manual intervention by the author is necessary in some cases, if for example there is too
much of a difference between a control and the originally recorded object following a program
update or if there are process changes as a result of new or remote process steps. An action
can also be executed manually if it was previously defined for a control. This allows the user
during ReRecording to select a control and optionally influence the ReRecording process.
Translating a lesson
When the language of a lesson is changed using ReRecording, the lesson will be translated
into one of the project languages available in the Producer. Here, the automatically
generated bubble texts of the macros are replaced by text segments in the previously
specified new project language. The original screenshots are updated with screenshots from
the other language version of the application.
However, lessons also usually contain individually inserted texts. With the help of translation
templates the text segments can be customized before ReRecording.
Note:
If only the texts of the bubbles are to be translated into a different language, without
ReRecording the lesson, this can be done by using the Automated Translation function.
Automatic translation makes sense if an application is only available in one language, but is
needed in a number of different languages.
Updating a Lesson
When updating a lesson as a result of the production of a new version of an application, the
corresponding screenshots of the interface and buttons are rerecorded. The relevant bubble
texts can be kept or updated as required.
Preparations for ReRecording
Before being able to start ReRecording, a number of preparations must be made.
Note:
ReRecording the lessons with branches is not possible. A lesson will go through the
ReRecording process macro by macro in a linear fashion. However, branches provide
multiple options for the path of a lesson which the Producer cannot automatically follow.
Branches should therefore only be integrated into a lesson after ReRecording.
To be able to rerecord lessons with branches, please consult the ReRecording the Lessons
with Branches section.
Preparing the application for ReRecording
Before starting the ReRecording some preparations are necessary in the application to be
rerecorded so that the ReRecording can be carried out in accordance with the originally
recorded lesson:
38
08 2012

To localize a project select the application in the desired language.

Open the application page containing the first topic and ensure that the same status
as in the original recording is available (e.g. same tree structure).

Make sure that the dates and entries correspond to the system of the original
recording. It might be advisable to log off and log on to the system in order to reset
existing values. If a project needs to be localized the entries for the recording should
be adjusted to the particular language.

When using dynamic pages, make sure that the state is according to the original
recording. If so required the application should be closed and reopened to remove all
changes.

When localizing a project, make sure that the design of the application (e.g. SAP GUI)
is the same as in the recording.

To be able to rerecord a process, this should be repeated multiple times in the
application, e.g. creating bill of materials or routings in SAP. Creating alternative
recordings usually results in a divergent process. If necessary the created element
must be deleted or the material copied in order to enable a new recording.
Note:
Elements may be deleted when working in the test system only!

When ReRecording SAP applications ensure that you are only logged on to one SAP
system. If applicable, first close all the sessions that are not required for the
ReRecording.
Interactive selecting the control element
During the ReRecording process, a control element can be selected interactive instead of
automatically by the Producer. This can be useful if the control element is located at a
different position in the application or a different control element is to be chosen for
ReRecording.
This option should be applied to control elements which were often not recognized during
previous ReRecording attempts. This way, the Producer does not have to look for them first.
To be able to interactive select a control element when ReRecording, activate the Interactive
setting in the corresponding macro for the control element. This can be done in the
Subcategory Rerecord of the Macro Editor.
During ReRecording the Producer stops at the corresponding macro. You can now select
the matching control element. Please consult the Executing ReRecording section as well.
It is also possible to use the Interactive setting when switching between applications during
ReRecording. This way a recording can be stopped in order to select the application.
Activate the Interactive setting for the first executable macro of the new application.
Note:
An application change must be carried out during the ReRecording process as the Producer
cannot automatically select an application.
08 2012
39
Contents
Main Settings for ReRecording
A number of different settings can be made for ReRecording in the Central Configuration
Dialog. The Central Configuration Dialog can be opened from the menu Tools -> Settings...
From here, select Standard -> Settings -> Windows ReRecording.
The following settings can be adjusted:

Response Time
This value entered here defines how long the Producer waits during the ReRecording
process for a new screen to be rendered before performing and recording the next
action in the application. The value is entered in milliseconds. Should the default value
of 2 seconds (2000ms) not be sufficient because your application response time is
longer, you should increase this value.

Keep Crop
This setting specifies that a layout that was set up for a New Page macro is to be kept
intact.
If this setting is deactivated, the layout will not be applied during ReRecording. This
can be necessary if a control element is at a different position in the new version of an
application and the layout has to be reset.

Keep bubble orientation
Activating this setting retains the selected bubble orientation. If this option is
deactivated the orientation of the bubble may change relative to the original lesson
according to the position and size of the object to be rerecorded.

Language dependent type
If this parameter has been activated, the name of the Control is a clue that can be
used to recognize it during ReRecording. This is useful in new versions of an
application in which corresponding Controls occupy a different position or are
differently designed. A search then takes place for this Control via the relevant
interface using the associated name.
Automatic Mode


Hotspot Handling
This setting defines how a click range is to be edited during automatic ReRecording of
a lesson.

No Editing
If this option is selected a Hotspot is recorded automatically by Producer. In
the process the Producer uses the recorded position to identify a control
device at this position. If no control device is identified a Hotspot is recorded at
this point.

Show Editor
With this option the rerecording changes at a Hotspot from the automatic to the
interactive mode. As a result it is possible to edit the Hotspot. Refer to the
chapter on interactive ReRecording for this.
Drop down list interactive
Activate this setting to rerecord the drop down lists of your lesson interactively during
the automatic ReRecording. Thus the particular choice can be influenced manually.
Interactive mode

40
Bubble type
This parameter defines which bubble is displayed in the editor during ReRecording
when a control device is edited.
08 2012

Show explanation macros
With this option the explanation macros of a project can be displayed and edited
during ReRecording.
Starting ReRecording
ReRecording can start once the corresponding preparations for it have been made. You
should proceed as follows:
1. Open the application to be rerecorded. Amend it if so required as described in the
preparations for ReRecording.
2. Open the recording bar for ReRecording. To do so, click on the Rerecord Application
button in the Producer.
3. Choose the application you wish to record by clicking on the corresponding
application window.
4. The application is recognized in the recording bar by the Producer, and the matching
application profile is selected.
If the corresponding application profile is not recognized. the Producer uses the
standard profile. Alternatively, you can use the selection list to choose a different
application profile.
Once the application profile has been specified, you can start the recording process.
5. Begin ReRecording by pressing the Rerecord button
in the recording bar.
Should any problems arise relating to the settings, they will be shown in a dialog after
the start.
1. Click on Cancel to fix the problems displayed. Then start ReRecording again.
2. Should you nevertheless wish to begin ReRecording, click on Ignore. The
recording may very well fail or object recognition may be limited to a certain
extent because of the problems listed.
6. The parameter dialog is opened once ReRecording has started. You can apply
various project-specific ReRecording settings in this dialog. Read the section on
project-specific settings for the description of individual settings.
After you have applied the desired settings in the Parameters dialog, select the button for the
corresponding type to start the ReRecording. Choose between Automatic ReRecording or
Interactive ReRecording. The types define the type of manual intervention for unrecognized
controls.
08 2012
41
Contents
ReRecording Start Dialog
This dialog can be opened by starting ReRecording by pressing the Rerecord button
which can be found in the recording bar for ReRecording.
,
The following settings can be adjusted in the Parameter dialog:

Clone Project
Selecting this option will clone the project before ReRecording commences. The
ReRecording will then be performed in the cloned project.
The project needs to be cloned as the ReRecording is based on the original lesson
that is overwritten during ReRecording.

Language
This setting can be used to specify a project language for ReRecording a lesson. All
of the project languages available in Producer can be selected from a drop-down
menu.

Project title
If you have selected the option Clone Project you can specify the name of the clone in
the Project title option.

Revise values
If you select this option, you can amend the text box inputs or selections you have
made in drop-down lists after you have applied settings in a dialog. This allows you,
for example, to amend inputs for desired language or application version. The dialog
is displayed after the relevant ReRecording type has started.
ReRecording types
In the Parameters dialog you have two buttons available you can use to start an appropriate
type for the ReRecording. The types define what to do when dealing with unrecognized
controls.

Automatic
This button starts the Automatic ReRecording. With this recording method, an
unrecognized control is recorded as a Hotspot.
It is also possible to define how the method will deal with a recorded Hotspot. That
means that this recorded Hotspot can be edited with an editor or else use the wizard
for the ReRecording.

Interactive
This button starts the Interactive ReRecording. This recording method can be used to
edit unrecognized controls as a Hotspot directly on the application. This involves
opening an Editor which makes it possible to position and edit the range of the object
area and the bubble.
During Interactive ReRecording each control found is to be confirmed by pressing the
Enter key in order to resume ReRecording.
The interactive ReRecording still serves as a fallback method in a situation where a
conflict occurs during automatic rerecording. In a conflict situation the mode is
changed to interactive mode and after the conflict situation was resolved it is changed
to automatic mode again.
Partial ReRecording
In addition to the normal ReRecording you can also launch ReRecording from a specific topic
or for specific, selected topics. This allows lessons to be partially recorded and it is thus not
necessary to rerecord the entire lesson.
42
08 2012
Rerecord selected topics
This selection allows you to rerecord several related lesson topics. This is useful, for
example, if a partial update of associated lessons is required as a result of changes within an
application.
Before starting to rerecord, highlight the desired topics in the thumbnail view Then select the
option Rerecord selected topics.
Rerecord from current topic
This selection allows you to start ReRecording from a specific topic. This setting is useful if
you are only supposed to rerecord from a particular section of a lesson. The topic must be
selected in the Producer thumbnail view prior to ReRecording. Then select the option
Rerecord from current topic.
Executing ReRecording
Once the ReRecording has been started the Producer executes it automatically:
1. When ReRecording a lesson, the Producer goes through the macros from the original
recording step by step. The actions of the individual macros are executed in the
application and recorded.
While this is happening, the recording bar is displayed in red, showing the recording
and thereby the recognition and execution of the control elements.
2. According to the type selected in the start dialogue the ReRecording is accomplished
as described in the respective chapters:

Automatic ReRecording

Interactive ReRecording
Now record the tutorial as described in the particular subchapters.
Note:
If an action was incorrectly executed during ReRecording it is advisable to terminate the
ReRecording and use the selection Rerecord from current macro to resume ReRecording
the remainder of the lesson from this topic.
3. If ReRecording was executed successfully, a dialog will appear. Confirm it with OK.
Close the recording bar with the Close button
08 2012
.
43
Contents
Automatic ReRecording
When rerecording in automatic mode every learning step is recorded automatically by
Producer. An intervention by the user is only necessary if a conflict situation occurs. In this
event the rerecording changes into interactive mode and after the conflict situation was
resolved it changes back to automatic mode.
If a conflict situation occurs during rerecording you are informed by means of an explanation
bubble. Such a conflict can be:

A control device does not match the originally recorded control device

A control device could not be identified

The Interactive option was activated for a macro
In addition to the occurring conflict situation the bubble text informs you how to resolve it.
Conflict approach
If one of these cases occurs, the automatic mode changes into interactive mode. By selecting
the Show Control
function in the recording bar the designated control device can be
recorded interactively. Click on it in order to do so.
If a control device matches the originally recorded one you can also confirm it under Accept
Control
.
Control device was set interactive
If the macro setting Interactive is applied in the subcategory Rerecord before the rerecording
takes place, the Producer stops at this point and changes to interactive mode. Now the
object can be edited. After confirming Accept control device in the recording bar the
rerecording is resumed.
This procedure is also executed if the interactive rerecording was activated in order to
rerecord Hotspots. The particular Hotspot handling setting can be defined in the area
Standard -> Settings -> Windows ReRecording in the central configuration dialogue.
Interactive ReRecording
The interactive ReRecording allows checking the control devices which need to be
rerecorded and to influence them directly during the recording process. Furthermore, learning
steps can be rerecorded, deleted or skipped.
Using the interactive ReRecording makes sense when many modifications need to be made,
several objects were recorded as Hotspot or major alterations were introduced to the
application with regard to the original tutorial.
Accomplishing interactive ReRecording
Interactive ReRecording stops at every object and displays it including its mark and bubble
during the process. Now you can edit the object or, if it is correct, resume rerecording directly.
Confirm the object via the Accept Control
rerecording is resumed.
button in the recording bar. As a result the
Conflict approach
If a conflict situation occurs during ReRecording you are informed by means of an
explanation bubble. Such a conflict can be:
44

A control device does not match the originally recorded control device

A control device could not be identified
08 2012

The Interactive option was activated for a macro
In addition to the occurring conflict situation the bubble text informs you how to resolve it.
By selecting the Show Control
function in the recording bar the designated control device
can be recorded interactively. Click on it in order to do this.
If a control device matches the originally recorded one you can also confirm it under Accept
Control.
Editing in interactive mode
If an object is rerecorded interactively it appears within a selection frame and with the
corresponding bubble. The selection frame can be moved within the application, adjusted in
size via the handles and positioned above the control. The bubble can also be moved to the
designated position; a click in the bubble allows editing the particular bubble text.
It is possible to navigate in the target application during interactive ReRecording in order to
select a certain page or to make required adjustments in the application.
Confirm the designated adjustments when completed under Accept Control
resume rerecording.
in order to

Show Control
If a control is not displayed correctly you can directly rerecord it via the Show Control
function. Select the function and click on the control.

Step Preview
The Step Preview displays the originally recorded learning step so that it can be
reproduced and the object adjusted accordingly.
Further functions
The Tools and Insert menus allow you to select further functions for editing the tutorial during
ReRecording:

Insert Explanation (Insert)
This button allows you to add an explanation macro during ReRecording. After
clicking the button select the position for the bubble, then define the explanation text
and confirm it with Ok.

Delete Control (Tools)
This function offers the opportunity to delete the currently selected object. Then the
ReRecording is resumed using the following object in the tutorial.

Skip Control (Tools)
This function allows skipping a recorded control if it does not need to be taken into
account for the ReRecording and thus remains unmodified.
Note:
The bubble displayed in interactive mode corresponds to the setting in the central
configuration dialogue. It can be either the Demo or the Practice bubble.
08 2012
45
Contents
Recording additional topics
While ReRecording is in progress you can use automated recording to record additional
topics and add them to your lesson. This comes in useful, for example, for creating additional
inputs in a form.
To record additional topics you need to run ReRecording interactive. Subsequently,
ReRecording comes to a halt at each topic to be rerecorded with the control that has been
found requiring confirmation. This enables you to edit the control that has been found as well
as access the recording bar functions and launch automated recording.
Newly recorded topics are inserted in front of the current topic to be rerecorded at which
automated recording was started. This is necessary so that once inputs have been committed
ReRecording means that they are displayed on their respective screenshots in subsequent
topics.
This is how you record additional topics:
1. If you arrive at a learning step before which you would like to insert other learning
steps, start the recording at this stop. In order to do so select the Record Control
button at the menu Insert in the recording bar.
Note:
Do not confirm the topic in front of which you would like to record additional topics by
pressing on the Enter key. Start automated recording directly as otherwise ReRecording will
continue.
2. Record the designated control devices in the same way as during regular recording.
Refer to the chapter on accomplishing recording.
3. If you would like to resume rerecording afterwards press the ESC key. The
rerecording is resumed at the learning step where you started the recording.
Change of application
If a change of application takes place during the course of a tutorial a particular procedure is
required in order to accomplish the change during ReRecording. This procedure applies to
the automatic mode as well as to the interactive mode.
At the point of the application change the ReRecording displays an explanation bubble to
inform you that the control device cannot be identified. Now proceed as follows to accomplish
the change of application:
1. First of all click on the Pause
button.
2. Then go to the Tools menu in the recording bar and click the Choose application
function.
3. Click on the new application in order to select the application and determine the
application profile.
4. Continue the recording by selecting the ReRecording
button in the recording bar
Key functions for ReRecording
During ReRecording different actions can be performed using key functions. They depend on
the particular type:
46
08 2012
Automatic mode
Keys
Definition
Pause
With the Pause key ReRecording can be
paused.
Esc
With the Esc key ReRecording can be
cancelled.
Interactive mode
Keys
Definition
Enter
With this key you can confirm a displayed
control device and continue ReRecording.
Ctrl + Enter
With this key you can confirm a displayed
control device and continue ReRecording if
the bubble is displayed in edit view.
Ctrl
With a pressed Ctrl key you can navigate
freely in the application without an action
being recorded.
This is useful for instance for selecting lists, in
order to open them and record the selection.
Esc
Terminates recording if further learning steps
are inserted via the recording function.
Translation of individual texts
In a lesson, manually inserted texts are not translated when ReRecording as they do not
constitute text blocks which were automatically generated by the Producer. They could, for
example, be changed bubble texts or the texts from inserted documentation macros.
The texts must be translated by the author or a translator into the corresponding language
after ReRecording.
For the translation of the individual text blocks of a lesson, the Producer provides the option
of producing translation templates. Here, each manually created text file is produced as a
Word or XLIFF file. The texts can be translated in the corresponding files and then imported
into the lesson. When importing, the original texts of the lesson are replaced with the
translations.
A translation template can be produced in the Project Editor via the menu Tools ->
Language/Version Change -> Export Translatable… Once translated, the texts can be reinserted using the Import Translation… command.
For a more detailed description of the use of translation templates, please read the section on
translating a lesson using translation templates.
ReRecording the Lessons with Branches
ReRecording the lessons with branches is not possible. A lesson will go through the
ReRecording process macro by macro in a linear fashion. However, branches do provide a
number of options for progression, which is why some control elements of a branch cannot
be found during ReRecording.
As a general rule, branches should therefore only be integrated into the corresponding lesson
after ReRecording.
08 2012
47
Contents
If a lesson with branches exists, it will require a different procedure for ReRecording:
When working with branches, it is necessary to partially execute the ReRecording of a
lesson. This entails the corresponding lesson being split up in order to be able to rerecord
topics that run linear to one another. Here, only the corresponding topic with the branch will
need to be edited.
When working with branches, it is necessary to remove them after ReRecording so that they
can reattached.
Partial ReRecording of Linear Topics
The following describes how to carry out ReRecording for a lesson with branches.
1. Select the corresponding page of the lesson.
If required, make sure that all necessary preparations described in the Preparing to
Rerecord section have been made.
2. Now select the related topics you want that do not have a branch.
3. Start ReRecording in the toolbar by selecting the option Rerecord selected topics.
4. Begin ReRecording as you would normally. Here you should consult the Executing
ReRecording section.
Repeat this step for additional sections of the lesson if required.
Editing the Branches
The branches can be edited once the recording of the sections that run parallel to one
another has finished. To do so, they have to be deleted and set up again. If possible, take
note of the branch structure before removal so that you can set the branches up again in a
way similar to their original form.
1. Delete the branch. To do so, select the corresponding New Page macro and click on
the Remove Branch button in the Macro Editor.
Also delete the subsequent macros belonging to the branch, except for the first macro
with a control element under the New Page macro.
2. Recording the control elements for the alternative paths can be done using automated
recording. You should proceed as follows:
48
08 2012
1. Select a topic for the branch from within the Producer.
2. Go to the application and select the position in the lesson where this branch
occurs.
3. Start recording in the Producer by pressing the Record Application button
.
4. Click the control element for the other path in the application.
5. End the recording process once this has been completed by pressing the Stop
button in the recording bar.
3. Carry out these actions for each control element you wish to integrate into the branch
that is to be created. To do so, go back a step in the application if required.
4. Each control element belonging to the branch must now be compiled in the lesson.
To do this, select the corresponding New Page macros. Compile these using the
Merge selected New Page Macros function in the menu Tools -> Automation.
5. Once you have finished recording the additional control elements you will now be able
to create the branch. Please consult the create branch section.
6. To finish, edit the corresponding bubble text if required.
Repeat this step for all of the other branches in the lesson.
Automatic Text Generation
Using the determined or entered values for the description of an object and the values in
entry or option fields or in the list box, the Producer generates from text modules a
descriptive or instructive text for the bubbles used in the macro; the recording with macros
can be either automated or manual.
Texts generated this way differ from each other, depending on whether they are for Demo
mode or Practice mode, since they are optimized for their purpose. In Demo mode, the
automatically generated texts are reserved for giving explanations to complement the lesson
being demonstrated. In Practice mode, however, these texts contain concrete instructions for
users on what they should do to continue with the lesson.
The automatically generated texts can be edited and adapted at any time in the Macro Editor.
Automatic Text Recognition
When carrying out recording with macros, the Producer attempts to find out the name of the
object to be described, so as to be able to use it later on for the automatic generation of
descriptive texts. When recording with a Windows application, an image of the object that has
been clicked on is integrated in the text of the bubble.
Nevertheless, it can happen that the Producer recognizes an element on the page, but
cannot clearly identify the descriptor. In such cases, the descriptor needs to be amended
manually.
08 2012
49
Contents
Simulations - Editing
Once a simulation has been recorded in the Producer it can be edited in numerous ways.
For example, so as to enance the didactic benefit of the lessons and promote a more diverse
presentation of the content. As before, translation templates can be used to render the
content into any desired language.
In addition to deleting and adding content in the form of topics or recording macros, and
completing documentation macros, the content of macros themselves can be changed and
parameterized.
Please take care at all times when editing that the changes you make do not compromise the
consistency of the project in relation to teaching material that has yet to be added.
Tip:
Make sure you save the project at regular intervals. You can also use the Save
Automatically option.
Designing simulation pages
You can design the topic pages in your simulations any way you want. This can be useful if
the screenshots of the recording do not take up the entire screen area or if you are using
imported pages.
The pages are designed on the basis of the book page design so that the book page styles
available in the workarea can be used. You can find the respective settings under Standard > Global Macro-Parameter -> Page style in the master configuration dialog. You can create
the design as the default design for your workarea or for a specific project.
Settings
50

Style:
The setting defines the page design. A book style that uses the macro can be
selected for this from the drop-down list.
The setting also affects the book page objects inserted in a simulation.

Centered background image:
This setting centers the background image or the simulation screenshot. If the option
is deactivated, it is positioned in the upper left-hand corner.

Page color:
Determines the color of the page. The Select color... function can be used to define an
appropriate value. This can be specified using the RGB or HSV color space or as a
hexadecimal value. If no background color is to be displayed, click the Transparent
button.

Background color:
Determines the color of the background. The Select color... function can be used to
define an appropriate value. This can be specified using the RGB or HSV color space
or as a hexadecimal value. If no background color is to be displayed, click the
Transparent button.

Border:
Defines the thickness of the border in pixels. If no border is to be displayed, the value
is to be set to '0'.

Border color:
Defines the color of an object's border. The Select color... function can be used to
08 2012
define an appropriate value. This can be specified using the RGB or HSV color space
or as a hexadecimal value.

Border style:
Determines the style of the border that you can select from the drop-down list.
Editing the simulation macros
The upper portion of the macro editor provides additional commands you can use to edit the
screenshot or topic content.
New Page Macro

Manual Crop (Documentation):
This command makes it possible to define a section of the screenshot for use in the
documentation instead of using the entire screenshot. This entails opening a dialog
window in which the section can be defined using a selection frame.

Auto Crop (Documentation):
This command can be used to crop a screenshot automatically for the documentation.
This entails setting up the range of the selected control as a crop with a defined
distance separating it from the associated highlight.
This distance can be set up in the central configuration dialog under Standard ->
Settings -> Documentation -> Auto Crop.
You have the option to retain this crop when ReRecording an application. Please be
mindful of the setting Keep Crop in the Parameter dialog for ReRecording.
Note:
While ReRecording a lesson, you can retain the crop you have applied. To do so, activate
the Keep Crop option when starting the ReRecording. Please pay attention in this regard to
the section Project-specific settings for ReRecording.

Remove crop (Documentation):
If a section of the screenshot was manually or automatically cropped, this function
allows the crop to be removed again.
Tip:
If you would like to automatically crop all of the screenshots in a lesson or remove the crops
that have been applied, then please note the Auto crop all pages and Remove crop on all
pages functions in the Tools -> Automation menu.
Macros for actions

Update Field Icon:
If changes have been made to the highlights on a screenshot, it may be necessary to
modify its field icon as well. You can do so by clicking on the option Update Field Icon
in the Macro Editor. An editing window will then appear in which you can make the
necessary changes to the icon. Drag the highlight to the desired position and confirm
by clicking on OK.
08 2012
51
Contents
Editing highlights and bubbles
You can enhance recorded macros with highlights and bubbles. The highlights outline the
recording control element and the bubbles display text with instructions, tips, etc.
The highlights and bubbles can be edited from the Topic view. For example, you can choose
a macro from the thumbnail view, such as Click Link. Then in the topic view, the highlights
and bubbles for the recorded control element will be displayed on the screenshot for the
macro New Page.
There are options on the toolbar that allow you to switch between demo and concurrent
modes to display the bubbles. This allows the bubbles to be viewed and edited for the
respective mode.
Positioning the highlights and bubbles
From the Topic view, you can change the size and positioning of the bubbles and highlights
for the respective mode as follows:
Positioning the highlights and bubbles
1. Click on the object you would like to edit.
2. A red line will appear around the object. Click on the object again, this time holding
the mouse button down.
3. With the mouse button still pressed, drag the object to the desired position.
4. Release the mouse button and the object is now positioned.
Changing the size of the highlights and bubbles
1. Click on the object you would like to edit.
2. Dots appear around the object so that you can change its size. Click on one of the
dots and hold the mouse button down.
3. With the mouse button still pressed, drag the dot inwards or outwards to the desired
size.
4. Release the mouse button to set the new size.
Changing text bubble alignments
1. Click on the object you would like to edit.
2. A square will appear at the tip of the bubble, which you can use to turn the object.
With bubbles that do not have a tip, the square will appear in the middle of the bubble.
Click on the dot and hold the mouse button down.
3. With the mouse button still pressed, pull the dot away from the bubble and until you
have reached the desired position. Pull the dot towards the middle of the bubble if you
wish to hide the tip.
4. Release the mouse button to set the new position.
Editing bubble text
Bubble text for the recorded macros for each mode can be directly edited in the bubble or in
the macro editor.

52
Editing in the topic view
Double-click on a bubble and an HTML editor will appear with various options for
editing the content. For more information on the HTML editor, please refer to the
08 2012
HTML Editor section of the document. Edit your text as desired and click on OK to
confirm your changes.

Editing in the macro editor
Changes can be made in the macro editor using the two options Explanations Demo
Mode and Explanations Practice Mode. Click on the respective text field and the
HTML editor will appear. You can now edit the text.
Note:
Please note that when changes are made to the text, this text can no longer be automatically
translated into another language (Automated Translation and ReRecording). All customized
text must be manually translated or exported into a translation template to be translated
externally.
How to insert book page objects
Book page objects can be inserted into simulations as macros, which will allow you to create
simulations with greater flexibility. These can be positioned directly on screenshots, images,
PowerPoint slides and book pages and can be activated for being displayed in a specific
mode. In this way, simulations can be easily enriched with additional information, reference
material and visual aids.
How to insert book page objects
Book page objects can be inserted from the toolbar or from the menu: Edit -> Insert a Book
Page Object.
The following objects are available:

Arrow

Block Arrow

Text Pop Up

Image

Icon Link

Text Link

New Book Page
For a detailed description of each of the objects, please refer to the sections linked in this
document.
Note:
Note that book page objects cannot be used for documentation and can only be used for
playing simulations. The only object that can be used in combination with documentation is
New Book Page, which appears as a graphic image.
08 2012
53
Contents
Form Structure
The Producer provides you with the Form Structure function for displaying forms realistically
in Practice mode or Test mode. While a lesson is in progress, the user can fill in the recording
macros contained within the form structure in an individually chosen sequence and then
confirm the inputs as a whole. This does not display a confirmation immediately after an
action has been inputted but only once all actions have been performed.
A Form Structure is made up as follows:

it is positioned under a New page macro

it has a start and end macro

the associated recording macros are to be found between the two Form Structure
macros.
At least two recording macros should generally be available for a Form Structure.
Create Form Structure
After recording a lesson, you can create a Form Structure in it:
1. For the Form Structure the New Page macros are to be combined in a topic with the
associated actions contained in the form. This is required as the Form Structure
cannot be created in a way that spans topics.
Note:
Make sure that the same form from the application is available in the topics, meaning that
identical screenshots are also available.
If a form is used across different pages in an application, then a new Form Structure is to be
created for each application page.
54
08 2012
2. Select the New Page macros belonging to the topics whose recording macros are to
be used for the Form Structure.
3. Now click on the function Merge selected New Page Macros
in the menu Tools->
Automation.
The first macro New Page is retained and the others that are highlighted are deleted.
The previous topics' recording macros are arranged in the merged topic.
Note:
A Click Link macro is required as the last macro of a form structure in order to be able to
complete the form correctly. For example, this can be an OK or dialog box Save button
enabling the form inputs to be confirmed.
Now create the Form Structure.
4. Select the New Page macro of the merged topic.
5. In the toolbar, click on the Create Form Structure button
.
Note:
Documentation macros contained within a topic are also integrated into the form structure.
But these do not affect the sequence of the lesson and the function of the form structure as
they are only used for creating documentation.
In the Producer thumbnail view, you will now see that all of the topic macros are
incorporated within the Form Structure macros.
Bubbles in the Form Structure
The bubble texts are presented in summary form in the Form Structure for the Practice mode.
This provides you with an overview that illustrates how to fill out a form and the linkages
between the inputs.
In Demo mode and Concurrent mode, the bubbles are displayed side by side as the
processes are played back as a simulation meaning that there are no inputs by the user.
The appearance of the bubbles can be edited in the Form End macro. The individual texts
accompanying the actions can be changed within the respective macros, as before.
Remove Form Structure
If a Form Structure is no longer required in a lesson, it can be removed. Only the start and
end macros of the Form Structure are deleted in the process; the remaining macros in the
topic are retained.
Note:
Do not remove the macros for the Form Structure using the Delete command so as to avoid
errors in the lesson. Always remove the Form Structure using the corresponding
functionality.
08 2012
55
Contents
This is how to remove the form structure:
1. Select the Form Begin or Form End macro.
2. Then click on the Remove Form Structure button.
Branches within a lesson
Using branches will allow the user to digress from the sequential path within a simulation.
This gives the user much more flexibility and portrays a more realistic process workflow. Two
or more branches can be added to a lesson so that the user has a choice of where to go to
next.
A branch consists of several macros:

A branch is positioned under the macro New Page.

It needs a start and an end macro.

Between the start and end macro, there are two recording macros that contain actions
leading to different workflows.
Note:
If you would like to create branches in a project then make sure that projects containing
branches cannot be rerecorded. The reason for this is that with ReRecording a lesson will
run through in a linear manner. But branches can operate in a number of different ways that
the Producer cannot automatically follow.
Should you be contemplating ReRecording a project we recommend that it be cloned, thus
backing it up for ReRecording. The branch can then be created in the original project.
56
08 2012
How to create a branch
Once a lesson has been recorded, you can create a branch for it. To do so, proceed as
follows:
1. New Page macros are combined into one topic in which their corresponding actions
should serve as buttons for the branches. This is important so that the buttons can be
displayed properly on the page.
1.
Select the New Page macros for the topic for which the recording macros
should be used for the branch. When doing so, make sure that these actions
are located on the same application page.
2. Then select Tools -> Automation -> Merge selected New Page macros.
The first macro New Page will remain and all the other highlighted macros will
be deleted. The recording macros for the existing topic will then be merged into
the topic accordingly.
2. Select the macro New Page for the merged topic.
3. From the Macro Editor, click on the button Create branch
.
4. A dialog box will appear in which you can defined specific topics for individual macros.
The order of the selection list corresponds with the order of the macros in the lesson.
Confirm by clicking on Ok.
From the Thumbnail view in the Producer, you can see that all the macros for the topic are
integrated into the macros for the branch.
All macros that have been assigned a branch target will have an arrow. When the mouse
moves over the arrow, the corresponding topic will be highlighted in orange in the Thumbnail
view and the name of the topic will be displayed in a tool tip.
How to edit a branch
Editing a branch target
If you would like to change the target of your branch at a later time, you can open the editing
dialog box by clicking on the button Edit branch in the Macro Editor. Change the target for the
respective actions and confirm the changes by clicking on OK.
Bubbles in a branch
At the end of a mode, a summary of all the bubble text is displayed in one bubble within a
branch. This serves as an overview of all the possible target topics. The individual text blocks
are separated with an `or` to make it easier to differentiate between the different targets.
The bubble's appearance can be edited in the macro Branch End. To do so, from the Macro
Editor, set the Layout selection to Advanced layout. The individual text blocks for the actions
can be changed in the respective macro.
How to remove a branch
If a branch is no longer needed in a lesson, it can be removed. Only the starting and ending
macros of the branch are deleted; the other macros will remain in the topic.
Note:
Do not remove the macros for the branch by using the Delete command - this could cause
errors in the lesson itself. Always remove a branch in accordance with its functionality.
08 2012
57
Contents
To remove a branch, proceed as follows:
1. Select either the macro Branch Begin or Branch End.
2. Then click on the button Remove Branch.
Branches in documentation
Branches found in a lesson will also be displayed as such in the documentation. A
subheading will be inserted to indicate that there is a branch. Underneath the subheadings,
there are additional actions which have been allocated links for the respective topics.
Branches appear in Word, PDF and HTML generated formats. Branches are displayed in the
following types of documentation: standard documentation and work documents.
Inserting a placeholder
The placeholder inserts a variable that is dynamically assigned to specific content. This
content can include: Project title, group descriptions, etc. The object thus makes it easier to
consistently use information and to change information in a central location. Complex content
can also be combined. The inserted texts can then be individually formatted.
If no content can be assigned to a placeholder, it is displayed as a variable. In this case, you
should check the selected placeholder and the desired content.
Note:
You can only insert content from the objects themselves or the objects at the next higher
level as placeholders in this case.
To insert a placeholder, proceed as follows:
1. Click Insert placeholder... in the HTML Editor about the Insert object function. A dialog
now opens where you can define the placeholder.
2. Select the placeholder type and confirm the dialog by clicking Insert.
The following placeholders can be defined:

Macro: Field icon (inside of project)

Macro: Field name (inside of project)

Project: Name

Project: Description

Book page: Name

Book page: Description

Book: Name

Book: Description

Text unit: Name

Text unit: Description
Inserting glossary texts
Glossary texts can be inserted from the content glossary as placeholders using the
Placeholder dialog. These adjust automatically to the activated object language and are thus
versatile in how they are used. The placeholders are to be entered manually in the text box
below the drop-down list and should be written as follows:
58
08 2012

– for pure text

– for HTML text
You can find the respective glossary ID in the dialog for editing glossary texts.
Inserting individual content
In addition to the standard placeholders, you can also specify placeholders for specific
objects. The respective UID of the object and an exclamation mark are to be added to the
displayed placeholder variables in the text box. This should have, for example, the following
form:

Standard:

Extended:
Note:
Keep in mind when using placeholders that they cannot currently be displayed in the
Manager.
Mode Change while a mode is being played
back
The change of mode makes it possible, at a specific topic, to switch to another mode while a
mode is being played back. If the topic in question was completed it switches back to the
original mode. For example, while a Demo mode is in progress, a topic can be displayed as a
Test mode, allowing users as well to take an active part while viewing the lesson.
Creating a change of mode

The Mode Change Start and

Mode Change End
macros are available for the change of mode. These are incorporated into the lesson using
the Edit -> Insert Special Macro menu. The Mode Change Start macro is located in front of
the New page macro and the Mode Change End macro is situated below the final macro of
the topic.
It can then be specified in the Mode Change Start macro from which mode and into which
mode the switch is to take place when playing back the lesson.
Translation of a Lesson using Translation
Templates
A created lesson can be used for a number of languages. To do so, it is necessary that the
texts be translated into one of the languages provided in the Producer.
Automatically generated lesson texts are preset as text blocks in different languages in the
Producer. Translating these text blocks can be done using the Automated Translation
function or when ReRecording a lesson. Here, the texts of a project language are replaced by
those of the new language.
Alongside automatically generated texts, lessons can also contain individually inserted texts.
These cannot be translated by the Producer and must therefore be edited by the author.
08 2012
59
Contents
Individual lesson texts are:

The title and description of a project in the Object Editor

The names of the topics from the New Page macros.

Changed bubble texts in the Explanation (Demo mode)and the Explanation (Practice
mode)

Texts in inserted Explanation macros

Texts in inserted documentation macros
Note:
If the text blocks of a Demo or Practice bubble are changed, then the Manual setting is
automatically set for them in the subcategory Bubble. The Producer does not translate
these texts when ReRecording or during automatic translation.
When exporting a translation template, the texts will also be exported.
To translate individual texts of a lesson, the Producer provides the option of producing
translation templates.
With this function all texts not preset in the Producer are exported in a format suited to
translation.
There are two translation templates that can be used for output:

Microsoft Word
The texts can be produced in a Word file. Here, a structure is generated from a
number of identifying descriptions for the allocation of texts to various macros or texts.
Thanks to this setup, the translation can take place in the Word documents without
any problems since the texts can be edited directly in HTML or a similar format
without the need for any prior experience with HTML.

XLIFF (XML Localization Interchange File Format)
XLIFF is an XML-based format developed for the output of texts for translation from
an application. This format is used especially for translation with the help of translation
programs.
An XLIFF file is set up as an XML script which contains the texts as well as the
identifying descriptions for the macros.
Translation templates simplify the translation process as all texts are available directly and
can be edited. The translated texts can be imported into the lesson after translation.
Note:
When translating texts, the order of the topics and macros cannot be changed and macros
must be neither added nor removed. Changes to macros result in erroneous importing of
texts as they can no longer be inserted into the matching bubbles.
The macros of a lesson are numbered in the Producer. This numbering is stated in the
identifying descriptions of the translation templates. When importing a translation template, it
is thus possible to insert a text into the corresponding macro.
60
08 2012
Translating the Individual Texts of a Lesson
To translate the individual texts of a lesson, please proceed as follows:
Note:
When importing the translation template, the previous lesson texts are replaced with the
translated texts. For this reason the original lesson should be duplicated before producing
translation templates so that its text is not overwritten.
1. Export the translation template. To do so, select Export Translatable in the menu
Tools -> Language/Version Change with the relevant file format.
1. Enter a file name for the translation template as well as a target folder.
2. The default output format for the translation template is Word. If you would like
to create a translation template in XLIFF then activate the setting Use XLIFF.
3. Then click on Save to export the translation template.
2. The texts in the translation templates can now be translated by the translator into the
required language.
Note:
Only the lesson texts may be edited in the translation templates. Changes made in the
identifying descriptions to the allocation of topics or in the source text of the XLIFF file result
in erroneous importing of the translated texts.
Note:
Pictures within bubbles are shown as HTML script when exporting a translation template.
This script inserts the corresponding picture into the bubble.
Do not make any changes to the scripts and do not delete them, otherwise the pictures will
not be reattached to the bubbles when importing the translation templates.
3. You can now import the translated texts into the designated lesson.
1. To do so, open the lesson in the Project Editor.
2. Click on Import Translation… in the Menu Tools -> Language/Version Change
with the relevant format.
3. A dialog box will open. Choose your document and confirm it with Open.
The texts will be imported into the lesson, replacing the original content.
08 2012
61
Contents
Translation Templates in Word
The Word translation templates contain both the identifying descriptions and the matching
texts. The identifying descriptions are formatted in red and serve to allocate a text to the
corresponding macro. This should not be changed.
The available texts can be replaced using the translated texts. The texts for translation are
black.
Delete the original text and replace it with the desired translation.
You can adjust the text formatting in order to design the texts according to your needs: set
paragraphs in bold or italics, insert lists and more. These features are included when
importing the translation templates.
Save the file once all changes have been made as a Word file (.doc).
Note:
The font colors assigned in bubbles are overwritten in Word when importing a translation
template. For this reason, font colors should be reformatted after importing a translation
template.
Translation Templates in XLIFF
To translate texts in an XLIFF file, import them into a corresponding translation program.
Alternatively, it is possible to translate directly within the source code:
The source text lines &lt;source>...&lt;/source> show the original text of the topics. The
translated text is entered into the source text lines &lt;target>...&lt;/target>. These are
assigned to the corresponding macros on import.
In the target line the corresponding text from the source line can be found as a placeholder. If
a text was not changed, then the original text is inserted on import. If a target line has not
been filled in, the corresponding macro will not be assigned any content.
Save the file once all changes have been made as an XLIFF file (.xlf).
62
08 2012
Note:
If you do not have a translation program for XLIFF files, it is recommended that the
translation template be produced in Word.
Editing the texts in the source text of the XLIFF file requires basic knowledge of XML. Errors
in the source text result in the erroneous import of translation templates.
Text-to-Speech
Text-to-Speech functionality exists to convert written text into the spoken word. This makes it
possible to play back a lesson's bubble texts in spoken form. This allows information to be
presented not just visually but acoustically as well, thus involving more of the student's
senses, thereby facilitating a heightened awareness and superior assimilation of the content.
When converting text to speech, the recording macros' bubble text is converted into an audio
file. The actual bubble continues to be displayed when playing the lesson back in the trainer
so that the two formats provide mutual support.
Prerequisite
An audio project is required to use Text-to-Speech. You can define this straight away when
setting up the project by selecting the parameter Use audio or else convert it afterwards from
the menu Edit -> Convert to audio project. The recommended quality for an audio project with
spoken text is: 22kHz Mono MP3.
Changing the voice
The Producer uses the Text-To-Speech voice available on your operating system. If you want
to use a different voice, this must be changed in the Text-To-Speech settings in your
operating system.
Use of external tools
Converting from text to speech in the Producer offers you a rudimentary version of this
functionality. To improve the quality of the spoken text, you can use professional tools (Textto-Speech Engines) that can be linked to the Producer's Text-to-Speech interface. The
corresponding voices are available to you in the Producer once you have installed an
appropriate tool.
You can obtain voices free of charge, for example, by installing Microsoft Reader and the
Text-to-Speech package that comes with it.
A project with text-to-speech
It is advisable converting text to speech after a project has been edited. Conversion is to be
conducted for each individual topic. Proceed as follows:
1.
First insert the Text-to-Speech options macro in your project's initial topic. You will
find this in the menu Tools -> Insert Special Macro. You can define various settings for
the spoken text in the macro.
2. Now select the desired topic for the spoken text.
3.
Then in the Audio menu, go to the Convert Text To Speech function. This function
can be also called via a topic's context menu.
You will now see an audio icon in the topic's thumbnail view indicating the presence of an
audio file. The default spoken text uses the Demo bubble text.
If a topic contains a number of recording macros, for example by connecting a number of
08 2012
63
Contents
topics, then the texts will be read out one after the other in the order in which the macros are
arranged.
Note:
If a topic contains a number of recording macros, the individual actions and associated
spoken texts will proceed asynchronously one in relation with the other. This is so because
the texts are converted into an audio file and are not linked with the actions. It is therefore
advisable to use only one recording macro per topic.
Troubleshooting in a Project
If you start the playback of a lesson in the Producer to check it, you can follow the progress
of the playback of the lesson within trainer by looking at Producer thumbnail view.
This shows the progress of playback at any one time by highlighting the symbol of the macro
currently being played. The progress of the gray marking from macro to macro matches that
of the lesson being played; if the playback of a lesson is interrupted or ended, the selection
pauses at the corresponding position. This simplifies the task of localizing errors in the lesson
since it provides direct, visual identification of the corresponding macro and thus facilitates
the user's orientation within the project.
64
08 2012
Simulation Modes
The standard macro set supports the following modes:
Demo mode
Demo mode generates a lesson that plays the recorded process like a simulation and does
not expect any interaction by the user. Explanations are given as examples using the actions
and data generated during the recording process.
Practice mode
In Practice mode, trainer expects the user to act within the simulated environment in the
same way as with the live application. The lesson will only be continued after the user has
obeyed the instructions in the proper order as presented by the bubbles
Test mode
Test mode is based on Practice mode. The instructions in the bubbles are not displayed and
the user has to find the right way through the application alone. This mode is especially
useful for test scenarios following training.
Concurrent mode
In turn, Concurrent mode is based on Demo mode, but works with an additional smaller
browser window parallel to the live application. This supports the user by offering help during
the live process. The user can copy the actions step by step as indicated in the help window.
The same text is displayed in the bubbles as in the Demo mode. In this mode, the trainer
window is always in the foreground. The next topic is displayed only after the user has
confirmed this change by clicking on the Continue link.
Start and stop pages
When playing back a lesson with trainer, for each mode a start page is displayed which
explains the mode the lesson will be played back in and what the user has to expect. When
the lesson is over or was closed prior to completion, a stop page is displayed in order to
indicate that the mode has been terminated. In Test mode the stop page also informs the
user if he passed the test or not.
Generating a Lesson
Lessons can be generated in various modes using the Save button in the toolbar of
Producer.
In addition to generating the files for the various modes as necessary to play lessons back
subsequently in trainer, the current status of the project is saved in the project file at the
same time.
Generating a lesson is an essential step, and it should be done before calling up a lesson in
trainer.
Playing back a Lesson
To call up a recorded lesson directly from Producer, click on the Playback button in the
toolbar of the Producer.

Demo mode

Practice mode
08 2012
65
Contents

Test mode

Concurrent mode
The lesson is then opened in trainer and played back. To do this, the mode selected in the
toolbar of the Producer is used. Make sure that the selected mode is the one that you want.
You can change the mode there at any time and view the lesson in a new browser window by
clicking again on Playback button.
Link actions for trainer and book reader
To control the trainer or book reader instead of the control bar via objects or bubbles,
actions can be defined as link targets. These are universally valid and make it possible, for
example, to jump between book pages and chapters independently of their name. They are
selected in the link dialog.
If you want to use these types of navigations for book pages, we recommend inserting the
objects in a template for book pages. These are available by default for an entire book.
Defining a link action
1. You can define the link target in accordance with your objects as follows:

Via the HTML Editor
Mark the text to be linked and open the Link dialog by clicking Insert object ->
Insert link...

For book page objects
Select Edit link... in the Link to setting to open the Link dialog.
For some objects, this setting is found in the Link area.
2. Click the Actions button in the Link dialog.
3. You can then define the link action using the drop-down list.
4. Click Ok to confirm the dialog.
Overview of actions
66

Exit

Show help

Play lesson

Pause lesson

Next topic

Previous topic

Next book page

Previous book page

Next chapter

Previous chapter

First book page

Last book page

Show index

Show search
08 2012

Activate audio

Deactivate audio

Play/stop audio

Stop complete audio – (if several audio objects are contained)

Mute complete audio – (if several audio objects are contained)

Unmute complete audio – (if several audio objects are contained)

Mute

Unmute
The other actions offered correspond to those mentioned but have an outdated form and are
thus offered to be downward compatible.
Mouse simulation
You have the facility available in the Producer to simulate mouse movements and actions
while playing back lessons in the trainer. This enables a greater emphasis to be given to
actions, for displaying single and double clicks visually, for example. You will see the mouse
simulation displayed in Demo mode and Concurrent mode.
Activating mouse simulation
The mouse simulation is activated in the central configuration dialog from the Show Mouse
option. You will find this in the Standard -> Global Macro Parameters area.
Changing the mouse pointer
In the visual area of the trainer configuration you can apply the following settings for defining
the mouse pointer:

mouse_style:
The option menu allows you to define a style for the mouse pointer. The styles
available in the resources are displayed.
You will receive a mouse pointer preview in the Project Explorer when you select the
resource in question.

mouse_orientation:
This parameter defines the orientation of the mouse pointer. You can change this
using the option menu. Depending on the setting, the mouse icon is displayed to the
right or left of the mouse pointer.

mouse_color:
Use this parameter to define a color for the mouse pointer and mouse icon. Enter a
hexadecimal value or click on Select color
value.
to open the dialog for defining the color
Concurrent mode viewing window
Concurrent mode can be represented in two ways:

as the top-most window with control functions and text box for the bubble texts

as a simple window, controlled by means of the bubbles
The default setting for Internet Explorer is that the top-most window is activated. You can set
the relevant Concurrent mode display in the central configuration dialog.
08 2012
67
Contents
Note:
Firefox does not support top-most window implementation. That is why opening Concurrent
mode in Firefox automatically uses the simple window view.
The top-most window
The top-most window contains advanced functions for controlling the lesson, comparable with
the trainer bar. The bubble texts are displayed in a text box and are not situated on the
screenshot, as a result of which the screenshot is readily visible.
You can minimise the top-most window while the lesson is being played back and move the
window around on the screen area. This permits an unobstructed view of the application, thus
allowing the application to be worked on unhindered.
The screenshot is displayed in a window below the control. You can move the screenshot
within the window using drag and drop. The central bar between the screenshot and the
control functions can be used to alter the relative size of the screen areas or else hide the
screenshot area.
Concurrent mode settings
Various settings are available in the central configuration dialog for influencing the window
properties and way it appears in Concurrent mode. Select the central configuration dialog
from Settings -> trainer Configuration -> Global/Lesson (Concurrent).
You can apply the following settings:
Deactivate the top-most window
To display the simplified window in Internet Explorer instead of the top-most window, apply
the setting '-1' for the topmost window option in ontop window in the drop-down list.
If you would like to activate the top-most window, select the entry ‟0‟ in the drop-down list.
Hide bubble buttons
In the simple version of Concurrent mode, the topics are controlled by buttons in the bubbles.
These buttons are to be deactivated for the top-most window.
To hide the buttons in the bubbles, activate the setting Concurrent mode without arrows. This
can be found under Standard -> Global macro parameters.
You should only use this setting if the students are starting the lessons in Internet Explorer.
Additional settings
Additional settings can be applied in the ontop window area:
68

topmost_skin:
This parameter specifies the window style. The value Default is selected for the
preinstalled style.
You will find the resource for the top-most window style under Popup style in the
Project Explorer resource tree.

Scrollable:
Activating this setting unhides scrollbars in the screenshot area which allow the view
to be scrolled.
If the parameter is deactivated, the only way the screenshot can be moved within the
view is by drag and drop.

closeOnIdle:
This parameter defines after what period of time the top-most window closes if it is
inactive or not used. The value is defined in seconds.
08 2012
Further settings are available to you in window properties that you can use to customize the
window's properties. These influence the window's size and orientation and it is also possible
to activate characteristic elements of the browser window.
Note:
The settings for displaying Concurrent mode can be blocked in Internet Explorer by cookies.
If this is the case, you should deactivate the cookies to enable the correct display.
Printing the task window
If the text in the task window contains various information that is required to carry out and
enter processes, it may be necessary to print out this information in some cases. To make
this possible, you can individually provide users with a print function. The following code is to
be entered in the HTML editor for this purpose:
1. Mark the text or the image to be linked.
2. Select the Insert link... option under Insert Object and go to the Free area in the dialog
that opens.
3. Enter the following line under Link:
javascript:ctx.cfg_show('javascript:void();',null,null)
4. Confirm the dialog and the HTML editor by clicking Ok to save the entry.
08 2012
69
Contents
Navigations - recording and editing
SAP AG uses the navigations to offer you an EPSS solution which is available at the end of
the learning process to provide your users direct support in your enterprise application. If
previously learned processes or process steps are no longer sufficiently front of mind, the
user can request support as and when required and have himself prompted within the live
application or obtain explanations on areas of the application user interface that are relevant
to the process or especially prone to error. This optional assistance boosts your users
confidence in using the application and gradually ensures optimal performance in handling
the process. It also enables your users to execute seldom used processes with the greatest
possible accuracy, for example when having to stand in for someone without notice.
The navigation runs discreetly in the background in your application and indicates by means
of an icon in the information area whether there is information available on the application
page in question. Should he need to, the user can use this icon to launch the support and
return it to the standby state when the need no longer exists.
The degree of support available here is very variable. Navigations can accompany the user in
detail through established processes, explain entire application interfaces specific to a
particular process and object and prevent departures from predefined processes. If there are
process-related simulations available, these too are offered to the user to give him the
opportunity to have knowledge of process routines or steps demonstrated to him in the
simulation environment or to work through them without affecting the live application.
Prerequisites
What one needs to bear in mind when dealing with navigations is that both the Producer and
Navigator are involved in creating and using navigations. The Navigator is to be construed
as the playback application whereas the navigations are created and edited using the
Producer functionality. As creating navigations is generally speaking extremely complex, you
should possess appropriate prior knowledge of how to operate the Producer.
Creating navigations
The Producer, ensures the conversion of simulations in navigations as well as the manual
creation of navigations for SAP ECC (for all designs on the SAP GUI) and Outlook 2007.
The support of additional applications for navigations has to be verified previous according to
the technical feasibility. Support for additional applications for navigations should be checked
in advance for technical feasibility. Contact your SAP account manager for the necessary
support.
Attention:
Navigations do not support multi monitor environments. Please therefore ensure when
creating the navigations that the Producer and your target application are situated on the
screen registered on the system as the main monitor.
Playing back navigations (Navigator)
The Navigator is mandatory for playing back navigations. You install using the installation file
you have been provided with Navigator.msi. Please note the following minimum system
requirements for installation:
70
08 2012
Type
Specifications
Operating system
Windows XP (at least Service Pack 3), Vista
or Windows 7
64 & 32 bit version
Memory
A minimum of 1 GB
Hard drive
10 MB of free space
Browser
Internet Explorer 7.0 – 9.0
Scenario
Requirement
SAP GUI
Version 7.1 or higher
SAP Business Suite
SAP GUI Scripting activated
Windows XP and Vista
Windows Automation API
Using the Navigator without installation
For rapid and simple distribution of the Navigator within a network it is possible, after the
initial installation, to copy the application folder to the respective users‟ workstations without
needing to reinstall. The program remains capable of being run and can now be used for
playing back navigations.
The operating system may be unable to assign the file format of the navigation (*.dnt) when
the navigation is first launched. In this case, the dialog Open with… will be displayed. Use
this to select the Navigator.exe in the duplicate folder of the Navigator. Activate the
checkbox for the option Always open with this program to avoid having to repeat this action.
The coping of the folder should be executed by an administrator who has the appropriate
access rights to the workstations.
Requirements for navigations with SAP
The optimal playback of navigations in SAP and optimal object recognition requires the SAP
system to have a version 7.1 SAP GUI or later.
The appropriate application profiles (for example, SAP Tradeshow) must be installed.
Consider for the recording and the playback of navigations under SAP the settings for the
SAP Client.
Note:
The playback of the navigation requires the corresponding GUI (e.g. SAP Tradeshow) used
for the recording.
Requirements for navigations with Outlook 2007
For Outlook 2007 the profiles Outlook 2007, MSAA default and MS Office Basic have to be
installed in the Producer.
08 2012
71
Contents
Variants of creating navigations
Navigations can be created in two ways:

Creation using existing simulations
The Producer enables you to create navigations from prerecorded simulations.
Using this method can reduce the effort of creating a navigation by about 80%,
because application pages and their corresponding objects do not have to be
manually rerecorded.
During a conversion, only New Page macros and associated action macros will be
converted. Manually inserted PowerPoint slides, quiz and explanation macros etc. will
be disregarded during the conversion process as well as branches integrated into
lessons.

Manual creation
Creating navigations manually offers you the opportunity of providing an application
with EPSS support individually and independently of pre-existing simulations. You can
identify the elements required for your processes on each application page and assign
them help texts. To simplify the creation of the required macros, the Producer will use
wizards to guide you through the necessary steps.
Creation using existing simulations
When simulations are converted to navigations, they are converted to a selected navigation
type and the projects adjusted to correspond to the necessary properties:
Conversion in the context assistant
When converting a simulation into a context assistant, the application, page and object
contexts are automatically created as a function of the information saved during the
recording. In the process, the objects are arranged based on their page affiliation. The
objects are merged and arranged based on their page affiliation here.
The advantage of converting simulations into a context assistant is that it is possible to use
controls that have already been recorded and which are familiar to the user from the lessons
as object contexts. An additional benefit is that no objects that are required for a process are
lost in a manual recording as they already exist in a simulation.
Conversion in the process assistant
The process assistant is created on the basis of existing process simulations. The
simulations are converted to a navigation project for this purpose.
The object bubbles are always displayed for a topic when the process assistant is running. To
convert a simulation, it is therefore recommended using projects where the New page macros
were not merged, i.e. for every action there is a separate topic. The bubbles are thus
displayed one after another for every action in the process sequence.
Converting the simulation
This is how you convert a simulation into a navigation - by default into a context assistant:
1. Open a project recording in the Project Editor view.
2. Click the Generate Navigation button.
3. After a selection is made, a dialog opens where you can make the following settings:
1. You can enter a name in the Project title field.
72
08 2012
2. You can also use the checkbox to define whether recorded hotspots are to be
converted to active areas. If the option is deactivated, the objects recorded as
hotspots are rendered redundant.
Note:
Active Areas depend purely on position and do not use any object information to recognize a
control within the application. That is why it is advisable only to use Active Areas for static
objects in an application. With dynamic objects, the Active Area does not change
dynamically either.
3. The Process oriented option defines that a process assistant is to be
generated. This option should thus be activated.
4. Click on Ok to confirm the dialog. The simulation is then converted into the selected
navigation.
After the navigation has been created, you can edit it further.
Context Assistant
The context assistant helps users to work with an application by offering help descriptions of
issues and functionality independently of process. The information can be presented in
relation to different contexts, thus providing specific information the user can access
individually.
The context assistant thereby enables the user to orientate himself quickly in complex
application interfaces and use the explanations to refresh and apply what he has learnt.
Furthermore, presenting context-related information makes it possible to highlight frequently
occurring problems, explain changes in the application or emphasize information that is
important for the process.
Use cases
A context assistant lends itself for example to the following use cases:

For information about system changes on an object or an application page, for
example during maintenance work.

For fading in additional problem-related explanations for individual objects, for
example in order to prevent incorrect inputs by providing notes and explanations for
the objects in question.
Context Types
The context assistant recognizes three context types. These can be used in combination but
can also be used individually in a navigation. This allows all sorts of information to be
presented in different circumstances, thus providing users with the necessary specific
information.
A context refers to a specific issue in an application so as to describe it and support the user
with the appropriate context-related information.

Application Context
This context offers general information about the application as well as more in-depth
information or links.
The application context underpins the navigation and serves to recognize the
displayed application and call corresponding learning content.
This context can also be used on its own.
The macros for the application context are held in the second topic of a lesson.
08 2012
73
Contents

Screen Context
Describes an application page in greater detail. This can be for example: describe its
use in general terms, draw attention to problem areas or else highlight changes in the
event of a new version.

Object Context
Defines a specific object. This can be a Click Link macro for example or a Input Text
macro. This enables the function of the object to be described, points out things
worthy of note or else elucidate relationships with other objects.
Object context display variants
Two different display variants can be distinguished for the object context. These can be
defined in the Display macro that is set up when creating a context assistant in the first topic
of the lesson.
Help next to the Object
A small note is assigned on the application page to all objects provided with an explanation.
This will open when clicking with the mouse on a bubble containing the object specific
explanation. Only information about the application and page context is displayed in the main
bubble.
Help as Tooltip
This option displays the object bubble when the mouse cursor rolls over an object and hides
the bubble when the user rolls the cursor away from the object. In this way, the information is
only visible to the users when they actually need it.
With this display variant, no highlights will be displayed for the object.
Manual creation
Creating a context assistant manually enables you to assign context information to an
application individually and independently of pre-existing simulations. You can record the
elements required for your processes on each application page and create the help texts.
In a project the different context types build on one another, i.e. the application is defined
first, then the page and finally the object, thus proceeding from the general to the specific.
The recording of the respective contexts behaves accordingly. An object requires all three
elements of context information whereas an application context can also stand in its own
right. The contexts that are to be displayed thereafter can be defined in the Display variant
macro.
Creating a navigation project
First create a navigation project so that you can then record your context information in it.
Proceed as follows:
1. In the Project Explorer view click on New Project
to create a new project. This will
open a dialog in which the following settings are to be applied:

Enter a Project title.

In the Project type drop-down list, select the type Navigation.

Select the project Language. The automatically created explanatory content is
generated in the language corresponding to your selection.
2. Click on OK to create the project.
74
08 2012
The navigation project you have created now opens in the Project Editor and is ready to
record context information. Read the following chapters on this subject.
Recording a application context
Recording the application context determines the application as well as the interface to be
used for reading out the object information. This is the basis of a navigation in order to assign
the help content that exists for an application. This also provides general information about
an application.
The application context for an application can only ever be set up once in a project as it must
only be defined once. But a number of corresponding application contexts can be created for
multiple applications that are recorded for a navigation.
Record an application context as follows:
1. Select the Record application context
function in the toolbar.
2. You will be requested to Choose application. Click on the application window to be
recorded.
3. A dialog now appears that displays the EXE name for the program.
You can define a name for the display in the navigation in the Display Name
parameter.
4. Confirm the dialog by clicking OK if you want to finish the recording or click Next to
record another application context.
The application context recording is now available in the second topic in the Project Editor.
Tip:
If you want to create an explanation for a specific context, use the Insert Explanation
function. For more information, please see the section on inserting an explanation.
Recording a screen context
A screen context can be recorded several times in a navigation and spread over several
topics. This may be of assistance, for example, if numerous objects on a screen are to be
recorded and sorted as a result. If you record a screen context you will also automatically
record an associated application context, if one does not already exist.
Record a page context as follows:
1. Select the Record screen context
function in the toolbar.
2. You will be requested to Choose application. Click on the application window to be
recorded.
3. Now select the corresponding application profile for the application in the dialog box
that appears. Confirm this with OK.
08 2012
75
Contents
4. After you have selected the application, a dialog appears where you can change the
Screen title for the page context.
5. Confirm the dialog by clicking on OK to complete the recording.
The screen context recording is now available in a new topic in the Project Editor.
Recording an object context
If you record an object context you will also automatically record an associated application
and page context, if they do not already exist. Record an object context as follows:
1. Select the Record object context
function in the toolbar.
2. You will be requested to Choose application. Click on the application window to be
recorded.
3. Now select the corresponding application profile for the application in the dialog box
that appears. Confirm this with OK.
4. The next step is that a dialog will appear requesting you to select a page context. You
have the following option:

76
The New page context option creates a new page context in a new topic.
08 2012

You can select a prerecorded application page page context to which the object
context to be recorded is to be added.
Confirm your selection by clicking on OK.
5. Now click on the desired object. You will be prompted by a note on the cursor.
6. After you have selected the object a dialog will appear in which you can define the
Context info as well as other object context attributes.
You will find further explanations about the settings in the settings section in the
Record object context dialog.
Depending on the object selected the following specific settings will be displayed:

If you select a Text box then you must input the text content using the Input text
parameter.

If you click on Select Single you will then make the appropriate selection using
the Selected value parameter.
7. Confirm the dialog by clicking on OK if you would like to complete the recording or
click on Next to record another object.
The object context recording is now available from the associated page context in the Project
Editor.
Recording settings in the object context dialog
The following settings are available to you in the Record object context dialog that you can
use to define an object context during recording for displaying in the context assistant:
General options

Context Info
The information about the object context is entered in the text box. This can be texts,
links, images or similar content. You can design the text accordingly using the toolbar
in the HTML Editor.

Show Highlight directly
This option determines whether the object is to be highlighted the moment the
application page is called.

Leaves Screen
This option tells the Navigator that executing the object changes the application page
or calls a new application. This initiates a new page analysis as soon as the action
has been carried out on the object and the new page has finished loading so that the
associated page or application context can be displayed.
Note:
The object name cannot be amended using this dialog as the name is irrevocably associated
with the object and clearly defines it. If however, notwithstanding that, you would still like to
change the object name you can do so when selecting the object in the Macro Editor.
Object-specific options

If you select a Text box then you can input the text content using the Input text
parameter.

If you click on Single selection you can then select the corresponding option using the
Selected value parameter.
08 2012
77
Contents
Defining the display
After creating the context assistant, you can define how it is displayed. The Producer
automatically inserts the Display Context Assistant
following settings can be made.


macro in the first topic where the
Variant for Object Context:
The setting defines the variants for the object context. The following variants are
available in the drop-down list:

Help besides Object

Help as Tooltip
Show Highlights:
This option defines whether the highlights are automatically displayed during the
navigation process if the objects exist on the pages.
Editing the Context Assistant
Various functions for editing how your context assistant is displayed, its functionality and
design are available to you in the Project Editor. These can be called when selecting a macro
via the Macro Editor or the Context Menu.
Process-Assistant
The process assistant offers user support in carrying out predefined processes in an
application. Users are guided through the process step-by-step with instructions, making it
possible for them to carry out the displayed actions properly right in the live application. The
instructions are collocated with the objects to be used.
Sample applications
A process assistant is suited, for example, to be used as follows:

To train new employees (beginners) to learn the required processes on existing
systems.

To introduce a new system for users or to learn new business processes.

To learn about or reference business processes that have been in use for a long time
or are rarely used.

The changes in the process when the system is changed.
Structure of the process assistant
The structure of the process assistant is different from the structure of the context assistant in
just a few areas.
78

The macro Process End, which is found under the macro Display, will appear in the
first topic. This specifies the information that should be displayed at the end of the
process.

Every topic contains a macro Process Step that defines each individual step.

Every action macro contains a Next Process Step that specifies the course of the
process.
08 2012
Manual creation
You can record your process or expand or update an existing process independent of
existing simulations by manually creating a process assistant.
Recording is similar to the recording of simulations. You follow the process step-by-step and
thus record the entire sequence.
Recording a process step
To record a process step, proceed as follows:
1. Open the project you want to add additional steps to and select the desired position in
the project
or
create a new project.
2. Select the Record Process Step function on the toolbar.
3. You will be requested to Select application. Click on the application window to be
recorded.
4. From the following dialog box, select the corresponding application profile for the
application. Confirm by clicking on OK.
5. A dialog box will appear in which you can specify what you would like to record. From
the selection menu, choose:

Object Context

Explanation
Confirm by clicking on OK.

Recording explanations
Click on the area where you would like to position your explanation. The mouse
pointer will indicate the position.
Then enter the text for your explanation. Confirm by clicking on Ok.

Recording object context
Now click on the desired object. You will be prompted by a note on the cursor.
6. After an object is selected, a dialog appears where you can define the text for the
process step and the process sequence.
Here you can edit the context information for an object context.
For more information, see also the following section.
7. Confirm the dialog by clicking OK if you want to finish the recording or click Next to
record another object. The option Explanation allows you to record an additional
explanation.
The recorded process step is now available in a new topic in the Project Explorer.
Recording settings in the process step dialog
The following settings, which you can use to define a process step during recording, are
available in the Record Process Step dialog:

Context Info:
The information about the object context is entered in the text box. This can be texts,
links, images or similar content. You can design the text accordingly using the toolbar
in the HTML Editor.
08 2012
79
Contents

Previous Process Step:
The step found in the position in the project is automatically used as the previous
process step. You can define a different step using the drop-down list.

Next Process Step:
The next process step is the next step in recording or can be determined manually if
the process is to have an individual sequence.
Defining the display
After creating the process assistant, you can define how it is displayed. The Producer
automatically inserts the Display Process Assistant macro in the first topic where the
following settings can be made.
Style:
This setting defines the bubble type for displaying the object bubble. All of the bubbles
available in the workarea are displayed in the drop-down list.
Show Highlights:
This option defines whether the highlights are automatically displayed during the navigation
process if the objects exist on the pages.
Main bubble area
The style and positioning of the main bubble used for the process assistant can be
customized in this area. Alternatively, the bubble can also be modified using the Edit Main
Bubble function.
This area contains the following settings:

Position:
This value determines the position of the main bubble on the screen. The values are
specified in pixels and relate to the upper left-hand corner of the screen.

Style:
This setting defines the bubble type for displaying the main bubble. All of the bubbles
available in the workarea are displayed in the drop-down list.

Width and Height:
These settings define the width and height of the main bubble in pixels. If the amount
of text to be displayed exceeds the area available in the main bubble, a scrollbar
appears automatically.
Advanced area

Source:
If a navigation was converted from a simulation, the parameter indicates the UID of
the original lesson.
Displaying the process assistant
The process assistant is displayed as a list of steps with all process steps listed in the main
bubble. When the process is running, the process steps that have already been completed
are indicated by a check mark. This allows the user to keep an overview of the process at all
times and see all of the actions that have already been completed. If a process step could not
be found, this is indicated by a question mark. Here, we recommend selecting the application
page again so that page identification is reinitiated or switching to the correct application
page.
The object contexts are displayed as object bubbles next to the object to be carried out. The
objects are also emphasized with highlighting.
80
08 2012
The sequence of a process assistant is as follows:
1. First open the application with the application page where you want the process to
start. Make any necessary settings ahead of time.
2. Then start the process assistant to be carried out.
3. Click inside the application so that the process assistant can recognize it.
4. The main bubble containing the overview of the process steps appears. The object
context is displayed for the first action to be performed.

Carry out the process in the application as shown by the process assistant.
Completed actions are indicated by a check mark in the main bubble. If text is
entered, it must be confirmed via the object bubble by clicking OK to complete the
entry.
5. After the process is complete, you can end the process assistant by clicking Close in
the main bubble.
The process can be performed again by clicking the Restart button. The check marks
are reset and you can navigate to the beginning of your process in the application.
The object bubble is then displayed for the first action step.
Tip:
To make effective use of a process assistant, you should always play it back from the
beginning and not start in the middle of the process.
Dealing with non-standard behavior
When a navigation is played back, situations can sometimes occur which prevent a process
from being carried out. In this case, the Navigator provides information about the problem
and how it can be solved. These situations are:

The necessary application is not open

The application is on the wrong page

The necessary control element is not available
You can then switch to the necessary application page and continue with the process or skip
the step. The process assistant can also be terminated.
Bubble Types
The Navigator uses two bubble types to display information, each exhibiting different
attributes and functions:

the main bubble

the object bubble
In the following subchapters you will receive relevant information on how the bubble types
differ and when which type is used.
Central Settings
The Central Settings is where one can apply settings for the bubble types defining the
bubble's appearance and functionality. Depending on the selection these are either project
specific or generic.
08 2012
81
Contents
Object Bubble
The object bubble displays information about an object in a dedicated bubble. This bubble
type is used for both the context assistant and the process assistant.
Depending on the setting the bubbles are displayed in miniature with a question mark and
open as soon as they are clicked. In this way the bubbles do not obscure the application
interface. Furthermore, the button in the header area can be used to minimize the bubbles
again after they have been called.
But the object bubble is also used as a bubble for an inserted Explanation macro. This bubble
is displayed on the application depending on its position and settings and offers alternative
page or object related information.
When used inside the process assistant, the object bubble also contains an OK button to
confirm actions and go to the next process step.
Design and position
The object bubble design is predefined in the central settings. This is where changes to the
way information is displayed can be made. The bubble position is dictated by the position of
the object and the orientation setting. These can be changed in the respective object's Macro
Editor in the Advanced subcategory.
Main Bubble
The main bubble is the information interface in the process wizard and provides an overview
of the respective process. When playing the process assistant, the user can move the bubble
anywhere in the application view so that it is not in his way when working with the application.
Design and position
The Display Process Assistant macro is used to define the design and position of the main
bubble in the application view. This is where changes to the way information is displayed can
be made. Furthermore, the bubble can be defined via the Edit main bubble dialog box.
Editing the Main Bubble
When displaying the main bubble the Navigator accesses the predefined settings in the
central settings by default. If you would like to customize the position, size and style of the
main bubble for your process assistant, you can do this in the Position bubble Editor. To do
so, select the Edit Main Bubble option in the Display macro in the header line of the Macro
Editor to open the Editor.
82
08 2012
Note:
Changes in this Editor only impact the main bubble. The object bubble's appearance can be
customized in the Central Configuration Dialog in the Global Macro Parameters -> Object
bubble area.
You can perform the following customization:

Position
You can use the mouse to position the Main Bubble on the screen by moving it to the
desired position with the left mouse button held down. Please ensure in the process
that the element is so positioned that it does not subsequently obscure process
related areas or important information in the application.

Scale
You can customize the size of the Main Bubble by changing the resizing handles with
the left mouse button held down. Please however ensure that you do not scale the
Main Bubble such that it is too small as the contents will otherwise be shown with
vertical and horizontal scrollbars and the information displayed may be more difficult
to comprehend.

Style Select
The Bubble-Style dropdown list is available to you in the middle of the Position bubble
dialog box for customizing the default bubble styles. You can select in the list from the
bubble styles available for your Workarea.
Click on the Save button to accept your customized settings. Alternatively you can reject the
settings by clicking on Cancel.
Note:
The main bubble alignment is set to center. An alternative alignment is not possible as the
main bubble does not refer to an object but is used at a higher level than an application or
page.
Edit navigations
Various functions for editing how your navigation is displayed, its functionality and design are
available to you in the Project Editor. These can be called when selecting a macro via the
Macro Editor or the Context Menu.
Post processing after converting
To customize and design a navigation according to the specific requirements, manual editing
is possible after automatic conversion of a simulation.
Necessary customization
The following post editing will be required as a result of the technical specifics of the recorded
application:

If page keys were recorded with a regular expression, these page key attributes have
to be customized as otherwise the Navigator cannot display the associated
application pages. The Replace Key Page Attribute function is available for this
purpose. Selecting this option, displays a dialog allowing you to select all the page key
attributes. Now select the attribute with a regular expression and click Next. With the
option regular expression enabled, the selected page key attribute will be converted
08 2012
83
Contents
accordingly, so that the Navigator will be able to interpret it. Click on Replace to
customize the regular expression.

For an application with dynamic page keys the page key has to be edited manually, so
that the recording‟s page key is not used in the navigation. For this purpose the page
key can be rerecorded using the function Update Screen Context.

Context assistants are strongly dependent on the differentiation of the application
pages‟ page keys. In applications such as Word or Outlook 2007, this differentiation
may not be sufficiently clear because the application only has one view and and a
process does not therefore take place on several application pages. To be able to
differentiate the pages exactly, other controls have to be added to the context
assistant using the Record Additional ID function. To do this, select the macro Screen
Context on which the desired control is displayed. Now click on the function Record
Additional ID, select the desired control and confirm with Ok.
Further customization
The following post processing can be performed:

Additional application page objects can be recorded manually for a context assistant
to explain objects of an application page in further detail.

To provide users with additional information general notes can be created that will be
faded in while a navigation is in progress. This is accomplished using the Record
explanation function, which can be selected in the macro editor after selecting the
Screen Context macro.

As regards visual presentation layout changes and position changes can be applied to
the highlights and bubbles. As the bubbles are inserted directly at the clicked position,
it is recommended standard practice to review them to ensure an optimal view.

As the text modules are adopted directly from the simulations, they should be
reviewed for use in the navigation and modified if so required. For example, this is
necessary in process orientated descriptions such as Click on Next, to obtain generic
information in a context assistant.
Inserting an explanation
You can insert additional information into your navigation and use it in a variety of different
ways with the Explanation macro. This information can relate, for example, to an application
or page. System-wide explanations can also be used for generally valid information.
System-wide explanations are applicable to all applications and processes. They make it
possible to communicate general information quickly and directly to users, for example,
information about upcoming work on a server.
Displaying explanations
An explanation is displayed as follows depending on the navigation type and the position in
the project:
84

Explanations in the first topic can be used system-wide

Explanations under the application context are displayed for the respective application

Context Assistant: Explanations in the topic of a Context Assistant are displayed for
an entire page

Process Assistant: Explanations in the first topic of a Process Assistant are displayed
as start bubble - a confirmation button for the start of the process is displayed

Process Assistant: Explanations in the topic of a Process Assistant are displayed for a
step
08 2012
Inserting an explanation
The explanation is to be inserted as follows for the application context and the Display macro:
1. Select the macro for which the explanation is to be inserted.
2. Then click the Insert Explanation function in the header of the Macro Editor.
3. The explanation bubble is inserted in the topic and you can now enter a text and
position the bubble.
Adding an explanation for screen context
The explanation is to be added as follows for the page context:
1. Select a screen context
for which the explanation is to be displayed.
2. Then click on the Record Explanation function in the header line of the Macro Editor.
3. Now define where the explanation is to be located by clicking in the application. You
will be prompted by a note on the cursor
4. A dialog will then appear in which you can enter the explanatory text. Then confirm
this by clicking on OK.
The recorded Explanation macro can then be further edited in the Macro Editor to customize
the macro's appearance and functionality if so required.
Recording an Active Area
The Active Area is an alternative object context which is used, among other things, for
converting Hotspot recordings from simulations. Creating an Active Area does not deposit
any object information that recognize the object when it is being called in the application. The
macro therefore lends itself to static objects that cannot be recognized free of defects when
playing back the context assistant.
This is how you create an Active Area:
1. Select a page context on which the Active Area is to be displayed.
2. Then click on the Record Active Area function in the header line of the Macro Editor.
3. Now click in the application to activate the Editor to create the Active Area. You will be
prompted by a note on the cursor
4. A selection frame will then appear to which you can assign a position and size for the
Active Area by moving it vertically and horizontally. Confirm your selection by clicking
on OK.
08 2012
85
Contents
5. After selecting the object a dialog box will appear in which you can define the Context
info as well as other object context attributes. Please refer to the settings section in
the Record object context dialog for an explanation of the settings.
6. Confirm the dialog by clicking on OK if you would like to complete the recording or
click on Next to record another object.
How to hide an object bubble
For object bubbles, it is possible to display an option for the user to use in order to be able to
actively hide bubbles and their highlights. This allows users to hide any information they do
not need, thereby personalizing their lessons to tailor to their specific needs. The author can
activate this option so that it appears in the bubbles.
How to display the Show Hide Option in a bubble
In order to make this option visible to the user in the object bubble, click on Show hide option.
You can define this individually for a macro or for the entire project:

Define for an Object Bubble
To define the settings for a specific macro, choose Object Context and then go to the
Object Bubble area in the Macro Editor. Activate the setting Show Hide Option.

Define for all Object Bubbles
To define the setting for all macros, open the global configuration dialog box under
Context Assistant -> Global Macro Parameters -> Object Bubble. Activate the setting
Show hide option.
How to allow the user to display bubbles
If a user hides one or several object bubbles during a navigation and would like to make the
information reappear, there are two options to do so via the Context Menu from the taskbar in
the Navigator:

Reset hidden bubble – for one specific bubble

Reset all hidden bubbles – for all the Bubbles
Customizing Page Informations
Under certain circumstances page information is generated when recording an application
that is not universally applicable. That means that the page information only existed during
the recording but is no longer up-to-date when being played back by a user or else is not
relevant for this user. For example, that might be material numbers or information arising as a
result of user roles. When playing back a navigation a page key that does not match the
application page currently being displayed results in a situation in which the help content
associated with a recorded application page cannot be displayed to users.
In order for a navigation to be capable of being used generically by all users the page the
information is to be replaced by regular expressions.
Replace page key attribute
The Replace page key attribute function is available to you in the Producer for customizing
the page information.
1. Select the Replace page key attribute
menu.
86
function from the Tools -> Automation
08 2012
2. This will open a dialog giving you access to all the page key attributes via an option
menu. Select the attribute you wish to customize and click on Next.
3. The page key attribute that has been selected can now be customized in the following
dialog. To create a regular expression, activate the Regular Expression option. Then
click on Replace to customize the attribute wherever it occurs in a macro.
If you would like to customize additional page key attributes then click on Replace and
Next...
Following its replacement, the attribute receives the following format: RegExp(/page key
attribute/)
If an attribute contains a static and a dynamic component this is expressed as follows:
RegExp(/static component */)
The asterisk (*) defines a placeholder for the dynamic component.
Updating navigations
For possible process changes and extensions in the navigation projects automatic updating
of the navigations is available during playback in the Navigator. This presupposes that the
projects are held centrally on a server or file-share.
The parameter Update frequency is available to you in the Display variant macro. This is
located in the Advanced subcategory visible when selecting the option Show more. The value
is specified in minutes
Save the navigation to your relevant storage location for update purposes. The navigation will
be updated automatically with the specified frequency during playback. Once it has been
automatically updated, the navigation will restart.
A navigation's update frequency should not be set at too high a value, so as to avoid
unnecessary server queries. An optimal value is between 3-6 hours or every 24 hours. This
depends on the anticipated changes.
Note:
Bear in mind with automatic updating of a process support that if it happens to be running
when it is updated, the navigation will then start again from the beginning. Process support
updates should therefore be undertaken in the evening or at weekends, when low usage
levels can be expected.
08 2012
87
Contents
Editing bubbles
Bubbles are edited in the topic view. You can change the bubble text and the size and
position of the bubble here.
There are two buttons on the toolbar that can be used to switch between the view of the
bubble for the current macro and the bubbles for all macros in the topic.
Note:
The highlights of the actions cannot be changed because they are linked to the recorded
control element. Changes can produce errors in the display for the navigation process.
Editing bubble texts
Bubble texts for the navigation macros can be edited right on the bubble or in the Macro
Editor in the respective mode.

Editing in the topic view
Double-click on a bubble and an HTML editor will appear with various options for
editing the content. For more information on the HTML editor, please refer to the
HTML Editor section of the document. Edit your text as desired and click on OK to
confirm your changes.

Editing in the macro editor
Texts can be edited in the Macro Editor in the Context Info parameter. Click on the
respective text field and the HTML editor will appear. You can now edit the text.
Positioning bubbles
You can change the size and position of bubbles in the topic view as follows:
Positioning the bubbles
1. Click on the object you would like to edit.
2. A red line will appear around the object. Click on the object again, this time holding
the mouse button down.
3. With the mouse button still pressed, drag the object to the desired position.
4. Release the mouse button and the object is now positioned.
Changing bubble alignments
1. Click on the object you would like to edit.
2. A square will appear at the tip of the bubble, which you can use to turn the object.
With bubbles that do not have a tip, the square will appear in the middle of the bubble.
Click on the dot and hold the mouse button down.
3. With the mouse button still pressed, pull the dot away from the bubble and until you
have reached the desired position. Pull the dot towards the middle of the bubble if you
wish to hide the tip.
4. Release the mouse button to set the new position.
Merging navigation projects
Several navigations can be integrated into a single project so that you can use content from
various projects in one navigation.
The advantage of this is that content can be accessed quickly and directly and additional
projects do not need to be loaded as the Navigator can only ever play back one navigation.
88
08 2012
Already existing objects also do not have to be recorded twice.
If multiple simulations have been converted into navigations, then a complex navigation can
be created quickly and easily by inserting various projects into one project. It is not apparent
to the user when playing back the context assistant whether he is dealing with multiple
projects.
Integrate projects using the following procedure:
1. Create a new project to add the different navigations to with the New Project
function.
You can also open an existing project from within the Project Editor.
2. In the Edit menu select the Include Navigation
function.
3. You can now select the project to be inserted from within the open dialog box. Do so
by clicking on the Edit button. This will open a dialog displaying all the projects within
the Workarea using the Navigation macroset. Select the desired project and click on
Ok.
4. Then confirm the dialog by clicking on OK if you would like to insert the project or click
on Next to insert the project and select another project.
The projects themselves are linked by the act of inserting them. A macro displaying the link
will appear in the first topic. Linking the projects means that changes made in the original
project are also incorporated in the link and thus also displayed in the navigation.
The way in which the main bubble is displayed reflects the project from which the navigation
is being called as the Display
macro is located by default within the first topic. Any
customization should therefore also be applied in this macro. If you have created a new
project then the act of inserting the project automatically creates the Display macro.
When playing back the navigation the Navigator reads out the context information, starting
with the first topic. With multiple occurrences of content of one context type, such as for
example the same page contexts, the Navigator displays the first context to be read out. If
one context that is the same is not to be preferred over another, the macro with the currently
used context is to be relegated to a topic further back in the navigation.
08 2012
89
Contents
Playing back navigations
The basic prerequisite for playing back navigations is for the Navigator to be installed in the
operating system. This can be incorporated in the system either via the installation file or by
copying the program folder from an installation on another computer. Please read below how
to start navigations both with and without an existing Producer installation.
Previewing a navigation
At any time during the creation process you can preview the playing back of the navigation
elements and thus check for possible errors or necessary improvements. Proceed as follows:
1. Click on Play (Navigation)
in the toolbar to start the project.
2. Start or maximize the target application and go to the desired application page. If the
help objects were correctly created and linked to, they will now be displayed in the
application page.
3. Click on Stop (Navigation)
in the toolbar to exit the preview.
Note:
A navigation preview is controlled by the Producer. The Navigator and its control functions
are thus not available in the preview.
Controlling the Navigator
The Navigator is a background application the presence of which is not indicated to the user
by a graphical user interface as such. Nevertheless, the application's various activity statuses
are displayed to the user by status icons in the task bar's information area.
Tip:
Use the shortcut CTRL + F11 to activate the Navigator's standby mode. No support is
indicated when in standby mode. The check for any available support for application pages
goes ahead regardless and if any is found is indicated by the status icon. Double clicking on
the status icon allows you to deactivate standby at any time.
The following table gives you an overview of the various icons and what they mean. For
greater clarity, the table is divided into Active and Passive. Active stands for a visible display
of help objects, where these are available. Passive on the other hand, means that the
Navigator is in standby-mode, namely has been minimized to the info area.
Active
The Navigator is active and checks the
current application page for help elements to
display.
The Navigator is active; there are no help
elements available for the current application
page.
The Navigator is active; help elements are
available for the current application page and
are displayed.
90
08 2012
Passive
The Navigator is in standby mode and
checks the current application page for help
elements.
The Navigator is in standby mode; there are
no help elements available for the current
application page.
The Navigator is in standby mode; help
elements are available for the current
application page but are not displayed.
Options
A shortcut menu, which opens by right clicking on the status icon, offers you further options.
The following options are at your disposal:

Display version...
This menu option allows you to view the version number of the Navigator currently in
use. Please make a note of this if you would like to get in contact with SAP support in
the event of problems.

JavaScript console
Use this menu option to launch the JavaScript console. As a rule this should not be
necessary but is of benefit in order to be able to provide detailed error messages to
SAP support should any errors occur.

Close
Use this menu option to exit Navigator.
Starting a navigation in the Producer
To open a navigation from within Producer, proceed as follows:
1. Open the Project Explorer view.
2. Select a navigation project in the tree structure.
3. Expand the project entry to display the navigation that has been generated as a
subordinate entry. Generated navigations are identified as follows:
4. You can launch the navigation by double clicking on the navigation icon.
5. The Navigator icon will now appear in the task bar info area. Read more about the
different icon statuses in the chapter on Controlling the Navigator.
6. Open the corresponding target application. The Navigator will now display supporting
help elements at the relevant points defined in the application.
Playing back without the Producer
Navigations, like simulations, are part of a published Workarea and are portrayed in the
library. Please note, however, that any navigations generated cannot form part of a
simulation project and are therefore given their own entry in the tree structure. That means
that, especially when using converted navigations, duplicate topic entries, but which are
different in the way they are applied, can arise. It is therefore recommended that the
Workarea structure be organized accordingly so as to avoid confusing users.
08 2012
91
Contents
For example, you can use two similarly structured main strings to separate simulation and
navigation or arrange simulation and navigation in succession so as to ensure subject
cohesion.
A manually created navigation on the other hand can, for example, already depict a major
proportion of the available simulations and should therefore possibly be placed at the end of
a topic string.
To load a navigation using library, proceed as follows:
1. Open the library.
2. Select a navigation project in the tree structure.Context Assistant
3. You can launch the navigation by clicking on the corresponding button in the header
area of the overview.
4. Clicking opens the browser dialog for downloading files and offers you a file with the
file extension *.dnt.
Note:
No file links are updated when copying the Navigator program folder. In this case, the
operating system is unable to assign the file format *.dnt when the navigation is first
launched. Click on the Open with... dialog that opens in this case on Browse and specify the
Navigator.exe file from the folder you have copied. Activate the checkbox for the option
Always open with this program to avoid having to repeat this action.
5. Click on Open.
6. The Navigator icon will now appear in the task bar info area. Read more about the
different icon statuses in the chapter on Controlling the Navigator.
7. Open the corresponding target application. The Navigator will now display supporting
help elements at the relevant points defined in the application.
Publishing navigations
The following sections give you an overview of what is involved in publishing navigations and
explain the different ways in which they can be provided to, and used by, end users.
Publishing a Workarea
Publishing navigations for the end user requires the associated Workarea to be published.
Publication involves the playing of all the files required for playing back navigations. These
are configuration files and resources for displaying and executing navigations as well as the
navigations themselves. The published Workarea can then be provided to the users.
Note:
A prefix that specifies the storage location is to be defined for publishing navigations on a file
share or web server. For more information, see the section under publishing.
92
08 2012
Playing back navigations locally
Local playback entails a navigation being launched from a Workarea filed on the observer's
workstation. This variant is used, for example, by authors to check the navigations that have
been created.
Navigations can be played back locally by double clicking to launch them directly from
Producer. Alternatively a navigation can be launched from the library once the library has
been opened from within the Producer.
But navigations can also be played back locally if a published Workarea was filed on the
workstation. For example, the library can be displayed to allow a navigation to be selected
from it. The library is opened using the Workarea's index.html. But a navigation can also be
launched directly from within the project folder, this requires the navigation file (*.dnt) to be
launched.
Publishing navigations centrally
Publishing navigations centrally allows the Help content to be made available to multiple
users as well supporting concentrated editing and updating. Navigations are typically
provided by the authors or administrators.
The following variants for central publication of navigations are possible:

Publishing navigations to a file share

Publishing navigations to a server
Filing navigations on a server allows the following advanced use:

Direct launch of navigations

Launch using the Manager learner view
Direct launch of navigations via a file share or web server
If navigations are to be launched from a web server or file share, then the published
Workareas are to be filed on the corresponding system. Specifying the path for the navigation
file (*.dnt) allows you to link to it. These links can then be made available to users, for
example within an Intranet or via web applications.
Launching from a file share
Path information for launching a navigation from a file share is to be provided as follows:

Navigation file launch: \\server\[...]\workarea\project\project\navigation.dnt

Launch library: …\workarea\index.html
Please ensure when using a file share that the users have the necessary access rights.
Launching from a web server
Path information for launching a navigation from a server is to be provided as follows:

Navigation file launch: http://server/[...]/workarea/project/project/navigation.dnt

Launch library: …/workarea/index.html
Playback navigations about HTTPS
If navigations are stored on a server, then these can be accessed via a Hypertext Transfer
Protocol Secure (HTTPS). It is to be noted that HTTPS protocols means of certificates
showing their trustworthiness and be deposited in the browser for a proper invocation of
applications. If a certificate is not deposited as trustworthy in the browser, with the call of a
08 2012
93
Contents
navigation a certificate error is displayed. About this note you can continue to load the
navigation or close the navigation.
In order to avoid certificate errors from the outset, the specific certificate for the HTTPS
protocol is to be installed as trustworthy in the browser. This can be done under Tools ->
Internet Options -> Contents -> Certificates in the tab Trusted Root Certification Authorities.
The installation should be carried out by an administrator.
Executing navigations via the Manager
Manager can be used to save navigation projects to a web server, allowing them to be edited
and published centrally. Once the author has published the projects in Manager or Producer
users can start the navigations from the learner view or launch them from the library. The
learner view is a component of the Manager in which learning content is made available to
learners.
Context sensitive navigation launch in SAP
To provide direct support to users in their work processes, the SAP Help menu can be made
to incorporate context sensitive navigations, which users can then selectively and quickly
launch from the menu.
The navigations are saved on a server as published Workareas and can now be assigned to
the Help menu in the SAP system.
94
08 2012
Quizzes
With the help of quizzes users' direct questions can be dealt with and automatically analysed.
The task of a quiz is to examine previously acquired knowledge and thus improve it. The
learning experience is enhanced by the high degree of interactivity and scope for multimedia
enrichment of the quiz macros. Direct feedback and the evaluation of the responses enhance
the learning effect and help to pinpoint and plug existing gaps in knowledge in an entertaining
way as well as confirm correct answers.
General Principle
A quiz can be used as support for lessons or as a stand-alone quiz lesson on specific topics.
A quiz lesson consists of a number of quiz macros which are inserted individually into topics
and can be arranged in order. The individual quiz macros can contain various media files
including pictures, audio files and Flash files, thus allowing for a more interesting and more
layered design.
The main focus when using quizzes is on the interaction of the student. He or she can
answers quiz questions using text input boxes, drop-down lists or by moving objects using
drag & drop.
Thus through the interaction and use of various different media types, quiz lessons can be
seen as lessons in multimedia. They rouse the interest of the student and make it a more
enjoyable learning experience.
The Producer offers a wide range of quiz types which you can use to create interesting,
multi-layered while at the same time comprehensive quiz lessons.
Using the Quiz Selection existing quiz macros can be randomly shuffled so that they are
always shown in a different order. This increases the level of learning as the different tasks
set are shown and are to be solved in random order.
With general and macro-specific feedback settings the students are always kept informed of
whether or not they passed the quiz. If the user enters an incorrect answer, the correct
answer can be displayed to bridge possible knowledge gaps.
Furthermore, the Producer provides the option of setting a limit on the time allowed to
answer both individual quiz macros as well as entire quiz lessons. This way quizzes are
perfectly suited for examinations or for learning under examination conditions.
Quizzes can also be produced as documentation, which can be useful as an aid to your
lessons. For more information on this, please consult the Creating Quiz Documentation
section.
Creating Quizzes
A quiz lesson is made up of a number of quiz macros, each of which must be created and
edited individually. The following sections explain how to create a quiz lesson and how to
integrate quizzes into a normal lesson.
There are multiple quiz macros available for this purpose which are made up of ten different
quiz types and the general macros for the Quiz Selection and Quiz Evaluation. You will find
an overview and description of the quiz macros in the macro reference section.
This explains in general how to handle, insert and edit quiz macros as well as what should be
taken into account when doing so.
Before starting work on creating a quiz, think about how you would like to structure your quiz.
What tasks you would like to set and how, namely with which quiz types these tasks are to be
08 2012
95
Contents
queried. Do you want to arrange the quiz types by subject, would you like to insert a quiz
selection at a later date and in which topics is a quiz evaluation to be placed.
Creating a Quiz Lesson
To create a lesson that is made up entirely of quiz macros, please proceed as follows:
1. Create a new project in the Project Explorer
To do so, use the Standard macroset.
.
The Use Audio option cannot be chosen. Audio files inserted into a quiz macro are
managed using the Media file parameter and are not inserted via the topic, like in
regular lessons.
2. To play a lesson the Start Lesson
required. Create these first:
macro and the End Lesson
macro are
1. Here, insert two topics via the menu Edit-> Add Topics.
2. Then go to the menu Tools -> Insert Special Macro and select the
corresponding macro. Make sure that the Start Lesson macro is located in the
first topic and the End Lesson macro can be placed in the second or last topic.
Note:
In a quiz lesson, the Start Lesson and End Lesson macros must be set manually. The
insertion of the points in the Start Lesson macro does not have any effect on the points of
the quiz macros and does not need to be considered.
3. To create quiz macros you will need topics into which you insert your quizzes. Add
topics via the menu Edit -> Add Topic. Place the topics between the topics that
contain the Start Lesson and End Lesson macros.
4. Now insert the desired quiz macros. These can be selected via the menu Edit-> Insert
Quiz Macro.
One or more quiz macros can be inserted for each topic. This enables the sorting of
quizzes according to theme or the insertion of a quiz selection for specific quiz
macros.
96
08 2012
Tip:
Please make sure that you do not insert too many macros into a topic. To keep the lesson
clear, you can create new topics.
Additionally, it is recommended that the Allow to skip quiz option is activated when editing
quizzes in the Central Configuration Dialog so that quiz macros can be skipped without the
user having to answer the questions.
5. Edit the corresponding quiz macros. More information on this can be found in the
following sections and in the Quiz Macro Reference section.
Tip:
When you play a lesson via an LMS, you can stop the playback after a certain lesson and
then restart it. In order to ensure that the quiz components work properly, we recommend
that when using an LMS, you should create a separate topic for each quiz macro. If you add
several quiz macros to one topic, once the playback has been stopped, all of the quiz
questions must be answered.
Integrating Quiz Macros into a regular Lesson
As well as being able to create a quiz lesson, you can also integrate individual quiz macros
into regular lessons. For example, this can be useful if you want to ask questions relating to
functions and processes directly after they are shown, thereby improving user knowledge.
Note:
First insert the quiz macros into fully edited lessons for which ReRecording is not planned or
was already carried out. This is necessary as the Producer goes through the individual
steps macro by macro when ReRecording and the quiz macros cannot be skipped.
To integrate a quiz section into a regular lesson, proceed as follows:
1.
Insert a new topic:
1. To do this, select the topic after which the new topic should be placed.
2.
Then go to the menu Edit -> Add Topic and insert the new topic.
2. Now create your quiz macros by selecting the corresponding quiz type from the menu
Edit-> Insert Quiz Macro.
08 2012
97
Contents
It is recommended that you insert multiple quiz macros into a topic. To finish, a Quiz
Evaluation can be inserted into the topic as the last macro. In doing so you also avoid
unnecessary complexity from having too many topics integrated into the existing
lesson.
3. Now insert the corresponding quiz macros. More information on this can be found in
the following sections and in the Quiz Macro Reference section.
To display the quizzes in the trainer it is necessary to activate the corresponding mode in
which the quizzes are to be shown. For more on this, see the Main Settings for Quizzes
section.
General Settings for the Quiz Types
Once you have created a quiz macro you will be able to edit or add content to it.
When setting up quiz types it is necessary to set a question as well as the number of points
required. You can also name the quiz.
98

Points:
This parameter allows you to set the point value required to have achieved a correctly
answered quiz. 1 is set as the minimum default value for this.
This way, you have the option of dividing your quiz macros into different levels of
difficulty.

Title:
Enter a name for your quiz. For example, it can be a subject area or a description of
the quiz. The name is displayed during playback of the lesson in the top section of the
tasks.

Question:
In the Question field enter a task for the quiz macro.
08 2012
Instead of entering a question, you can enter a media file as a question. For example,
this can be a PowerPoint slide. To read more on this, see the Show instead of
question setting in the Subcategory Media.
Customizing Quiz Types
Similar to the inserted quiz macro you can also set additional properties of a quiz. For an
overview and description of the functionality of quiz types, see the Quiz Macros reference
pages. The individual macros are described in more detail in their corresponding chapters.
Pay attention to similarly described settings and approaches when creating macros so that
the corresponding functionality can be defined.
Note:
In case the inputs of a quiz macro are incomplete or faulty, an error message will be
displayed when starting the lesson. When closing the trainer appropriate corrections may be
taken.
Incomplete or faulty quiz macros will be skipped while playing the lesson.
There are a number of general settings for the macros which can be found in the
Subcategory Media, Options and Feedback. Please consult the following sections for more
information.
These settings can be used to personally design your quizzes.
Subcategory Media
In the Subcategory Media the Media File parameter can be used to insert a file for visual or
acoustic display or support of task-setting. This can be a picture, video or audio file.
To the right of the tasks section there is a media area for the Media File where it is placed
after being inserted.
Please note that corresponding plug-ins are required for each inserted file and that they must
be installed on the computer. These are then used to view the corresponding file. For
example, you will need a Flash plug-in for a Flash file, the PDF Reader for a PDF file or the
QuickTime Player for the QuickTime format. These plug-ins can be downloaded from their
respective manufacturers for free.
08 2012
99
Contents
Note:
Since video and audio files cannot be integrated into a Word document, Media Files are not
produced with everything else when creating the documentation.
Advanced Settings

Width, Height:
Use the Width and Height settings to change the format of the Media File after
inserting a picture file.

Show instead of question:
Upon activating the Show instead of question setting the inserted Media File is shown
instead of the question. Use this setting if you wish to have the quiz questions shown
as PowerPoint slides.
Note:
The Show instead of question setting cannot be adjusted in the Puzzle and Hotspot quiz
types. This is because a media file in the form of a picture file is already used for the display
of the tasks for both of these macros.
Subcategory Options
In the Options subsection you have the choice of setting a Time limit in seconds for every
quiz type. You can use this parameter to set a specific time within which the quiz is to be
answered.
This can be done individually for each quiz macro or for the entire quiz via the Central
Configuration Dialog.
Note:
If the Time limit has been exceeded when answering a quiz macro, the quiz will be deemed
to be incorrectly answered on evaluation.
When a time limit has been set, a clock appears while a lesson is playing, showing the
remaining time. If a time limit has been defined in the Central Configuration Dialog for the
entire quiz, an additional second clock will appear.
100
08 2012
Note:
If you set a time in the Central Configuration Dialog for the entire quiz, then the combined
individual times of each of your quizzes should not surpass the value for the entire quiz
lesson.
There are additional individual quiz macros settings available in the Subcategory Options.
See the corresponding sections in the reference section for the Quiz Macros.
Subcategory Feedback
After confirming a quiz task, you can have a dialog display whether or not the quiz was
correctly answered. In this case, the Enable Feedback parameter must be selected.
When the feedback setting is activated the feedback texts defined in the Central
Configuration Dialog are shown accordingly.
However, you can also define individual feedback texts for a macro, which would be shown
instead of the general settings. The following text fields can be used for this and can be
shown by making changes to the advanced settings:

Quiz passed:
This text is shown when the quiz has been answered correctly.

Quiz failed:
This text is shown when the quiz has been answered incorrectly.

Quiz timeout:
This text is shown when the time for answering the quiz has elapsed. In this case, a
value for the Time limit in Seconds parameter must be defined.
Editing the General Quiz Macros
Once the quiz types have been created, you have the option of adding more quiz macros for
the design of a quiz lesson. These are:

Quiz Selection:
If you have added multiple quiz types to a topic, you can have them display in random
order with the help of the quiz selection tool or only have one quiz type from the topic
display.

Quiz Evaluation:
Once a quiz has been finished it is possible to show the results. This can apply to a
08 2012
101
Contents
full quiz lesson, in which case the macro in the last topic will need to be placed in front
of the End Lesson macro.
It is also possible to show this macro in a topic as the result for multiple quiz macros.
For example, this is needed if quiz macros were integrated into a regular lesson.
Here, this macro should be added to the corresponding topic as the last macro.
Please also take note of the individual descriptions for each of the two macros in the
corresponding quiz macro reference sections.
Quiz Lesson View
Viewing the quiz lesson should be done via theTest mode. This is necessary to stop the
trainer bar displaying and to prevent navigating with the arrow keys so that a topic is not
skipped unintentionally.
When displaying the quiz lessons in the library the other modes can be hidden.
If quiz macros have been inserted into a regular lesson, then the modes in which the quizzes
are to be shown should be selected in the Central Configuration Dialog.
Central Settings for Quizzes
Several quiz settings can be adjusted in the Central Configuration Dialog which define the
way the quiz lesson is presented and proceeds.
Open the Central Configuration Dialog via the menu Tools -> Settings... and select Standard > Global Parameters -> Quiz. The settings will be defined for all quiz lessons and lessons
with quizzes. Settings can also be fine-tuned Project Overrides within a project.

Quiz style:
A corresponding Style can be selected for a quiz's display.
The styles are saved in the folder of the corresponding Workarea under
resources/quiz-styles. These can be customised individually if you have sufficient
HTML and CSS knowledge.

Allow to skip quiz:
This setting lets you skip a quiz without having to enter an answer. If this setting is
deactivated, every quiz must be answered in order to proceed on to the next one.

Time limit for complete quiz in seconds:
A time can be set in this parameter inside of which a full quiz lesson must be
answered. When a time limit has been set, a clock appears showing the remaining
time.
Please note that it only makes sense to use this setting within a quiz lesson and it
should not be used for quizzes inserted into lessons. To read more on setting
individual time limits for a quiz macro, please go to the Options subsection.

If quiz macros are to be integrated into a regular lesson, it is necessary to activate the
view in the corresponding mode. The following settings are set as default:

In Demo mode

In Practice mode

In Test mode
Please consult the Views section as well.
102
08 2012
Feedback Settings
After confirming a response the user can be shown a notice stating whether or not the quiz
was answered correctly or incorrectly.

Enable Feedback:
When this parameter is set, the following feedback entries are shown.

Show Feedback as popup:
When this parameter is set, a corresponding feedback box is shown as a pop-up
window in the foreground.

Show correct answers:
When this parameter is set, in addition to Quiz not passed being shown, the correct
answer will also be shown when an incorrect answer has been entered.

Quiz passed:
The feedback text entered is shown when a quiz has been solved correctly.

Quiz failed:
The feedback text entered is shown when a quiz has been solved incorrectly.

Quiz timeout:
The feedback text entered is shown when the time limit for answering the quiz lesson
or quiz macro has expired. A value for this must be defined in the Time limit for
complete quiz in seconds or Time limit in seconds parameter.
Translating Quizzes using Translation
Templates
Various texts are created manually in quiz macros like, for example, the questions and
names of quiz types and the corresponding response texts. If quiz lessons or quiz macros
integrated into regular lessons are to be used for several languages, they need to be
translated.
Since the quiz macro texts are not automatically generated texts, they cannot be translated
using the Automated Translation function. The translation of quiz lessons is therefore done
with the help of translation templates. The texts for the quiz macros are automatically
produced by the Producer when a translation template is generated and can be translated
correspondingly. You will then be able to import the translated texts into the corresponding
lesson.
The translation should be done after completing a quiz lesson so that all of the texts that
need to be translated can be edited fully. Please consult the corresponding section for
translating lessons using the translation templates.
Note:
Please make sure to duplicate a lesson before translating it so that the original project is not
overwritten.
Creating Quiz Documentation
As with general lessons, you also have the opportunity of generating documentation for quiz
lessons or quiz macros that were inserted into regular lessons using the documentation
functions.
It is possible to produce quiz documentation for Word files. At the moment, production as
HTML documentation is only partially supported.
08 2012
103
Contents
The individual quiz types are mostly designed as tables, which should be filled out
accordingly. The missing text is created as a normal text with the relevant underscores in
place as spaces for the gap words.
As a result of the functionality of quiz types, this is done differently here and is in accordance
with the document's format for production as documentation. The display and usage of dropdown lists and drag & drop is not possible. For this reason, this format is more suited for
filling in on the computer or on a print-out.
Exporting quiz macros to a document
If you have inserted quiz macros in a lesson, you can also issue them as part of the lesson
documentation. If you would like to block the generation of quiz macros in the lesson, then
deactivate the Show Quiz option in the Central Settings (menu Tools -> Settings...). These
are found in the area Standard -> Settings -> Documentation type -> Quiz for the document
types: standard document and working document.
Generating Word Documentation for Quizzes
Select Generate Word Document
from the Producer toolbar to generate quiz
documentation in Word. This does not require any particular type of topic to be selected as
they all have the same type of output in common.
If you have quiz macros that have been inserted into a regular lesson, then select the
corresponding Word documentation for your lesson.
Once the documentation has been produced it can be edited later on in more detail.
104
08 2012
Note:
Please note that the puzzle quiz macro is not produced on generation of the documentation
as the option of doing puzzles is not possible in the corresponding document format.
Print solutions
For quiz documentation you also have the option of generating the solutions for the quiz
macros. This way, you can differentiate between a document intended for the examiner with
all the correct answers and one for the person being examined without any of the answers.
Activate the Print with solutions setting in the central configuration dialog (menu Tools ->
Settings...) to export the solutions This is found under Standard-> Settings -> Documentation
type -> Quiz for the documentation types: standard document and working document.
Customizing the Quiz Styles
The graphical quiz templates can be customized individually, according to your corporate
design for example.
Note:
You should only make changes to a quiz style if you have the appropriate experience and
knowledge working with HTML and CSS.
The quiz styles are saved in the folder of the corresponding Workarea under quiz_style. Use
the standard folder to customize the quiz style. Make a backup copy of the folder first. Don‟t
create a new folder, customize directly in the folder standard.
Note:
Use the existing standard folder only to customize your layout and do not rename the folder,
as this will result in errors in integrating and displaying the quiz macros.
The following files can be used to customize the layout:

For the display of the quiz types
quiz_blank.html and quiz_user.css

For the display of the quiz evaluation
quiz_eval.html and quiz_eval.css

The folder contains a number of different graphics:

for the background and layout

for the execution of quizzes, like, for example, marking for the Hotspot quiz type
You can customize these according to your requirements. It is recommended that the
descriptions and dimensions of the files be retained so that their composition and display are
not adversely affected.
Save your pictures as.gif files so that the size is kept to a minimum and surfaces can be
made transparent.
Do you make changes in a file, then in the respective header area the date has to update.
Note:
Only customize picture files and CSS values for the display (color, texts, etc.). Additional
changes to the composition and function can bring about display and execution errors.
Do not make any changes to the quiz.css file or the JavaScript files (*.js) as they define the
quiz functions.
08 2012
105
Contents
Books and Book Pages
Books and book pages are a particular way of presenting learning content by using different
lessons and materials within a creative and diverse design and compilation.
Book pages are characterized by a strongly multimedia dimension combined with user
interaction. They make it possible to incorporate lessons and different media files, but also
conventional documents and links to further information.
Using different elements and media presents you with many and various opportunities for
presenting and communicating information. Moreover, the book page design as well can be
individually edited and customized to the content to be communicated.
By consolidating different book pages within one book you can divide your content into
information units.
Easy to create, diverse applications
Book pages make it possible to create courses on a particular topic quickly by inserting
objects on the book page and linking them to content.
In this way you can amalgamate the content of a number of lessons by combining different
modes and documents. However, because of the diverse ways of presenting information on
book pages, it is not absolutely necessary to integrate lessons into a book page. You can
also design a book page using simple texts or video files and thus provide these to the
learner in addition to the individual lessons or else integrate them entirely independently as
an extension of the topic.
Didactic benefit
Books and book pages promote independent learning and a stronger engagement with the
facts as learners are able to use and discover the content individually. They allow the student
to work with the content that is relevant to him and ensure variety due to different information
formats.
Basic principle and structure
A book page is an HTML page on which different content can be filed in different forms and
accessed.
It can accommodate various buttons for launching lessons and opening documents that can
then be linked within a Workarea. Media files for audio and video formats can also be
integrated and can be presented using appropriate playback applications. But information in
traditional form, as an image or text, can also be created on a book page.
A number of book pages can be combined in a book. A book can thus be understood as a
type of group. Once a book has been created, it can be displayed in the book reader, which
the learner can use to flick through the pages and launch and work through content.
Creating a book
You can use the Project Explorer to insert a book in your course structure. Proceed as
follows:
1. Select the New book
106
button in the toolbar.
08 2012
2. Enter a name in the open dialog box and confirm this by clicking on OK to insert the
book.
3. You can use the Book style dropdown menu in the Object Editor to define the desired
style for the book. The style is confined exclusively to what is displayed in the book
reader.
4. You can now insert the desired book pages in the book or create new book pages.
To organize topics you can insert a book or group in a book in the Project Explorer. This
displays the book pages as a subchapter in the book reader.
Note:
Only insert book pages and books or groups in a book for structural purposes. Projects or
documents are not displayed in the book reader as you can link to this learning content
directly via the book pages.
Defining a book page as a content page
You can create a page containing introductory information or a table of contents for a book.
So that the student can access the page at any time in the book reader, the page can be
defined as a content page for the book. The book page can then be launched directly in the
book reader using a button in the control bar.
To define the Content Page select your book in the Project Explorer. Then go to Content
Page in the object editor and select the Edit link... option. You can now specify your book
page in the open dialog. Confirm this by clicking on OK.
08 2012
107
Contents
Subcategory sound effects
The book reader uses audio effects to signal the turning of the pages and the act of closing
the book reader. To this end you can define individual audio files for a book in the WAV,
MP3 or WMA formats.
Inserting an audio file
1. Select the book you want in the tree structure.
2. In the object editor, go to turn page or close in the sound effects category.
3. Select edit link... In the dialog you can select a file from the Workarea or insert a file
using the Import... button.
4. Confirm your selection by clicking on OK.
Subcategory book reader
Various parameters are itemized in the book reader sub category which you can use to
define the functionality in the book reader control bar. This allows you to customize them to
your book's individual requirements and hide any functions you do not want.
The following settings are available:

Hide audio controls:
Activating this option hides the audio file and effects control functions.

Hide navigation controls:
Activating this option hides the buttons for scrolling through the book pages.

Hide index page button:
Activating this option hides the button for calling a specific start page.

Hide search button:
Activating this option hides the button for calling the search dialog.

Hide table of contents control:
Activating this option hides the book page option menu.
108
08 2012

Hide progress bar:
Activating this option hides the progress bar for displaying how the student is
progressing with the learning material in the book.
Calling the book from the library

Open book with single click:
If this option is activated, the book will open as soon as it is selected in the tree
structure in the library in the book reader. If the option is deactivated, the book
reader is started by double clicking or selecting the button in the right hand view of
the library.
Alternative navigations on book pages
Actions can be defined for buttons to allow a navigation on book pages to be executed from
the control bar of the book reader. These are universal properties and allow the user to jump
between book pages and units.
If you would like to use such navigations, it is recommended that the objects be inserted into
a template for book pages. By doing so, they can be used for the entire book and will ensure
consistency throughout your project.
More information on this topic can be found under Link actions for the trainer and book
reader.
To enter a link target, proceed as follows:
1. Insert a book page object, e.g., Image or Active Area.
2. Under Link to…, choose the option Edit link.... The editing dialog box will then appear.
3. Select the desired action under Actions.
Creating a book page
Create a book page in the Project Explorer in the following steps:
1. Select the appropriate book or location within the tree structure where the book page
is to be inserted. You can either insert a book page in a book or on a standalone basis
2. Click on the New book page
08 2012
in the toolbar.
109
Contents
3. Give the book page a name in the open dialog.
4. The Copy from parameter allows an existing book page to be used as a template for
the new book page. That means that once a background design has been created, it
can be retained for additional book pages. This requires the template to be selected
before creating the new book page.
The Change... function allows a book page to be determined from the project
structure.
5. Confirm the data you have entered by clicking on OK.
6. The book page is then automatically opened in the Book Page Editor where you can
now edit it and insert objects.
Editing the book pages
The inserted book pages are edited using the book page editor. You can use this to define
the design and to create objects.
The book page editor view port is a WYSIWYG editor: that means that the book page is
subsequently displayed in the book reader or in the library exactly as it is displayed when
being edited.
Tip:
To maintain clarity with a complex course structure, it is recommended that books and book
pages be inserted at the beginning or end of the structure or of a group. You should maintain
consistency of the positions to make it easier for the user to find his bearings within the
library.
Defining the design
After creating the book page, it is opened in the book page editor using the Default style. You
can use the Style parameter to select the design you want in the Object Editor and customize
it accordingly.
A style defines the background design, the design of the buttons for the linked learning
content as well as the appearance of the text box. Selecting a different skin therefore
changes all of these objects. Before you select a skin, it is advisable to insert some objects to
be able to assess the overall design.
Customizing the background
You can customize the chosen background design as you like. You can use an available skin
as a template which can then be edited once it has been selected.
110
08 2012
Various settings are available to you in the book page editor for displaying the book page:

Width and Height:
These values determine the book page's width and height. The values are stated in
pixels.

Background Color:
Changing this value customizes the color of the outer surface surrounding the book
page.
You can use Select Color...
to define the desired color value. This can be defined
in the RGB or HSV color space or as a hexadecimal value.
You can also make the background transparent if you do not want any color to be
displayed. This is done using the Transparent button
.

Page Color:
This value will determine the book page's background color. It is recommended that
you enter a value in this field if you choose not to use an image for the book page's
background or if you use an image that does not cover the entire book page itself.

Border:
Defines the width of the border for the book page. The value is defined in pixels. If no
border is to be displayed, the value is to be set to 0.

Border Color:
This parameter can be used to define the color of the book page border. The Select
color... function can be used to define a corresponding value in the RGB or HSV color
space or as a hexadecimal value. Ensure that you have previously specified a width
for the border so that it is actually displayed.

Border style:
Determines the style of the border that you can select from the drop-down list.

Image:
This parameter can be used to define an individual background image which replaces
the image of the skin that has been set.
You can call up the design parameters at any time while a book page is being created and
amend them by clicking on the background.
Inserting objects
The principle behind book pages is embedding buttons on them for linking to learning content
as well as interactive objects and media files. Learners can subsequently select objects at will
and work through their learning content or use the information they contain to advance their
learning.
How they arrange the objects on the book page is left to their creativity. They can arrange
them symmetrically or lay them out as they see fit. In the process, they should however take
care not to integrate too many objects on a book page to avoid overloading the page with
objects and information.
Proceed as follows when inserting and editing objects:
1. In the toolbar, click on the button corresponding to the object type you would like to
insert. This creates a button or element for the selected object which allows the user
to call up the learning content.
2. Select the object to edit it.
3. You can position the object on the book page using drag&amp;drop. A red border
appears when you select the object. Click on it and keep the mouse key depressed
08 2012
111
Contents
during the positioning maneuver.
Additional functionality for positioning objects is available to you in the toolbar.
4. Further editing of the object is by means of the object editor, which offers you the
associated parameters. For each object, proceed in accordance with the explanations
in the relevant sections:

Objects for different information

Modes, books and documentation

Media files

Embedded documents
Once you have edited your book page, save it using the Save page
button in the toolbar.
Table of contents for book pages
A book page can have a table of contents faded in, which is displayed on the book page
background independently of the book reader.
The table of contents is constructed from a bar displaying the groups or book pages
belonging to the first sub level. The other groups and book pages can be launched from an
option menu that is faded in using the button on the right-hand side of the book page.
Clicking on a group name opens a menu displaying the group content.
The table of contents on the book pages can be used as an alternative to the table of
contents in the book reader. This is accomplished by deactivating the book reader table of
contents.
Tip:
The width of the table of contents is restricted to the width of the book page. That is why
when setting up the groups it is recommended that short names or chapter numbers be
issued, so that as many groups as possible can be displayed on the bar.
Settings
A book page's table of contents can be defined using the Table of contents subcategory. This
offers you the following functionality:

112
Display:
This function can be used to activate the table of contents for the book page.
08 2012
Note:
The table of contents must be defined for each individual book page. If all of the book pages
of a book are to receive a table of contents, then it is advisable to define the table of
contents for one book page and then use this book page as a copy template when creating
new book pages.

Position:
The table of contents bar can be faded in directly above the book page or in the
window header. Use this parameter to select the appropriate position.

Menu control:
This parameter can be used to select a control for the menu. This is displayed so as
to be able to scroll within a complex content structure.

Menu structure:
These options can be used to define the way in which the content is displayed in the
menu.

Flat structure:
The groups and book pages are displayed in a flat structure such that all groups
and book pages are displayed on one level.

Pages indented:
The contents of a group are shown indented relative to the group itself. This
improves clarity within a complex content structure.

Group selection:
If this option is selected, moving the cursor over the group selects all of the
associated content.

Multiple group selection:
If this option is selected, moving the cursor over the group selects all of the
associated content and highlights the subordinate groups and their content.
This allows complex group structures to be clearly represented.
Further properties of a book page
Show Navigation Arrows
Instead of using the command bar to scroll through the book pages, you can do so using the
buttons either side of the book page. This makes it possible to work more intuitively with the
book.
To display the buttons, activate the Show arrows option for the book page in the book page
editor.
Page Sound
The Page Sound parameter enables background music or an audio commentary to be
inserted in a book page. The student can start the audio file in the book reader in the control
bar.
You can link to MP3 format audio files inserted in the Workarea or import them. To import,
select Current object. Click on the Import... button and then select your audio file. Clicking on
Open inserts the audio file in the book page.
For information on how to add and edit an audio file, refer to the section on Editing an audio
file.
08 2012
113
Contents
Display Duration
This option allows you to determine the duration that a book page should be displayed in the
book reader. Once the time has elapsed, the book reader will automatically jump to the next
book page. This feature allows you to play books as a slide show or an automatic
presentation. The value can be set in seconds.
Merging book pages
Merging book pages allows content from a different book page to be added to the content of
the currently selected book page. This is sensible, for example, when applying recurring
elements or to have a structure available created using construction lines.
When merging book pages, the desired objects are inserted on the book page, but with the
added book page continuing to have its own separate existence.
This is how you add the content of a one book page to another book page:
1. In the book page Editor, open the book page to which the content is to be added.
2. Select the Merge book pages option in the toolbar.
3. A dialog will now be displayed with the overview of the Workarea structure in which
you can determine the book page of your choice. The book page currently open will
be shown grayed out in this structure.
Click on the book page and then on OK to confirm.
4. In the next step, you will be presented with a dialog displaying the objects belonging
to the chosen book page. By making a selection in the selection boxes you can
determine which objects you would like to apply to the open book page. Confirm your
selection by clicking on OK.
The objects are now inserted on the book page in the place in which they were located in the
selected book page. The objects also receive the book page style of the book page to which
they were added.
Defining a default book style
A style can be individually selected for each book page. If however you would like to use a
chosen book style as the default for all of the book pages contained in your book you can do
so as follows:
1. First create a book in the Project Explorer and define a book style for it in the Object
Editor.
2. Then create a book page for the book, the former serving as a template for
subsequent book pages.
3. Deactivate the Style parameter for the book page in the book page Editor. Do so by
clicking on the green checkbox in front of the parameter. This will result in the book
page automatically using the Book style selected for the book.
4. Now create the remaining book pages for your book. At the same time, select the
book page you have just created as a Copy template to adopt the style settings.
Objects of the book pages
The following section will give you an overview on the variety of objects available for
enhancing your book pages. The properties and editing options are described here in detail.
114
08 2012
Objects for different information
Different elements offer the opportunity to provide the learner with further information. You
can insert these using the toolbar and edit them accordingly.
They offer you the following objects:
Button
Function
Insert Arrow
Insert Block Arrow
Insert Bubble
Insert Image
Insert Text Box
Insert Placeholder
Insert Active Area
Insert Text Pop Up
Insert BPM Object
Insert Connection
For editing of objects, please read the corresponding section.
Arrow
The arrow object is customizable. It creates a path for which you can choose from a variety of
arrow heads. The arrow's length, position and direction can be modified as desired.
How to position a path point
There are path points at the beginning and end of an arrow that allow you to adjust its length
and direction. Click on one of the points and drag and drop it to the desired position on the
book page.
How to define an arrow
An arrow object can be customized as follows:
08 2012
115
Contents

Arrow color
This value defines the arrow's color. The Select color...
define an appropriate value.

option can be used to
Thickness
This value allows you to define the arrow's thickness. The value is given in pixels.

Arrow head 1 &amp; 2
There are several different types of arrow heads to choose from:


Standard

Triangle - Hollow

Triangle - Filled

Diamond – Hollow

Diamond – Filled

Circle - Hollow

Circle - Filled
None
Large arrow head
The size of the arrow heads can be changed in this area. The area can be displayed
via the Advanced View.
The size of the arrow head can be defined in width and length and adjusted
depending on the thickness of the arrow. A value can be entered here between 2 and
20 that indicates the factor by which the length or width is to be increased by the
thickness.
Shape
The shape object displays a variety of shapes to choose from for the purpose of enhancing
the visualization of learning content, process flows and sequences. Shape objects can be
used in a variety of ways and can contain text.
To select and insert a shape, click on Insert shape.
Type and orientation
A drop-down list will appear in which you can select what kind of shape you would like to
insert. For some shapes, you can also define its orientation. For more information, refer to the
section on Shapes Overview.
Design

116
Shape color
Here you can select a color for the shape. If you would like to define a value, click on
Select color…
08 2012

Shape value
This setting defines the shape's character. Values between 0 and 100 can be entered
here. The outcome will vary depending on the type of shape selected. For example,
you can change the width of an arrow or smooth the corners of a square.
Note that this setting is not available for all shapes. For more information, refer to the
section on Shapes Overview.
You will find descriptions on additional settings under the section on Editing Parameters.
Effects
Under Effects, there is a variety of settings that allow you to define the behavior and design of
links.

Gradient Shape Color (Gradient)

Border Color (Gradient)

Design Roll-Over Shape color

Shape Color (Gradient)

Border color

Border Color (Gradient)

Design Click Shape color

Shape Color (Gradient)

Border color

Border Color (Gradient)
Shapes Overview
This section will give you an overview of the shapes that are available in the Producer and
includes a list of shapes for which the orientation and/or shape value can be defined.
Shape
Direction / Shape Value
Basic Shapes
Ellipse
Triangle
Left, Right, Up, Down
Isosceles Triangle
Left, Right, Up, Down
Rectangle
Rounded Rectangle
Corner radius
Diamond
Parallelogram
Left, Right, Up, Down
Shape thickness
Trapezoid
Left, Right, Up, Down
Shape thickness
08 2012
Pentagon
Left, Right, Up, Down
Regular Pentagon
Left, Right, Up, Down
117
Contents
Shape
Direction / Shape Value
Heptagon
Octagon
Decagon
Dodecagon
Chevron
Left, Right, Up, Down
Arrow (one direction)
Left, Right, Up, Down
Arrows
Arrow thickness
Arrow
(two directions)
Left Right
Up Down
Shape thickness
Arrow
(two directions kinked)
Left Up
Right Up
Left Down
Right Down
Shape thickness
Triple Arrow
Shape thickness
Quad Arrow
Shape thickness
Notched Arrow
Left, Right, Up, Down
Shape thickness
Stars
4-Point Star
Shape thickness
5-Point Star
Shape thickness
6-Point Star
Shape thickness
7-Point Star
Shape thickness
8-Point Star
Shape thickness
9-Point Star
Shape thickness
10-Point Star
Shape thickness
12-Point Star
Shape thickness
Plus
Shape thickness
Further Shapes
Bubble
Bubbles are ideal for adding visually-appealing textual content to your projects. Similar to
those used in the simulations, these bubbles also have a tip on them to point to a specific
item on the page.
118
08 2012
Creating bubbles
To create a bubble, click on the option Insert bubble. The following options will appear:

Text:
Click on the text field to open the HTML editor, where you can enter and format your
text for the bubble.

Type:
Here you can choose which type of bubble you would like to use. To edit your bubble,
go to the menu Tools and open the editing dialog box for your bubble type.

Alignment:
Here you can specify in which direction the tip of your bubble should be pointing. If
you choose the option Center – the bubble will have no point and it will be positions in
the middle of the chosen area.

Text style:
Here you can choose a predefined style for your text. There are 5 styles to choose
from, from A to E. The text styles are saved under the resource Configuration/Styles
as bubble.css.

Title:
This text field allows you to enter a title for the bubble. When using titles, it is
recommended that you also enable the option Movable, which inserts a title bar at the
top of your object.

Movable:
When this option is enabled, the bubble can be repositioned on the book page during
playback. An additional title bar will appear in the object that allows you to move the
bubble per Drag &amp; Drop. After it‟s been repositioned, the bubble will be displayed
normally with no arrow markers.

Closable:
When this option is enabled, the bubble can be closed while the book page is playing.
An X icon will appear in the corner of the bubble for you to click on.
Under Actions, you can also manually add the icon Restore so you can quickly
redisplay the bubble.
Manually changing text bubble alignments
A square will appear at the top of the bubble, which you can use to manually turn the object.
With centrally-aligned bubbles that do not have a tip, the square will appear in the middle of
the bubble. Click on the square and hold the mouse button down. With the mouse button still
pressed, pull the dot away from the bubble and to the desired position. Release the mouse
button to set the new position.
Image
This function allows you to insert an image in any format. This can be a screenshot, for
example, or the graphical representation of a fact.
You can use the various functions Replace image
corresponding image file.
in the Image parameter to insert a
Creating dynamic effects
Once you have defined a link for an image you can create dynamic effects for it to visualize
its state when moving the cursor over the image and when clicking on it.
08 2012
119
Contents

Image Roll-Over:
You can use the Image rollover option to insert an image that is faded in when the
mouse is moved over it.

Click Image:
You can use the Image rollover option to insert an image that is faded in when the
image is clicked on.
Further options

Retain aspect ratio:
If this parameter is activated, the aspect ratio is retained when scaling an image.
Deactivate this parameter if you want to be free to change the size of an image.

Zoom:
The Zoom option allows you to zoom in and out of images on the book page. An icon
will be inserted onto the image. By clicking on the icon, the image will be shown in its
original size. This allows you to insert an image into the book page and save space
when scaling it.

Link to:
You can use this parameter to link the image you have inserted with an external
webpage or object from the Workarea.
To create a link, go to the Insert link... function. A dialog will then open in which you
can specify a link or select an object from the Workarea. A link to a web page or
similar is to be entered in the text field under Available. This should be in the format
http://www... Confirm your entry by clicking on OK.

Open in new window:
When launched, the linked page is automatically opened in a new browser window. If
you would like to open the page in the same window, then you should deactivate the
setting Open in new window.
If the linked page or object from the Workarea is opened in a new window then you
can define properties dictating the appearance of the open browser window.
Text Box
Clicking on the Insert Text Box button inserts a field in which you can enter pure text. The
size of this field can be varied to accommodate longer texts.
Example, you can use the text field to provide general or introductory information about a
learning topic.
Placeholder
The Placeholder inserts a variable in order to dynamically allocate content to a specific
location. For example: book page title, descriptions, page number, etc. The placeholder
object makes it easier to keep the layout consistent throughout the project.
To use placeholders, it is recommended that you insert them into templates so that they will
be available in all of your book pages. For example, the page number can be integrated into
all of the book pages in the same position.
Once an object has been inserted, choose the desired option from the Placeholder selection
list. The respective content will then be displayed in the text field.
You can choose from the following placeholders:

Book title

Book description

Book page title

Book page description
120
08 2012

Chapter title

Chapter description

Page number

Page count
Active Area
The Active Area is a text field in which you can insert a text or image. The entire area
constitutes a button that can be linked with an external web page or object from the
Workarea. This allows further information, for example, to be shown.
To create a link, go to the Insert link...
function. A dialog will then open in which you can
specify a link or select an object from the Workarea. A link to a web page or similar is to be
entered in the text field under Available. This should be in the format http://www... Confirm
your entry by clicking on OK.
When launched, the linked page is automatically opened in a new browser window. If you
would like to open the page in the same window, you need to deactivate the setting Open in a
new window.
If the linked page or object from the Workarea is opened in a new window, you can define
properties for displaying the browser window that has been opened.
Effects for active areas
Under Effects, you will find a list of settings that allow you to add dynamic effects to active
surfaces in order to improve its usability. The following actions can be defined:

Design Roll-Over

Design Click
Once one of these options has been enabled, additional settings will appear. The following
settings can be defined to change the object‟s properties:

Background color

Font color

Border color
Text Pop-Up
This function inserts a text pop-up which can be opened by a button. You can insert any text
you like in this box as well as an image.
The text pop-up can be formatted using the Text Pop-Up position subcategory to adjust its
size and position.
Defining type and title
Different types, differentiated by a corresponding icon, can be defined for displaying the
textbox. Using different types enables you to highlight the text box content and present it
more clearly to the user.
The following types are available and can be selected using the parameter Type:

Standard

More Info

Tip
08 2012
121
Contents
Title:
You can use the parameter Title to specify a title for the text box. If you do not want to display
a title, you should leave the field blank. The default setting for the Standard type is no title
whereas placeholders are displayed for the other types.
Further options

Show on Roll-Over:
This option allows you to define whether a text pop-up should appear when the mouse
cursor rolls over the icon. When the mouse cursor rolls out of the icon, the text pop-up
will hide again. The text pop-up behaves in the same way as a tooltip.

Fade In/Out:
This parameter defines whether the text pop-up is displayed or hidden with a fading in
effect when being opened or closed. Deactivate the setting if you wish to avoid this
effect.

Hide Text Pop-Up in Editor:
The default setting is for the text pop-up to be displayed in the book page editor.
Activate the parameter to hide it for editing. If you would like to reinstate the text popup in the view, deactivate the setting.
Linking content from the Workarea
You can link modes, documents and book pages you have created from your Workarea on
your book page. Proceed as follows:
1. In the toolbar, select the relevant type which you would like to link to content. A button
is then created on your book page.
2. To insert a link, select the Edit link…
the Object Editor.
button adjacent to the link to parameter in
3. A dialog displaying the Workarea structure will then open. Only the learning content
corresponding to the type of button you have inserted can be selected from this
dialog. Specify the learning content you want by clicking on it and click on OK to
confirm.
The object is now linked to the button and can be selected and opened when viewing the
book page.
Note:
If a button is not linked, a note icon will appear on the button. Create the link as desired. This
icon is only visible from the book page editor screen.
How to customize an icon
Icons for inserted objects automatically have the same Style appearance that was defined for
the book page itself. It is, however, possible to customize an icon with your own image. To do
so, click on the option Image. This can be an existing image file or a screenshot that has not
yet been created.
You can also define an object's icon to be used as default on all the book pages. To do so, go
to Book Page Initialization and insert the icon.
Content overview
You can link to the following learning content with a book page:
Modes
You can incorporate these modes:
122
08 2012

Demo mode

Practice mode

Test mode

Concurrent mode

Quiz
Any lesson mode containing only quiz macros can be selected for this. As a rule, the
recommended mode is Test mode as it does not allow the user to influence the
process in any way.
Book page
You have the facility on your book page to link to another book page.
Book
You have the facility on your book page to link to another book.
Documentation
The Insert documentation command allows you to integrate different documents into your
book page. For example, these can be Word or PowerPoint documents you have created in
your lessons or else files in Excel or PDF format inserted in the Workarea.
Note:
Ensure that linked objects from the Workarea are not also issued when creating an archive.
These are to be selected manually for the archive. You can find further information on this in
the Exporting a book page archive section.
Embed documents
In addition to linking to documents, you can also display them directly on the book page. This
embeds the documents in an IFrame. The documents to be displayed in this way can be in
Word or PowerPoint format as well as HTML files or web pages.
Select the desired function in the toolbar:

Insert Office document

Insert HTML document
08 2012
123
Contents
Once you have selected the corresponding button you will receive the IFrame in which the
desired document is placed. Then use the Source parameter to insert your document. When
inserting the objects, please pay attention to the section on linking to content from the
Workarea.
If you select an Office document you will then be asked in a dialog whether the document is
to be stored or displayed. Now click on Open to integrate the document into the IFrame.
Integrating media files
Various video and audio file formats can be inserted in the book pages. This allows learning
content to be presented in a very diverse way, which can act in support of regular lessons or
else provide further information.
The following formats are at your disposal:

Flash animation

Windows Media Player file

QuickTime file

Audio Object
Note:
Please note that inserting and viewing these media files requires appropriate playback
applications for the format in question to be installed on the authors and users workstations.
These can be downloaded on the Internet from the relevant manufacturers. Consult your
administrator if so required.
Inserting a media file
Insert a media file in your book page as follows:
1. In the book page editor toolbar, select the media format you would like to insert. This
will insert the user interface of the associated playback application.
2. Click on Insert object
of the Source parameter in the object editor.
3. Now click on the media file in the desired format and click on Open.
The media file is now displayed on your book page and can be played back. It will also have
been copied into the book page folder.
Note:
One page with the current settings is displayed by default for inserted media objects. This is
only visible for editing and is hidden during playback.
Individual format settings
There are different settings available in the object editor for the various media formats. You
can edit them after inserting the media file:
124
08 2012

Display controls: (Windows Media Player, QuickTime)
You can use these to view the control bar.

Display status bar: (Windows Media Player)
If this setting is activated, the playback status and file expiration time will be displayed.

Sound channel: (Audio Object)
This parameter determines which channel is used for sound.

Quality: (Flash)
The playback quality of the inserted film can be defined for flash files. This makes it
possible to reduce the file load times. Use the drop-down list to select an appropriate
quality.

Window Mode: (Flash)
Window mode affects the display of the background and the performance when
playing a Flash animation.

Start automatically: (QuickTime, Audio Object)
Activate this parameter if the file playback is to be started automatically after the book
page has been opened. If this setting has been deactivated, the learner needs to start
the media file manually.

Repeat: (QuickTime, Audio Object)
Activate this parameter if the object is meant to start again after being played back.

Scaling technique: (QuickTime)
This parameter modifies the size scaling of the inserted media file. Use the drop-down
list to select an appropriate scaling.
Note:
The audio object itself does not have a control option but is only responsible for playing
audio files. It is thus also an empty object not visible on the book page. You can learn how to
create controls for the audio object in the respective chapter.
Creating a Flash button
Flash buttons are inserted to increase the design options available for book page controls.
This is done using the Flash animation object. You can do this both by inserting Flash files
containing predefined links as well as Flash files to which a link in the book page has been
assigned.
This is how you create a Flash button:
1. Insert a Flash object using insert Flash animation and select a Flash file. Please also
note the section on integrating media files.
2. Then select the Edit link... button in the parameter Link to.
Note:
Assign only one link in the book page editor to the Flash button if the Flash film does not
already contain a link assigned to it when it was created in a Flash animation application.
3. You can now use the dialog box to select an item of content in your Workarea or
specify an external link in the Available area. Confirm the dialog by clicking on OK.
Flash buttons can only be inserted in a book page and linked to one at a time.
08 2012
125
Contents
Modeling business processes
You can create models for business processes using the BPM object. The versatility of
creation supports complex models at several process levels.
A BPM object represents a process step here while the combination of several BPM objects
represents the entire process. You can use the Connection Object to combine process steps
in the form of arrows and visualize their sequence.
Creating processes
If you want to create a process manually, proceed as follows:
Structure of a process step
A process is comprised of BPM objects that are connected with arrows. You can use text
boxes to insert the actions and information necessary for a process step via the arrows.

Process step:
Indicates the name of the process step and is displayed in the main field of the object.

Role:
Indicates the role or function for the process step and is displayed in the lower field of
the object.

Annotation:
Additional annotations for a process step can be entered in the respective field. The
annotation is displayed by clicking the icon in the object.
Icon: Bubble

Link to:
A link to another book page to access more in-depth information. For example, a
process can be created as an overview with more in-depth process steps on other
book pages.
Icon: Arrow

Attachment:
Documents, projects, book pages or files can be linked by the attachment. Up to 10
attachments can be defined. When opened via the icon, a menu is displayed with all
attachments and the selected attachment then opened in a new window.
Icon: Paper clip
The option Open link in new window allows you to define whether the attachment
should open in the same or in a new window. The window‟s appearance can be
defined under New Window Properties.
The content that is displayed via an icon can be accessed by clicking the icon.
Tip:
The icons used for the BPM object are found in the respective book page style. If you want
to use icons other than the standard icons, they are to be replaced in the respective folder.
Make sure to keep the names and size of the icons.
Design of a process step

Text Style Role:
The design of the text and background for the role can be set in the Text Style Role
area.

Design:
The background color of the field for the process name and the border of the entire
object can be changed in the area Design.
126
08 2012
Connecting objects
The inserted BPM objects can be connected using a
connection object and the process direction shown using arrows. A path can be created with
an arrow here. This can be either a simple line or a complex structure with several path
items.
How to define an arrow
An arrow object can be customized as follows:

Arrow color
This value defines the arrow's color. The Select color... option can be used to define
an appropriate value.

Thickness
This value allows you to define the arrow's thickness. The value is given in pixels.

Arrow head 1 & 2
There are several different types of arrow heads to choose from.
How to position a path point
There are path points at the beginning and end of an arrow that allow you to adjust its length
and direction. Click on one of the points and drag and drop it to the desired position on the
book page.
Creating complex paths
Process structures don't usually just go in a straight line but are much more complex. You
can use the connection object to create paths with several path points and corners. Keep in
mind that the paths can only be aligned horizontally or vertically here. The number of path
points is also limited to 10.
Inserting a path point:
1. Press and hold the Shift key.
2. Then click the mouse on the point where you want to add the new point.
3. Drag this point to the position you want.
Removing a path point:
1. Press and hold the Alt key.
2. Then click the mouse on the point where you want to remove the point.
Keep in mind that only points at the end or beginning may be removed.
Object editing
Various parameters and functions are available for the inserted objects, which you can use to
edit the design and positioning of individual and multiple objects.
Editing parameters
There are various parameters available in the object Editor for editing objects. These depend
on the object in question:

Name:
A name is automatically allocated to each object when it is inserted into the book. The
name is customizable and its purpose is for internal use. The name will appear in the
list of objects and when actions are assigned to it.
08 2012
127
Contents

Background Color:
This value can be used to define an object's background color. The Select color...
option can be used to define an appropriate value.

Border:
Defines the width of the border. The value is defined in pixels. If no border is to be
displayed, the value is to be set to &quot;0&quot;.

Border Color:
This parameter determines the color of an object's border. The Select color...
function can be used to define a corresponding value in the RGB or HSV color space
or as a hexadecimal value. Ensure that you have previously specified a width for the
border so that it is actually displayed.

Padding:
The parameter Padding defines the internal spacing between the border and the text
or image. The value is defined in pixels.

Scrolling Text (text field, active surface):
When this setting is enabled, text that is inserted will be displayed as scrolling text on
the book page. The scroll movement goes from right to left.
Formatting texts (Area: Text Style Defaults)

Font:
The Parameter identifies the text font. The default setting for this is Arial.

Font Size:
This parameter defines the font size. The value is defined in pixels.

Font Color:
This value can be used to define an object's text color. The Select color...
option
can be used to define a corresponding value in the RGB or HSV color space or as a
hexadecimal value.

Alignment:
This parameter determines the alignment of the text in the text field. The default
setting for this is left. The alignments right and center are also available in the dropdown list.

Vertical Orientation:
This setting defines the vertical orientation of text. The text orientation is set by default
to Top.
Advanced functions
The subcategory Position offers various functions for positioning an object, modifying its size
and defining its behavior:

Left / Top:
Defines the position, measured from the lefthand edge of the book page to the
lefthand edge of the object as well as from the upper edge of the book page to the
upper edge of the object.
An object can be precisely positioned on the book page by altering the values. The
values are defined in pixels

Width / Height:
These values specify the selected object's dimensions and can be customized
accordingly. The values are defined in pixels
128
08 2012

Locked:
This setting can be used to prevent objects from being dragged and dropped on the
book page. This requires the setting to be activated.

Hidden:
The parameter defines whether an object is to be displayed or not. Should you not
wish to display an object on the page then the parameter is to be deactivated.

Layer:
This parameter specifies the level on which an object is located on the book page.
The background constitutes level 0, all succeeding objects increase incrementally
from one. The assignment of a level to an object is determined by the sequence in
which the objects were inserted on the page.
If objects are overlapping in the book page view, you can determine which of these
objects should be located in the topmost position. Do so by entering a value that is
higher than that of the superimposed object.
Alternatively, you can move an object in the object list to the desired level. This
depicts how the objects are arranged on the layers.
The option Documentation allows you to export your book pages as documentation.

Show in documentation:
Activate this option for an object if you would like the object to be added automatically
to your documentation. This option is activated by default. Deactivate this option if you
do not wish to have an object appear in the documentation.
New window properties
If the link destination is opened in a new window, you can define the way it is displayed in
subcategory Properties of the new Window. The following parameters can be set:
Position
The values Top and Left are used to determine the distance of the new window from the top
and left hand margin of the screen area. The values are stated in pixels.
Size
The values Width and Height are used to define the size of the new window. The values are
stated in pixels.
The parameter Full screen defines whether the window is to be opened in full screen view.
This requires the setting to be activated.
The parameter Resizable defines whether the window can be scaled or whether the defined
size is to be retained. Scaling requires the parameter to be activated.
Layout
You can have the following elements of the browser window displayed in the new window. To
do so, activate the relevant setting:

Location bar
08 2012
129
Contents

Menu bar

Scroll bars

Status bar

Tool bar
Duplicate object
You can use the Duplicate function to duplicate an inserted object. Settings and shortcuts
activated in this object are retained and can be reused.
Select the object and click on the Duplicate button in the toolbar. The duplicate is placed
directly above the object and can then be positioned and edited on the book page.
Using guides
Guides can be used to allow elements to be positioned and aligned with precision. You can
use them, for example, to create design grids by drawing the guides on an empty book page
then using this as a template for creating the remaining book pages of your book.
Guides can be drawn both horizontally and vertically. The following buttons are available in
the tool bar for inserting the guides

Insert Vertical Guide

Insert Horizontal Guide
Once a guide has been inserted, the sizing handle can be used to move it on the book page
using drag&drop. Clicking on the sizing handle displays the guide. If another object is
selected, the guide is deselected.
An object is aligned with the guide by moving it on the book page. When it is on a level with
the guide, the line appears gray and the object is automatically positioned level with it.
Note:
In order to ensure that objects are properly aligned when dragging & dropping, you can
activate the Snap-in-place options for objects from the central configuration dialog. The
settings can be found under Application -> Book page editor.
Aligning objects
If you have positioned a number of objects on your book page, you can arrange these on one
line. The following functions are available to you here as a result of which the objects can be
arranged on the edge in question:

Left align

Top align

Right align

Bottom align
130
08 2012
These functions require a reference object to be selected on which the other objects will align
themselves. Select the reference object and then click on the objects to be aligned while
holding the Ctrl button depressed. You can then select the desired action in the toolbar.
Customizing object dimensions
To obtain uniform objects, you can align their dimensions with those of a reference object:

Same width

Same height

Same size
To this end, select a reference object with which the other objects will align themselves.
Select the reference object and then click on the objects to be aligned while holding the Ctrl
button depressed. You can then select the desired action in the toolbar.
Arranging objects
The same spacing can be assigned to objects to arrange them in a consistent horizontal or
vertical plane. To do so you must first align the objects horizontally or vertically on one line.
Select at least three objects to be arranged. This is required as two reference objects define
a spacing with which other objects align themselves.
Select the objects by clicking on them or draw a selection mask by clicking and holding the
mouse button. Then click on the button of the function you want.
Arrange objects horizontally

Equal horizontal distribution:
The spacing between the first object and the second is used as a template for
subsequent objects and customized.

Distribute horizontally:
The first and last object retain their position. The objects in between share the space
so as to maintain equal horizontal spacing.
Arrange objects vertically

Equal vertical distribution::
The spacing between the first object and the second is used as a template for
subsequent objects and customized.

Distribute vertically:
The first and last object retain their position. The objects in between share the space
so as to maintain equal vertical spacing.
Changing the level of objects
If an object is concealed by another object in the view, you can modify the level of the object
in question. Select the desired object and then click on one of the options.
08 2012
131
Contents
If you would like to change an object's level by one position, select the following functions:

Forward one level

Backward one level
If you would like to place the object on the first or last level of all of the objects, then select
the following function:

In the foreground

In the background
Alternatively, you can move an object in the object list to the desired level. This depicts how
the objects are arranged on the layers.
Actions and effects on book pages
Incorporating multimedia and interactive elements by adding actions and effects will turn your
book pages into a didactically enhanced learning environment. You can choose from a wide
variety of special effects to highlight specific topics and objects that are sure to capture and
retain the learner‟s attention. By doing so, you will help your users better focus on the
important items that should be learned, and you will simultaneously promote sustainable
learning by creating and fostering an enjoyable, interactive learning environment in which the
user can explore, discover and retain new information.
Object actions can be used to add interactive effects to individual objects. These actions can
be triggered manually by the user or can be configured to run automatically. In addition, with
special object actions, you can use actions to define and control certain effects.
Object actions
You can define actions for book page objects in order to trigger the behavior of an entire
book's or a book page‟s display, such as having objects automatically appear on the book
page or jumping to the next page. Object actions give authors greater flexibility in creating
interactive lessons.
The actions can be defined in the Object Editor, in which you will find an area that is also
called Actions. Specific actions are displayed for each object that can be used in conjunction
with them in book pages.
The components of an object action
An object action consists of an executable action, an object that should be affected via this
action, and the behavior to be triggered. The available actions and behaviors depend on the
type of object and can be used in a variety of ways. You will find more information on this
topic below (see An Overview of the Actions and An Overview of the Behaviors).
The following is an example of how to insert an action into an Image object :
On Click > Text > Show
When the user clicks on the image, the Text object that was selected will appear.
Multiple behaviors assigned to one action
You can assign as many behaviors to one individual action as you would like. To trigger
multiple behaviors, simply click on the plus icon next to the dropdown box. This allows you,
for example, to fade objects in and out. You can remove a behavior by clicking on the minus
icon next to the dropdown box.
The following section will give you an overview of the variety of object actions that are
available for enhancing your book pages and will describe specific use cases.
132
08 2012
How to fade objects in and out
A fade over effect can be used to naturally and smoothly fade objects in and out. The
following behaviors can be assigned to certain types of objects to obtain the desired effect:

Fade in

Fade out

Fade toggle
Timing fade effects
There is a Fade in/Fade out subcategory in the editor where you can define the exact length
of time the effect should take place for each object. The values are calculated in seconds.

Fade in duration

Fade out duration
Controlling audio with actions
Actions can be assigned to individual buttons in order to control an Audio object. You can
customize the functions to suit your specific needs. For example, you can define objects, e.g.,
an image or a text field, to be used as a button. When the user clicks on the image or text
button, you can define the button in such a way so that the corresponding audio file will
automatically play.
Tip:
In the case where an Audio object should be controlled via a button, we recommend that you
disable the Audio object‟s setting Start automatically. This will allow the user to interact with
the learning content and start the audio at the appropriate/desired time (e.g., by clicking on a
play button). Moreover, you should give your objects unique names upon inserting them into
your book pages in order to create transparency and facilitate selecting and assigning them
when creating your learning content.
For more information, refer to the sections An Overview of Actions and An Overview of
Behaviors.
Control actions
To create an object to control an audio file, such as an image, proceed as follows:
1. Insert and position your Image object to be used for the button. (More detailed
information on objects is provided in a further section in this document.)
2. From the subcategory Actions, you can define the specific actions that your Image
object should execute.
1. From the first dropdown list, select the Audio object that should be used for the
action, e.g., On Click. This will automatically create a link to the Audio object.
2. From the second dropdown list, you can define the behavior, e.g., Play. You will
find a variety of audio behaviors listed here.
3. You can now repeat these steps for any additional buttons that you would like to add.
Actions in an Audio object
Under the subcategory Actions, Audio objects can be used in combination with various object
actions to control the audio file.
For example, a button can be defined to switch back and forth between two different actions
by clicking on it in order to control the audio file, just like with the standard mute/unmute or
08 2012
133
Contents
play/pause buttons. This changeover can be defined by inserting a second Image object and
positioning this on top of the original image and then defining the image to fade in and out
accordingly. The following is an example of how to create an Audio object for play/pause:

On play
> image “pause” > show
> image “play” > fade out

On pause
> image “play” > show
> image “Pause” > fade out
To display or minimize the full list of behaviors to choose from for an action, click on the plus
and minus icons and the list will appear.
Overview of the actions
The following is an overview of the object actions that are available, including which book
page objects each one is compatible with.
Action
Object
After Loading
Page
On Click
Page, Block Arrow, Image, Text,
Active Area, BPM Object, Buttons
for content from the workarea
On Mouse RollOver
Block Arrow, Image, Text, Active
Area, BPM Object, Buttons for
content from the workarea
On Mouse RollOut
Block Arrow, Image, Text, Active
Area, BPM Object, Buttons for
content from the workarea
When Showing
Block Arrow, Image, Text, Active
Area, BPM Object, Buttons for
content from the workarea, Bubble
When Hiding
Block Arrow, Image, Text, Active
Area, BPM Object, Buttons for
content from the workarea, Bubble
After Timeout
Time Control
On Start
Animation
After Animation
Animation
On Play
Audio Object
On Pause
Audio Object
On Stop
Audio Object
On Mute
Audio Object
On Unmute
Audio Object
On Volume Change
Audio Object
134
08 2012
Overview of the behaviors
The following is an overview of the various behaviors that can be assigned to an action,
including which book page objects are compatible with each action.
Behavior
Object
Show
Block Arrow, Bubble, Image, Text,
Active Area, Placeholder
Hide
Block Arrow, Bubble, Image, Text,
Active Area, Placeholder
Toggle
Block Arrow, Bubble, Image, Text,
Active Area, Placeholder
Fade In
Block Arrow, Image, Text, Active
Area, Placeholder
Fade Out
Block Arrow, Image, Text, Active
Area, Placeholder
Fade Toggle
Block Arrow, Image, Text, Active
Area, Placeholder
View Link
Image, Active Area, Buttons for
content from the workarea
Next
Page
Previous
Page
Start
Time Control, Animation
Stop
Audio Object, Time Control,
Animation
Activate 1-10
Object Selection
Play
Audio Object
Pause
Audio Object
Repeat
Audio Object
Mute
Audio Object
Unmute
Audio Object
Toggle mute
Audio Object
Set repeat
Audio Object
Unset repeat
Audio Object
Toggle repeat
Audio Object
Set autostart
Audio Object
Unset autostart
Audio Object
Toggle autostart
Audio Object
Volume up
Audio Object
Volume down
Audio Object
08 2012
135
Contents
How to create effects and animation
Action objects can be used to add special effects and animation to your learning content to
create motivating and interactive presentations for the learners. The action objects are found
in the book page editor. Besides the basic actions that are available, you can define more
complex actions for an object. You can influence an action‟s behavior by configuring its
settings to suit your individual needs. The objects in this case are “blank”, only serving as a
definition for the actions and do not contain any content, such as text or images.
Tip:
Before creating an action object, you should become familiar with how actions work so that
you can take advantage of their versatility.
How to modify objects and their behaviors
The following action objects are available in the book page editor:

Animation

Time Control

Object Selection
The following settings are available for these three objects:

Change position and size

Fade in/Fade out
Use cases
Action objects can be used in combination with additional book page objects, giving you a
wide variety of use cases and plenty of room for your own creativity. The following examples
will give you an idea of how action objects can be used:
Animation
Animations can be used to creatively highlight specific pieces of information. For example:

To attract the learner‟s focus to a certain image, this image can be defined so that its
size automatically increases when the book page is displayed.

Several objects can be grouped together and displayed in a smaller format to save
space. The user can then individually click on the images to zoom in on them. In this
way, the user can concentrate more on each individual image and the respective
learning material as needed.

Mouse rollovers and rollouts can be used to add effects to text and important
information to enhance the learning experience. The original state of the text will then
be automatically restored.
Time Control
The Time Control allows you to define how long the action should take place:

You can use the Time control with images to create an automatic slide show in which
the images automatically fade in and out.

You can sequentially start various animations to create complex processes and
visualizations.

The gradual fading in and out of text allows you to optimally visualize a sequence of
information. Such animated text is perfect for accompanying audio text, for example.
136
08 2012
Object Selection
The Object Selection is ideal for sequentially selecting multiple objects. For example, an
Object selection can be used:

To create image galleries on book pages - the user can then click through the gallery
at his own pace.

For visualizing process workflows in which individual steps can be selected.
Considerations for the creation
When working with action objects, we recommend that you take the following guidelines into
consideration prior to starting the creation process in order to be able to fully take advantage
of their versatile functionality:

Before you begin, we suggest creating a storyboard to help you optimally plan which
behaviors should be assigned to which actions and how the users should interact with
them.

Do not go overboard with the number of effects per page. Try to limit the number so
that the important information is highlighted, while simultaneously ensuring a
transparent and user-friendly look and feel to each page. Simple effects, such as
clicking on objects and automatically having content fade in and out can prove to be
quite useful enhancements to your learning content as long as the page is not
cluttered with so many animations and interactive elements that it would overwhelm
the user.

Always make sure you assign unique names to your objects (under the setting Name).
This will make it easier for you when selecting objects and actions so that you can
quickly find the one you are looking for.

When inserting animations, make sure you know which level the objects are on in
order to avoid accidentally hiding them. On the other hand, when this technique is
intentionally used, you can easily hide specific objects.

Animations that are used repeatedly throughout your book can be predefined on a
book page template to save you time when creating a new book page with the same
animation.
Animation
Animation objects allow you to change the position and size of your animations. The
Animation object actually defines the final size and position for the animation. To adjust the
animation's size, the Animation object can be proportionally scaled in height.
Structure of an animation
The following explains how an animation works:

Initial State
The object to be animated (e.g., an image) is created with the same size and position
as its initial state.
08 2012
137
Contents

Final State
When the animation is activated, the object will change to the size and position of the
Animation object (red rectangle).
Creating an animation
The following is an example of how to create an animation:
1. Create an Image object and position it as desired to serve as the initial position.
2. Insert an Animation object (from the toolbar) and define its properties:
1. Move the Animation object to the desired final position and adjust the frame
size. If the object should be the same size as the image, you can enter the
exact dimensions under Position.
2. Name:
Enter a unique name for the object to facilitate allocating actions at a later time.
3. Target object:
Select the Image object as the target object.
4. Duration:
Here you can define how long the animation should run. The value is calculated
in seconds.
3. The animation can be interactively triggered by the user or defined to run
automatically by assigning actions to the animation. For example:

Action on Click – the user clicks on an Image or Text object to start the
animation

Action after Loading – the animation automatically plays when a book page is
opened

Action after Timeout – a Time control object can be used so that the animation
will automatically play after a defined period of time
For each action, you have to select the Animation object from the first dropdown list,
and the behavior Start from the second dropdown list.
Once you have created your animation, you can test it out by clicking on the Preview button
in the book page editor.
Stopping an animation
In addition to the behavior Start, you can also define the animation to automatically stop.
Simply select the behavior Stop from the list. For example, you can add start and stop
buttons to your animation by inserting and defining Image objects.
Additional options


138
Easing:
Easing effects the time duration of an object, allowing the animation a more effective
and smoother transition. Easing can take place at the beginning, at the end or both.
There are three types to distinguish between:

Quadratic

Cubic

Sine
Action on Start (under Actions):
When an animation starts, another action can be triggered simultaneously. For
example, an additional animation can start, an audio file can play or a Text object can
08 2012
be displayed. This allows you to create relationships between the objects and learning
content can be sequentially structured if desired.

On Stop:
An action can be defined to be executed when an animation stops. In contrast to the
option Action after animation, this allows you to stop the animation at any time,
thereby changing a button‟s behavior, e.g., a button can be defined to continue the
animation.

Action after Animation (under Actions):
Once an action has been completed, another action can be triggered, such as other
animations or automatically jumping to the next page.
To do so, select the desired object and the action to be allocated to it under Settings.

Show Debug Information:
This setting allows an object‟s status information to be displayed while the book page
is playing. This will display additional information on the object‟s action while it is
being executed in test mode to give you more control over the action.
Note:
When using images with transparency, clicking on the transparent area will trigger the
animation. To prevent undesired actions from being performed by the user, we recommend
using images without any transparency.
Tip:
If you would like to re-use an animation that you have already created, you can copy and
insert the respective objects collectively in groups. The objects are automatically recreated
and allocated without requiring any additional post-editing work required.
Time Control
A Time Control object allows you to precisely time your actions. Images can automatically
fade in and out or animations can be combined to create sequences.
To set up a Time Control:
1. First create the object that you would like to start off with. This could be an animation,
an Image object or a similar object.
2. From the toolbar, insert the Time Control object.
3. Next, define the time intervals and the corresponding actions.
To obtain a clear overview of your animation projects, we recommend that you
arrange your objects and actions according to their time control settings in
chronological order.
1. Time:
In this field, you can enter the length of time during which the action should be
carried out. The value is calculated in seconds.
08 2012
139
Contents
Note:
Time values are not automatically combined. If you would like to have multiple actions begin
simultaneously, you have to manually summarize and enter the time values, e.g., 20, 40,
60,...
2. Action after Time-out:
In this field, you can select the action that should be triggered once the defined
period of time has run out.
For example: Image -> Show, Animation -> Start
4. In order to start a Time control, an action has to be triggered by the user. This can be
a button, for example, that starts a series of images. For this example: Actions ->
Action on Click -> Time Control -> Action Start.
Additional options

Show Debug Information:
This setting allows an object‟s status information to be displayed while the book page
is playing. This will display additional information on the object‟s action while it is
being executed in test mode to give you more control over the action.
Object selection
With the help of the Object Selection, you can fade objects in and out, one following another,
which can be triggered by user actions. This allows the user, for example, to click through a
series of images in any preferred order.
To create an Object Selection:
1. Create your Image objects and position them as desired.
2. Set all images to hidden except for the first one that should appear. This allows
images to fade in one by one.
3. From the toolbar, insert the Object Selection and define its properties:
1. Name:
Enter a unique name here so that you can easily identify your object selector when
selecting it from the list at a later time.
2. Object 1-10:
Select the objects in the order in which they should appear, from 1-10.
4. Next, successively select the Image objects in order to assign the Object selection to
the images. Under Actions, you have to define an action for each individual image in
order for it to be able to switch to the next image, e.g., Action on Click. From the first
dropdown list, choose the Object selection and from the second dropdown list, select
Activate 1-10 for each object.
Once you have created your Object selection, you can test it out by clicking on the Preview
button from the book page editor.
Additional options

140
Fade in:
This setting allows you to define a smooth transition effect for objects when they fade
in and out.
08 2012

Show Debug Information:
This setting allows an object‟s status information to be displayed while the book page
is playing. This will display additional information on the object‟s action while it is
being executed in test mode to give you more control over the action.
Global settings for book pages
The standard settings for creating and editing book pages can be defined from the global
configuration dialog box. There are three main global setting categories:

Templates
Templates can be defined for books and book pages and can be used when inserting
new objects. Once the template has been created, you can define its settings here
under Templates.

Book Page Editor
Here you can define the settings for the grid and grid lines in the book page editor as
well as its behavior when positioning objects.

Book Page Fallback Defaults
The fallback default settings can be configured here for book page objects. The
Producer uses these values when the respective setting is deactivated for a particular
object.

Book Page Initialization
Default settings can be defined here for book page objects. In this way, the book page
objects are assigned values that are automatically allocated to them upon creation.
Tip:
To only snap-in objects when necessary, you can temporarily activate this snap-in behavior
by holding down the Ctrl button. The snap-in function overall is to be deactivated in the
settings beforehand and the desired snap-in options activated.
Books and book page view
For the book pages view it is necessary to distinguish whether these pages were inserted in a
book or placed individually. An individual book page is opened in the library view whereas a
book is presented in the book reader.
After they are selected, modes linked on a book page are opened in the trainer.
Note:
If you have inserted media files in a book page, then the corresponding playback application
needs to be installed on the users' workstations so that these files can be displayed.
Books view
Books that have been created are displayed in the book reader. This enables selection of,
and scrolling within, pages. Once a book page has been called, objects in it can then be
launched or opened so that they can be worked through.
When a book is called in the library it is launched directly in the book reader.
Book pages view
Individual book pages are not viewed in the book reader as this is intended for scrolling
through a number of pages.
If you select an individual book page in the library it will be displayed directly in the learning
content view.
08 2012
141
Contents
Book read skin
The way the book reader is rendered can be determined in the Project Explorer when
selecting a book in the Object Editor. A dropdown list box for selecting the style is available to
you in the Skin parameter. This is where you can define an individual design for each book.
Note:
Changing a skin for the book reader doesn‟t changes the style for the book pages located
within the book. You can customize the style for each individual book page in the book page
editor.
Preview in the book page editor
The Preview
function exists in order to be able to view and use a book page during
editing in the book page editor in the same way it is displayed to the student. If you select this
in the toolbar, you will be able to test your book page's objects. These will then behave in the
same way as they do when being presented in the library or book reader.
In order to be able then to resume editing the objects, deactivate the button.
Supported file formats in book pages
Media plug-in
Supported file formats
Page Sound
*.mp3, *wmv, *mp3
Flash
*.swf
Media Player
*.avi, *.mpeg, *.mpg, *.wmv
QuickTime
*.qt, *.mov
Image
*.gif, *.jpg, *.png, *.bmp, *.jpeg
Document
*.doc, *.docx, *.rtf, *.ppt, *.pptx *.xls, *.xlsx,
*.pdf, *.html, *.htm
Exporting a book page archive
In order to output a book page or an entire book as an archive it is necessary to output the
linked Workarea modes and documents on the book page as well as the objects are not
integrated as links in the book page folder.
Note:
Image and media files inserted in a page are filed directly in the book folder and thus
outputted together with an archive.
The archive is exported via the Project Explorer:
5. Before you output an archive, make a note of which modes and documents you have
linked in which book page. This will subsequently allow you to select them correctly.
6. In the menu Workarea -> Administration select the function Export archive...
142
08 2012
7. A dialog will open with an overview of your Workarea's resources and learning
content. Deactivate the entire structure so that you can then individually select the
objects you require. To do this, deactivate the Workarea selection.
8. Select the book page or book you would like to export.
9. Then select the modes and documents you have linked on your book page.
10. Then click on OK.
11. Now specify a name and create your archive using Save.
After importing the archive into a Workarea, you can insert the objects that belong together
into a group to keep track of the structure.
Translating books using translation templates
So that the books you have created can be used in multiple languages, you can issue
translation templates for translating the texts. Translation templates can be created in Word
or XLIFF format.
When a book is selected in the Project Explorer, the complete text of all the book pages
contained in the book can be issued in a translation template. The following texts will be
included:

Book and book page title

Descriptive texts

Text fields

Text boxes
Note:
No translation templates can be issued for individual book pages. Translation templates can
only be issued for all of a book's book pages.
Translation templates are issued and translations imported in the Project Explorer via the
Tools -> Language/Version Change option. Select the following function here:

Export Translatable... to issue the texts to be translated

Import Translation... for importing the translated texts
In this connection please also pay attention to the following section Translating a lesson
using translation templates.
08 2012
143
Contents
Text Unit
The text unit structure object makes it possible for you to integrate text components into your
structure. Using different typifications, a text unit offers various options for incorporating
additional information and content into your structure and using them for various output
formats.
In its structure, the text unit object is based on the DITA method for representing information
structures and displays the topic defined in the DITA specifications. In addition to the
standard set of the types mentioned in the specifications, other custom types, however, have
been added to primarily target possible needs in structural creation and administration of
didactic content. To better differentiate between DITA and custom typifications, there are
different graphical symbols. The following types are available for a text unit:


DITA standard

General

Task

Concept

Reference
Custom types

Subsystem

Component

Function

Requirement

Problem

Error

Task
Integration in the Project Explorer
The text unit object can be integrated anywhere in the structure keeping in mind the
possibilities of other structure objects. Similar to the Group object, any structure object can be
stored under a text unit.
Structure
Unlike, for example, projects, a text unit does not have any individual object content.
Information is displayed solely in the areas shown in the Project Editor: Title (1), Short
description (2) and Description (3) and structurally by selecting a document type. The
functions of the HTML editor are available for making entries in the areas Short description
144
08 2012
(2) and Description (3) .
You can structure you information more systematically because there is a distinction made
between the input areas Short description (2) and Description (3). If you use the optional
Short description box, you can improve user orientation within the information structure with
much shorter texts that summarize the topic. The short description can be used here
exclusively for orientation purposes (example A) or simultaneously function as a thematic
introduction with a smooth transition to the detailed description (example B).
Example A
Example B
Title
Formatting in documents
Formatting in documents
Short description
This chapter shows you how
formatting is applied to
document areas and
paragraphs.
It's happened to everyone.
An important document has
to be read quickly and its
content captured. However,
the document is poorly
formatted or not formatted at
all - logical correlations
disappear because there are
no paragraphs or headings
while a lack of visual
information in the body text
makes comprehension
difficult for the brain.
08 2012
145
Contents
Description
Example A
Example B
You can use formatting to
systematically highlight the
main content of your
document for the reader and
structure the document so
that it is easier to read and
capture.....
Well-formatted documents
are easier to read and their
message is clearer for the
reader. But what do you need
to keep in mind if you want to
format and structure a
document so that it is easy to
read? The lessons shown in
this area...
Content-based separation through typification
The advantage of differentiating among different types of text units is that content can be
represented more flexibly. It is important here that the content-based logic of a type is
reflected in the text. This is particularly true when the text units created should conform to the
DITA specifications. In addition, you are relatively free in determining the content
specifications for a type but should make sure that you maintain a logic that you applied once
for a type to all of the same types in the workarea to guarantee the highest level of
consistency.
Example:
A chapter "Formatting in documents" would have the types necessary for the chapter in this
case. It would have, at a minimum, however, the General type in its branch structure. The
types in the chapter could be structured, for example, as follows:
Type
Input field
Text
General
Title
Formatting in documents
Short description
It's happened to everyone.
An important document has
to be read quickly and its
content captured. However,
the document is poorly
formatted or not formatted at
all - logical correlations
disappear because there are
no paragraphs or headings
while a lack of visual
information in the body text
makes comprehension
difficult for the brain.
Description
Well-formatted documents
are easier to read and their
message is clearer for the
reader. But what do you need
to keep in mind if you want to
format and structure a
document so that it is easy to
read? The lessons shown in
this area...
Title
Formatting in documents
Task
146
08 2012
Type
Concept
Reference
Input field
Text
Short description
Create a formatted, easy to
read document.
Description
Create a document that uses
the formatting described and
is thus very easy to read. The
document has to be at least
20 pages long with 30
chapters. Pay special
attention to creating header
levels to maintain a wellstructured content overview.
Title
Formatting in documents
Short description
On today's job market, being
able to format documents is a
must.
Description
In an increasingly digitalized
working world, employees
who were not previously
affected are now being
required to create structured
documents This affects the
building superintendent who
has to design notices for the
bulletin board as well as the
carpenter who wants to
present his work.
Title
Formatting in documents
Short description
A lot of information has
already been published about
formatting.
Description
Formatting documents has
already been discussed and
analyzed in many places. In
the following section, you can
find a selection of
recommended books and
websites:

...

...
Sample applications
Because there are so many different ways to use text units, you can adapt them individually
to your structure and your content model. The following examples show several ways that
text units can be used:
08 2012
147
Contents
Additional information levels
You can use text units to provide your learners with additional extensive information in the
form of comments (2) or several chapters of extended documentation (1) for the structure
display in the trainer. This makes it possible for you to convey processes and processrelevant knowledge/understanding without having to make extensive changes to lesson
contents.
Separating information levels
Using individual DITA text units, you can create an additional level in your structure of
dynamic learning content that, even though it follows the structural model, is independent
content-wise and displays different information for another target group.
This way, your structure can contain, for example, the didactic content for your learners as
well as instructions and information for other groups of people. After all content is complete,
you can publish the learning content as usual but also simultaneously generate a document
about the steps to be followed, send it to all department heads in your organization, thus
making it possible for them to answer individual questions.
148
08 2012
Combining information levels
The two previous examples can also be combined to show or update additional information
for learners (2) and other target groups (1) in a structure.
Customizing referenced content
Referencing makes it possible for you to always use the same object in different branch
structures. The advantage here is that content only has to be updated once. If you now,
however, want to address different learning groups using different branch structures, you
have to clear the previous reference to import different descriptions or instructions into the
original references. Using text units makes it possible to add branch-specific instructions and
problems without having to dispense with the convenient added value of object referencing.
Object/topic-related display of information
Text units can also be used for additional object or branch-related information by means of
additional documentation types when creating the learning content. You can find three
examples of how to use text units as "notes" in the following section.
1. Exact definition of requirements for the recording at the respective location
2. Instructions for dealing with the respective component
3. Goals agreed in the curriculum
08 2012
149
Contents
150
08 2012
Documentation
Aside from the creation of lessons, Producer will also enable the creation of process
documentation.
The formats Word, PDF, PowerPoint and HTML documents are supported.
File formats for Office
The documents are generated in these formats depending on which version of Microsoft
Office is installed:

Office 2003: doc/ppt

Office 2007 and 2010: docx/pptx
If you want to create the documents in the old format, activate the following option:

for single and master documents in the central configuration dialog (menu Tools
-> Settings...) under Standard -> Settings -> Documentation: Use old Office
formats

for the compound document in the dialog when creating the document for Word
with the option: Use old Office format
Prerequisites for PDF documents
The supports PDF documents generated with MS Word versions 2007 and 2010.
While Word 2010 contains the standard settings for generating Word documents in general
with the , for Word 2007, you must first install an additional add-in Microsoft Save as PDF in
order for this feature to work properly. This add-in can be downloaded from Microsoft's official
website.
Basic Principles of Documentation Creation
The content for documenting a process is automatically available once a process has been
recorded in the Producer. Accordingly, the screenshots and texts from the recording macros
inserted in the project during recording are used in the documentation. Furthermore,
recording macros contain documentation parameters and functions which can be used to
modify the content used for the documentation.
Documentation macros are available for creating documents. These are ignored when
playing back a lesson in the trainer.
The single source principle is fundamental to document creation. Changes and additions to
the project only have to be made directly in the project. The manual revision of an external
source, such as a separate Word document for instance, is not necessary.
Editing the content of the documentation later directly in Producer seems at first complicated
and unusual, (i.e.: the addition of a page break or subheading), yet it has the advantage of
only having to be recreated when a documentation is updated (i.e.: a change in the
application interface or a change in the layout). That means that one click of the mouse is all
it takes to align the lesson and documentation. This also means however, that changes made
directly in the Word documentation will be overwritten when the documentation is next
generated.
By separating content and design, you have the option of displaying the content differently in
the generated documentation. This is already the case when you create the documentation in
one of the various output formats: Word, PowerPoint or HTML. Changing the documentation
configuration parameters and regenerating the document also has an influence on the end
result.
08 2012
151
Contents
Working in the Documentation View
The documentation view is a WYSIWYG editor for editing documentation in simulations. A
document is displayed in HTML format so that you can preview the content and structure.
This editor allows you to quickly and easily make any necessary changes to your
documentation.
The documentation view only displays project content that can be inserted into
documentation. Content that is stored in another location other than in the project editor, such
as description text, will not be displayed here.
Opening the Documentation View
The documentation view can be enabled from the toolbar and used instead of the topic view.
Alternatively, you can open this from the menu View -> Components -> Documentation View.
Editing documentation
The following editing options are available from the documentation view:

Hide macros for output into documentation:
Click on Hide in Documentation so that the selected macro will not appear in the
document. In order to display a hidden macro, click on Show in Documentation.

Adjusting highlights:
Macro highlights can be changed individually. Such changes have no effect on
documentation; the highlights for the simulation remain unchanged.

Adjusting text:
Text that can be edited is highlighted in yellow when the macro is selected. To make
modifications to text, double-click on the desired text from the HTML editor.
Note:
Editing text in the documentation view can affect the different modes. Only make changes
here when you are sure that the changes should also be applied to the other modes.
Creating a Single Document
After a process has been recorded and the lesson edited, lesson documentation can be
generated. At least one New Page Macro and one Recording Macro describing an action
should be available for this purpose for capturing a result in the document.
You also have the option of designing your documentation using documentation macros. This
allows you to incorporate additional information.
To create a single document, proceed as follows:
1. In the Project Editor, open the project for which you would like to create a single
document.
2. If you want to generate a Word document, you should first define a Headings Level for
organizing the headings. This is to be set up in the documentation settings under
Standard -> Settings -> Documentation -> Headings.
3. Commence generation by means of the Documentation menu or in the toolbar by
means of the corresponding document type button:

152
Generate Word document
There are various document types available for Word documents. Select from
the menu the type you would like to create.
08 2012

Generate PDF document
There are various document types available for PDF documents. Select from
the menu the type you would like to create.

Generate HTML document
There are various document types available for HTML documents. Select from
the menu the type you would like to create.

Generate PowerPoint document
The generated document is now displayed in the corresponding project in the Project
Explorer and can be launched from that location.
Tip:
Various settings can be made which affect the document display when the individual
document is created. You can find more information in the section on configuring the
individual document.
Note:
In order to generate a PDF document, please first refer to the prerequisites listed in the
section above on How to generate a PDF document.
Structure of individual documents
The structure of a document follows a predefined model. To individually customize a
document, you can define the structure and content to be inserted in the main settings.
A settings page where you can define the fragments and their layout is available for every
document type and for the PowerPoint document in the area Default -> Settings:
Basic structure
The options determine the basic structure of the document:

Description:
Inserts the description of the project.

Title:
Inserts the title of the project.

Process Flow:
Inserts the process flow for the project.

Table of contents:
A drop-down list appears here where you can determine the depth of the table of
contents.

Project content:
The actual content of the project is inserted with this fragment.

Book page:
A book page can be inserted in the documentation with this function. A book page can
be selected using Edit link....

Text unit:
A text unit can be inserted in the documentation with this function. A text unit can be
selected using Edit link...
08 2012
153
Contents

Revision entry:
This selection defines where the content from the Revision entry macro is to be
placed. The respective macro has to be inserted into the project beforehand.

Input values:
This selection defines where the content from the Input values macro is to be placed.
The respective macro has to be inserted into the project beforehand.

Blank Line & Break:
The fragment makes it possible to separate fragments through spacing and thus
provide considerably more structure.

Page break

Small Blank Line

Medium Blank Line

Large Blank Line
Other options
Settings for specifying the selected content can be made in the various areas. Not all areas
are available for all documentation types in this case.

Project content:
The new page macros can be deactivated and the headers defined in the settings.

Included Objects:
The title can be displayed for a book page or text unit that has been added in the
settings.

Quiz:
Activates the output of quiz macros in documents and the display of solutions.

Input values:
The respective table columns can be defined here in line with the Input values macro.

Revision History:
The display of the Revision entry macro within the project content or as a fragment
can be changed in the settings. The sort order of the revision history can also be
defined.
Types of Single Documents
There are different document types available for Word, PDF and HTML documents. The
types are:

Standard
This document is not intended for a special use case and shows all project information
incl. documentation macros (i.e. such as step names, actions, advice, screenshots)
that are not special prepared.

Job-Help
The document supplies a short and clearly structured project overview with topic
names and actions to be carried out. The document does not contain any
screenshots, documentation or explanation macros and is thus ideally suited for
practical use of an application.
154
08 2012

Training Document
When generating a training manual, all relevant project information, including
documentation macros (e.g., topic name, actions, notes, screenshots…), will be
automatically exported and formatted accordingly. This type of documentation is ideal
for supplementing training materials for learning processes.

Test Sheet
This document adds a table that is suitable for testing the user's experience. It is
possible to make an inquiry about actions, inputs and the expected results of the
respective topic. Also, the tutor has additional fields for evaluation of the deliverables.

Work Document
This document supports the editing of lessons and gives an overview about project
details, its execution and content. To do so, topics, screenshots, scores, task
description, notes and the project language are read out.

HPQC Document
The Producer allows you to create documentation for the HP quality center.
Recorded processes can be defined as a quality standard and imported into the HP
quality center.
The macro for the HPQC heading information can be inserted into the document,
which contains a directory path and a description. The document contains a table with
the individual actions listed as well as a column for manually editing the results.

Process Guide
This document explains processes in a clear and simplified manner. Its user-friendly
and visually appealing layout makes it easy for the users to follow. There are three
columns which display the following information:


What there is to do – Text in demo bubble

What there is to see – screenshot with highlights

What there is to say – explanations, macros for notes and tips, etc.
BPP Document
The BPP document (Business Process Procedure) allows you to use recorded
lessons for describing and illustrating business processes in an SAP environment in
greater detail. A unique macro structure is created with specific instructions for the
documentation‟s properties, modifications, headings, and descriptions. It is also
possible to create a customized table to illustrate the process steps.

Audit & Compliance Document
The purpose of this document is to verify and ensure compliancy with certifications
and audits. Its “generic” format can be customized to meet your specific requirements.
A unique macro structure is created with specific instructions for the documentation‟s
properties, modifications, headings and descriptions. It is also possible to create a
customized table to illustrate the process steps.
08 2012
155
Contents
Editing of Documentations
Documentations can be edited on different ways:

Insert of documentations macros

Central settings

Macro-specific settings in the recorded macros
Single Document Configuration
There are numerous configuration parameters that influence the appearance of
documentation. These are summarized in the area Standard -> Settings -> Documentation of
the Central Configuration Dialog.
Creation Possibilities with Documentation Macros
Aside from the macros that are solely used for the recording of lessons, there are also
additional documentation-specific macros. These are necessary for the recording of
additional information useful for the later creation of documentation.
You may select the documentation macro you desire in the menu Documentation -> Insert
Documentation Macro. It is inserted after the selected macro in the Producer macro list.
This enables you to insert further headlines, text sections, screenshots or page breaks.
The description of the individual Documentation macros and their functions can be found in
the corresponding section of this manual.
Creation Possibilities with Macro Parameters
All Recording macros which carry out an action as well as the New Page macro, have the
parameter Show in Documentation in the Subcategory Documentation. This option is
activated after the recording. In the event that you do not want to use a screenshot or an
action in the documentation, this option may be switched off.
156
08 2012
Examples of use

If the standard text from the lesson is not to be used in a step, such as entering the
password, but the password rules be set out in detail for example, then the Input Text
option in Show in Documentation option may be deactivated for the Input Text macro
recorded for this action and the documentation macro Highlight inserted. The
divergent text can then be captured there.

When an application is being recorded, it makes no sense using a dedicated
screenshot for each step. Instead you should depict actions that fundamentally relate
to the same input screen on the same page on a single screenshot in the
documentation. In this case only the first screenshot in the corresponding New Page
macro would remain with the option Show in Documentation in any New Page macros
that may follow being deactivated. All actions are always automatically displayed on
the last preceding screenshot in which the option Show in Documentation is activated.
The Screenshot Position parameter, which can be accessed via the expanded view, applies
to the screenshot in the last preceding New Page macro. This defines where the markers are
to be positioned on the screenshot.
If a marker is not correctly positioned on the screenshot, then its parameter does not have to
be directly edited; it can be revised using the function Document Highlight in the macro editor.
The dimensions and cropping of screenshots can be adjusted in the New Page macro. The
original screenshot remains unaffected. The part of the image used in the documentation can
be revised as follows:

The displayed image size in the documentation can be changed by adjusting the
corresponding parameter.

The image layout can be adjusted using the function Manual Crop.

The Topic Name parameter is used as the heading before the screenshot. If no
heading is to be inserted before a page the option As Heading in Documentation must
be unchecked.
Process Flow
The process flow provides a visualized overview of the recorded lesson, its topics and
sequence. It clearly shows the most important components of a topic in a brief overview.
The process flow helps orient learners about which action steps take place at what point in
the process when working with a document.
The Process Flow can be generated for Word documentation and, if needs be, can also be
edited at a later date. A Process Flow is not generated for the Job-Help Word file because
this already contains a tabular overview of the working steps.
Design of the Process Flow
Each topic is shown in its own individual field in the Process Flow. These are split into three
areas:
1. the title of the step in question (highlighted grey)
2. the mini-screenshot from the New Page macro highlighting the action
3. the Field Name of the Recording Macros contained in the topic
If a Recording Macro does not have a Field Name, the Producer will automatically insert the
relevant Field-Icon.
08 2012
157
Contents
The individual fields of the topics are linked to one another with arrows, which make clear the
progression. Should there be a page break, a bending arrow is inserted instead of a straight
one.
Note:
The picture files in the Field-Icon are not scaled when being shown in the process flow. For
this reason you should make sure that these pictures are not too large. This can be the case
when recording text fields in Word.
Here, it is recommended that you enter a Field Name so that it is shown in place of the
Field-Icons in the process flow.
The start and end macros of the Form Structure or from branches as well as the Start Lesson
and End Lesson macros are not shown, but only the topics.
Documentations Macros contained within a lesson are also not inserted into the Process
Flow, as they are only used in the design of the documentation and are not relevant to the
process as a whole.
Picture files of the arrows
The arrows of the Process Flow can be found in the resource Configurations/Styles. Both the
straight arrow (arrow.bmp) and the curved arrow (arrow-long.bmp) are located here.
These graphics can also be replaced with other pictures from your own library. You should
ensure that the names and sizes of the picture files remain the same.
Settings for the Process Flow
The Process Flow can be shown individually for the documentation of a lesson. The setting is
made in the central configuration dialog as a fragment for the respective documentation type.
You can determine the position for the process flow here.
Every topic of a lesson is shown in a Process Flow. Topics can also be individually
deactivated for output if they are not to be displayed in the Process Flow.
In this case, select the corresponding New Page macro. Then deactivate the Show in
Process setting in the Subcategory Documentation of the Macro Editor.
158
08 2012
Heading Levels
When generating a Master Document, the project and group structure in the Project Explorer
is transferred to the document and displayed as headings and a table of contents.
In order to render the numbering of the various headings correctly, the outline level of the
project and topic titles is to be defined for each project before being generated as a single
document. To this end, a Heading level is defined. The required level is to be decided from
the level of the project in the Project Explorer‟s tree structure.
This value needs to be stipulated as the Producer does not differentiate the level at which
the project resides nor whether it is located in a main or sub folder when issuing single
documents. Moreover, it is possible that only certain projects are issued and that the heading
levels vary as a result. This may be the case, for example, if only the projects in a
subordinate group folder are considered. The Heading levels can make this explicit.
Depending on the Heading level, the project and topic titles are assigned to the relevant
heading template in the Word template when a document is issued. These are predefined for
the various numberings and outline levels.
Setting the Heading Level
The Header Level is to be defined in the master settings dialog in the Header Level
parameter. You can find this parameter under Default -> Settings in the individual settings for
every documentation type in the Project content area.
An outline comprising the lesson title and its topics is created in a single document. This
yields a two-tier outline structure.
An outline structure comprising the project title on the first heading level and its topics on the
second level requires the heading setting to be set to 1.
08 2012
159
Contents
Example:
1 Project name
1.1 Topic name
1.2 Topic name
1.3...
The value 1 is to be used as a matter of course if a single document is not intended for
inclusion in a Master Document.
Headers for book documentation
When generating a book document, the header level can be set directly in the settings dialog.
Books are organized according to their chapters and book pages. For more information, see
also the section on book documentation.
Single Documents for Creating a Master Document
When generating a Master Document, the Producer issues the group and project structure
from Project Explorer. A three-tier outline structure is formed comprising the group, lesson
and topic titles.
Example:
1 Group name
1.1 Project name
1.1.1 Topic name
1.1.2 Topic name
1.1.3...
1.2 Project name
1.2.1 Topic name
1.2.2 ...
Defining the outline structure
Before work can be begun on generating the Master Document, the group and project
structure needs to be defined in the Project Explorer. This is critical for the layout of the
Master Document.
The heading levels given to the single documents can be inferred from the structure.
Levels within Project Explorer Table of Contents with heading level
160
08 2012
Generating single documents
Each lesson envisaged for the Master Document is then issued as a single document. Define
the relevant Heading level for each lesson before proceeding with generation.

A project that is assigned to a group located on the first level is to be found on the
second level. So that the headings in the single document began at that level, the
setting must be set to 2.

If a project that resides within a subgroup in the Project Explorer is to be issued, then
the Heading level should be set to 3. The numbering then starts on level 3.

For greater project or group depth, the Heading level setting needs to be increased
accordingly by the appropriate depth.

If a project is not assigned to any group or if it resides at main folder level, then the
Heading level is to be set to 1.
Note:
The headings are capped at 9 in the document templates as only nine levels of numbering
can be set up in Word.
The highest setting for a Heading level should therefore be 8. That means that the project
titles receive a level 8 number and the topics, level 9.
Please therefore ensure that your project structure has a depth not exceeding eight levels.
Note:
For more information on configuring the headers in book documentation, please see the
section on book documentation.
Process documents
In the Producer different documentation types are available for process documentation
according to certain criteria. These documents are:
08 2012
161
Contents

BPP document
The BPP document (Business Process Procedure) allows generating files of recorded
tutorials for a more detailed description and demonstration of business processes.

Audit & Compliance document
Generating documentations
The documentation types BPP and Audit & Compliance documents can be generated in
Word, PDF and HTML formats. In order to create one of these documents a certain
procedure is required. This should be done as follows:
1. Set up configurations in the central settings of the documentation area
2. Insert macros for the documentation type
3. Edit inserted documentation macros
4. Define ROC value and description in the recording macros
5. Generate the documentation
Central Settings
Specific settings can be defined in the central configuration dialogue for the documentation
types BPP and Audit & Compliance document. There is an additional sub-section called
Action table available with the respective relevant settings for this purpose. Select the
settings page for the respective type in the Default -> Settings area.
Documentation template
A separate documentation template is available for the particular documentation type. The
template can be defined in the Word documentation template parameter.
The documentation templates contain predefined document properties which are read out
when the particular documentation macro is inserted. Furthermore, they contain particular
titles and descriptions according to the document type.
Displaying screenshots
The Show New Page Macros option allows you to set up the screenshots display in the New
page macros.
If the option is activated you are provided with a screenshot and a table below containing all
available actions of the learning step.
If the option is deactivated, a serial table containing the actions is displayed. The single steps
are numbered consecutively.
Defining the action table
The structure and content of the table can be defined to insert the explanations of the actions.
A total of 5 columns can be defined as follows:

Action Table
This option defines whether the actions are displayed as a table or as text only using
a step by step approach. If the 'table' setting is selected you can define its columns
and content.

Table Width
Defines the width of the Action Table in pixels.

Column 1 - 5: Content
This defines the column for the information that should be extracted from the
recording macro and displayed in the documentation. When generating a table, the
162
08 2012
column name will be displayed in the respective project language based on the
content glossary.
The column can also have a title allocated to it, which can be entered manually in the
document.

Content
Explanation
Hide Column
With this selection the column is hidden.
Numbering
Creates a sequential numbering of the
actions.
Text from Demo bubble / Practice
bubble
Texts from theDemo or Practice bubbles of
the actions
Field name
Contains the field names of the actions
Value
Contains the entered value from the macros
Text entry, Single Text entry, Single choice.
ROC
Contains the ROC value which was defined
for the entry macros.
Description
Contains the description which was defined
for the entry macros.
Result, OK, Comment, Reference
Empty columns for manual creation of
contents.
Column 1 - 5: Width (%)
Defines the percentage width of the column to the total width of the table.
Documentation macros
Predefined documentation macros can be inserted for the documentation types BPP and
Audit & Compliance documentation. This is done in the documentation -> Insert BPP or Audit
& Compliance macros menu. The macros are inserted automatically during the first and last
learning step.
The documentation macros are predefined default settings and can be customized after
insertion.
BPP macro structure
In order to create a BPP document the particular BPP macros can be inserted in the project
via the Documentation -> Insert BPP macros function.
The structure of the BPP macros is as follows:

Macro Document properties

Macro Revision entry

Macros Description with titles.


Overview (1st level title)

Purpose (2nd level title)

Business process overview (2nd level title)

Input data (2nd level title)
Macro Input Values
08 2012
163
Contents

Macro Description with title Procedural Steps (1st level) for the actual cycle.
The process follows afterwards.

Title and text for scenarios associated with the process: Results / Related Scenarios
(in the last topic)
In the macros with titles the titles and texts can be modified or texts can be added.
Audit & Compliance macro structure
In order to create an Audit & Compliance document the particular Audit & Compliance
macros can be inserted in the project via the Documentation -> Insert Audit & Compliance
macros function.
The structure of the Audit & Compliance macros is as follows:

Macro Document properties

Macro Revision entry

Macro Pagination

Macros Description with titles (1st level title). Explanations can be inserted.

Purpose

Scope

References

Definitions

Document contents

Steps
Predefined document properties
The Document properties macro allows allocating predefined variables of a document
template to a particular content.
The predefined variables define the macro when the BPP or Audit & Compliance macros are
inserted automatically.
The template for the particular document type within the Producer contains the following
variables:
BPP document properties
Name
Value
_bpp_id
ID
_bpp_owner
Author
_bpp_status
State
_bpp_description
Description
164
08 2012
Audit & Compliance document properties
Name
Value
_ac_title
Title
_ac_docnumber
Document number
_ac_versionnumber
Version number
_ac_effectivedate
Effective date
_ac_requestedby
Requesting person requested by
_ac_approvedby
Approving person approved by
Assigning contents to variables
In the document properties macro the field Name and the field Value are available for a
variable. Insert the content that is to be generated into the Value field.
Settings in simulation macros
For some simulation macros which require an entry or a selection from the user additional
information for the action tables of the BPP and Audit & Compliance documents can be
added. These settings can be found in the documentation subcategory of the macro editor for
the Input Text, Select Single and Radio/Checkbox macros.
In order to display the description and the ROC value in the action table a column has to be
defined for it in the central settings.
The following settings are available:

ROC (Required/Optional/Conditional)
The value defines the necessity of an action, whether it is required (R), optional (O) or
conditioned by something (C). The particular type can be selected in the choice box of
the option and the character R, O or C is displayed accordingly in the table.

Description
Additional information about a macro can be provided in the description field.
Generating a documentation
The documentation types BPP and Audit & Compliance documents can be generated in
Word, PDF and HTML formats.
Note:
Please note when generating a HTML document the variables of the Document properties
macro cannot be executed in HTML as these field functions are Word specific.
Generating central document
The process documentations, as known from default documents, can also be integrated into
a central document in Word or PDF format. When a central document is generated using the
project explorer the particular document type can be selected and generated.
08 2012
165
Contents
Note:
The Document properties can only be output for single documents as they relate to the
corresponding document templates. Avoid the use of this macro in a master document for
this reason.
Creating a Master Document
The various documents in the entire workarea or a specific selection of them can be merged
into a master document. This document is generated from within the Project Explorer view in
the Producer and can be created in Word or PDF format.
Preparations for creating a master document
The following preparations must be made for creating a master document:

Before you generate the master document, make sure you have created your
individual documents with the right header level so that the outline of the documents
in the master document can be properly displayed.

If you want to insert the documents into the master document without descriptions and
titles, this information must be deactivated already when you generate the individual
documents.

You can change the format template for the master document in the master settings
under Documentation.

You can deactivate documents that you don't want to include in the master document
using filters or the Hide function.
Generating the master document
To create a master document, proceed as follows:
1. You can create a master document for either the entire workarea or an individual
selection. To do this, the respective group is to be selected in the tree structure or
defined in the dialog for creating the master document.

To create a master document for the entire workarea, the Content group at the
top of the tree structure of the Project Explorer must be selected.

To create a master document for a special group, this is to be selected in the
tree structure. Then only the individual documents within the group are
included.
2. Select the Documentation -> Generate Master Document menu.
3. A dialog opens where you can define your master document. Make the settings you
want.
You can find explanations about the dialog in the section on settings for the master
document.
4. Click the Ok button to confirm the dialog. The document is generated.
After creation, the master document is inserted at the bottom of the tree structure and
can be opened from there.
Please see the respective section for information on displaying the master document in Word.
166
08 2012
Settings for the master document
The following settings can be made in the dialog for generating a master document.

Starts from:
This selection determines the point in the tree structure starting at which the
documents are to be output to the master document. This lets you create a master
document for a specific group. The object selected in the tree structure is
automatically displayed in this process.
If another starting point is to be selected, this can be done using Edit link... A dialog
opens where an object can be defined in the tree structure. Confirm this by clicking
Ok.

Documentation type:
This selection determines the documentation type for the master document.
Please keep in mind that book documentation is always generated as standard
documentation.

Documentation format:
This selection defines the format the master document is to be created in: Word, PDF
or both formats

Insert individual documents:
Which content is to be output to the master document can be defined in this area.


Projects

Books

Book Pages

Other Documents
The setting adds Word documents imported to the workarea to the master
document.
Include Titles and Descriptions:
Whether titles and descriptions are to be output for the content can be defined in this
area. They are not included if this option is deactivated. With the exception of the
project, the title and the description are always inserted together for other objects
because fragments can be defined for projects.

Project title

Project description

Group

Book

Book Page

Text Unit
Note:
If you don't want to insert titles and descriptions, these must be deactivated already when
the individual documents are created. For more information, see also the sections on
configuring the individual documents and book documentation.
08 2012
167
Contents
Displaying the Master Document in Word
Once the Master Document has been opened in Word, it is displayed with its cover page,
table of contents and linked single documents.
Displaying single documents
When generating the Master Document, the single documents are not attached directly but
shown as a link. You can have these shown in the Master Document:
1. To do so, select the Outline view
to be able to continue editing the document. The
Show Document option is also to be activated for Word version 2007 and higher.
2. Then click on the Expand subdocuments button
in the toolbar.
Attaching single documents
The presentation of displayed single documents is not stored in the Master Document. You
will get the links back when you reopen the document. Further editing steps are required in
order to obtain a complete document incorporating the single documents.
Note:
It is recommended that you only proceed with incorporation once the editing of your Master
Document has been fully completed and it is ready for publication. This will avoid duplication
of effort in the event of any additions where you will have to repeat these steps.
1. Activate the Outline view and click the Expand subdocuments button (see above).
2. You will find a document icon
in front of each single document. Click on it to select
the associated single document. This process will only ever allow you to select one
document.
3. Now click on the Remove sub document button
now been incorporated.
in the toolbar. The document has
4. Repeat items 2 and 3 for each additional single document. You can then switch to the
Print preview
(or another view).
After the single documents have been incorporated, you should resave the document so that
the original Master Document is still available.
Note:
Please note that these explanations refer to Microsoft Word 2003 – functionality may differ
from that of other Word versions. For further information, please press F1 for Word Help.
Generating a compound Document
A compound document summarizes all of the content from one workarea into one document.
Whereas a centralized document only contains content from projects and groups, a
compound document also includes the following possibilities:

Groups

Text units

Projects
168
08 2012

Books

Book pages
Book pages can only be added in combination with books or groups; book pages
cannot be extracted individually.
To generate a compound Document:
1. Select the start object.
2. Go to Documentation -> Generate Compound Document... A settings dialog box will
appear.
3. Make any adjustments to the settings for your documentation here.
Also refer to the section on Settings for compound documents.
4. Confirm your changes by clicking on Ok. The documentation will now be generated
automatically.
Heading Level
The heading level is automatically set in the document based on the structure level of your
learning content. The single documents for projects are generated independently and the
headings are automatically inserted. The heading level option therefore does not have any
effect on single documents.
Note:
When generating documentation, please note that not all types of objects can be exported
into the documentation. Audio, video and animated objects cannot be used in this case.
Settings for compound documents
There are a variety of settings available for compound documents to assist you in defining the
content to be generated. The settings displayed here depend on the type of content that is
available for the selected object. In general, for every object type you can define whether it
should be included in the document and how it should be displayed.
Start from
This defines the starting point for generating the document. The selected object will be
displayed here. You can select a different object by clicking on Edit link…
Groups

Insert groups

Group description
Text units

Name

Description
Projects

Insert projects

Documentation type
The description for single documents corresponds to the fragments and cannot be disabled
from a central location.
08 2012
169
Contents
Books

Insert books

Book description

Book page description

Book page format
Book pages

Maximum image width

Links

Background image
Output format
This defines the format for your document.

HTML document

Word document

PDF document
Output options

Short description

Use old Office format
When this option is activated, documents are still generated in the doc format when
Office 2007/2010 is installed. If the option is deactivated, the docx format is created.

Template
This setting defines the template to be used for the Word and PDF documents.

Include Hidden Objects
When this option is enabled, hidden documents will be added to the compound
document. When this option is disabled, hidden documents will be ignored and will not
appear in the documentation.
Selecting document templates
The document templates for Word and PowerPoint documents are filed in the Producer's
Standard Macroset. These document templates for generating your documentation are
selected from the central configuration dialog. This is where you can define the templates for
the single and master document in Word and for the PowerPoint document as well. The
English versions are specified as the default setting.
To select the document templates, proceed as follows:
1. Open the master configuration dialog in the Tools menu and select the documents
you want in the area Default -> Settings:
170

Individual documents
The format templates can be individually set for every documentation type in
the respective area.
Word Document Template
PPT Document Template

Master document
The setting can be made in the documentation area for the master document.
Word Master Document Template
08 2012
2. Click on the Select file…
replace.
button next to the document template you would like to
3. You will see your Workarea tree structure displayed in the open dialog. Now select an
available template in the Configuration/Stils -> Standard resource and confirm by
clicking on OK.
4. In the central configuration dialog, click on the Apply button to activate the inserted
template.
Note:
The format template can be directly defined for book documents in the respective setting
dialog when generating a document. For more information, see also the section on book
documentation.
Integrating one's own templates
If you would like to insert a document template of your own, you can use the document
template selection dialog described above to insert it in the Workarea. To do so, select the
Import button in the dialog. This will open the file selection dialog box. Select the desired file
and click on Open. The template will now be integrated in the standard macroset and can be
used for generating documentation.
If you want to remove a template from the workarea, click the Delete button.
Special documentation fonts
If you would like to generate documentation using a special font for Asian character sets then
you may need to install this font on a temporary basis to avoid errors when displaying the
document.
To do so, contact your administrator as administrator rights and your Windows system
installation CD are required for the installation.
To proceed with the installation, go to Start -> Settings-> System control -> Regional and
language options in your operating system. Select the Languages tab and select the desired
option under Additional language support.
After clicking on OK the font will be installed from your Windows installation CD. You will find
additional information on the topic in your operating system's help.
08 2012
171
Contents
Publication
For learning content to be played in the browser, the PC concerned must be capable of
certain settings. For information on these, read System Requirements in this manual.
Local Playback
The generation of a lesson corresponds to local publication. As part of generation, all data
necessary for publication are created and filed in the Workarea file. The lesson can then be
viewed directly in the trainer. To do so, select a mode for your project in the Project Explorer
and then click on the command Playback with trainer.
The lesson can also be called up by clicking twice on the lesson in the Project Explorer or
directly from the Workarea as follows:
Example:
C:\workarea\projects\example1\example1_demo.html
To open the library belonging to the Workarea, simply click on the library Preview button in
the Project Explorer of Producer. The library can also be opened directly in the browser via
the following path:
Example:
C:\workarea\index.html
Publishing a Workarea
You can publish a Workarea to give your learners the files required for playing back the
course content.
Besides the content to be published, a Workarea contains files which are not required for
playing back after publication and which unnecessarily increase the size of the published
Workarea. For this reason, a copy containing only the files required for playing is created in a
target directory that you need to specify whenever you publish a Workarea.
Publishing can be in different formats and be stored directly on a server or a file share. In
addition to this, you can specify rules for publication to avoid the need to reenter details when
republishing.
Attention:
Never publish a Workarea in an existing or currently opened Workarea. The files will be
overwritten by the publishing process. Always create a new folder for publishing. Publish
only in an existing Workarea if you are updating and make sure the folder is not in use.
How to prepare for publishing
Before publishing a workarea, the lesson content's tree structure must be defined in the same
way as it should be used for the publication. Besides the ability to move and categorize
objects within the structure, you can also use the Filter and the function Hide to more
precisely define the content to be published. This will allow you to hide any content that
should not be published.
To read more on how to use the Filter, please refer to the section on How to Use the filter in
the workarea.
172
08 2012
Note:
Make sure that the filtered and hidden objects will not be needed for displaying your learning
content. For example, linked projects or a group for managing image objects should be
made visible before publishing your content.
Publishing a workarea directly
This is how to publish a workarea:
1. Launch the Publish directly... function via the Workarea -> Publish menu.
2. When you execute the function, a dialog box appears and you can configure the
following settings:
1. When you are done, enter the target directory for the workarea to be published
in the Target Directory field. You can use the Browse for folder function to
change this.
2. Then select the publication Type. The following types are available: Standard
and EXE
3. If you select the EXE format, you can additionally specify a File name.
4. You can specify the target directory for the workarea in the Prefix field. This is
necessary when publishing navigations.
3. Click OK to return to the overview of objects in the workarea.
1. Now select the objects you want to publish.
2. If you selected the Standard type, you can publish objects incrementally. In
other words you can add objects to a published workspace, remove or update
objects. Refer to the corresponding section for more details.
3. Additionally, you can define a Start object for your publication. This is the first
object displayed when the publication is accessed; it could be an introductory
page in a book, for example.
4. Click Ok to complete the publication.
Publishing references
Referenced resources and objects can be verified so that only files that are really necessary
are exported for publishing purposes. This significantly optimizes the file size of a publication
and also prevents necessary references from being forgotten. When publishing an existing
publication, references that are no longer used are removed.
Before checking your references, you must first enable all the content to be published and
disable all the resources. Once this has been done, click on Check References in order to
activate all the necessary references in the tree structure.
Root Object
This setting defines the root object for the publication. This is important in order to be able to
define the very first object when publishing sub-trees. This setting automatically adjusts to the
selection. The object can be changed manually by clicking on Edit link...
Publication types
08 2012
173
Contents
A variety of publication types are available for publishing workarea or individual objects.
These are:

Standard
This is the standard format for publishing workarea. This creates HTML and
JavaScript files in a folder structure, which can be played back using the trainer.
Incremental publishing is available for the Standard format; this enables adding,
removing and updating of objects in the published content.

EXE
The EXE format is for executable files and supports direct execution of course content
without the trainer. The whole workarea is stored in a file; this facilitates an exchange
of files.
You can additionally define a filename for this format.
Incremental publishing in standard format
Incremental publishing in Standard format gives you the option of adding, updating or
removing objects to or in a workarea. Functions for identifying and manipulating the status of
objects in the published workarea are available in the Publish Directly... dialog.
To the left of an object you will see a button that lets you set the action for the publication
event. Clicking the button changes the setting. The current icon setting defines the action for
the object when you publish the workarea. Additionally, you can select the status in the
context menu.
Icons states
Icon
Setting
Explanation
Add
Adds an object to the published workarea on publication.
Update
Updates an object available in a published workarea.
Remove
Removes an object from the published workarea.
Omit
Omits the objects in the object group for this publication.
Equals
Indicates that the object in the workarea is identical to the
object in the published workarea.
Different states
The icon shows that the object group contains objects with
different states.
Keep
This option lets you choose to keep an object. This is the
case if with update candidates that you do not wish to
overwrite.
When you select an object, the following information is available for it:

Status - Gives you the current status of the objects in the workspace compared to the
published workarea.

Suggestion - Proposes a possible course of action for publishing the object.

Setting Shows the currently selected action for publishing the object.
Note:
Note that incremental publishing can only be performed for the Standard format. The reason
for this is that this process creates a folder structure which can be modified, whereas the
individual files are created from scratch when publishing EXE format.
174
08 2012
Publishing Navigations
The ability to launch navigations from a web server or file-share requires you to specify the
location where the Workarea is held when publishing. The Prefix text field is available to you
in the Direct publication dialog for this purpose. Enter the URL and Workarea name in this
field.
Web server example: http://yourwebserver/[...]/Workarea
File-Share example: …\Workarea\index.html
Note:
Please note that following publication the Workarea storage location is to be retained with
the navigations as otherwise the defined prefix will no longer match the storage location. If
you would like to file a Workarea in a different location then it needs to be republished with a
modified prefix.
Creating publishing rules
Publication rules let you simplify multiple publication of workarea as you only need to make
entries once. To publish you then simply select the rule and specify the content for fast and
direct publication.
Editing publication rules
The Workarea -> Publish -> Edit Publishing Rules... menu item lets you create various rules
for publication. The dialog box for creating publication rules is as follows:

On the left side the existing publishing rules are listed. New entries can be generated
by clicking on Add. Clicking on Remove deletes an entry.

On the right-hand side you are presented with the parameters for editing the rules
selected in the list. This is where you can edit the following parameters:

Name:
Defines the name by which the rule is known.

Target directory:
Specifies the storage location to which the Workarea is to be published. You
can use Search for folder to select a folder as the storage location.

Filter:
The option menu allows you to select an existing filter to be applied to the
publication. To create filters please refer to the section Using filters in the
Workarea.

Type:
The option menu allows you to select a type for publication of the Workarea.
The publication rules created here can then be executed by selecting the ruleset name in the
Workarea -> Publish menu. Selecting a publication rule takes you directly to the publication
dialog where you can select the objects for the workarea.
Directly publishing individual objects
Objects can also be individually output so that you don't have to publish the entire workarea.
This is done via the context menu when an object is selected in the tree structure of the
Project Explorer.
1. Select Publish... in the menu.
08 2012
175
Contents
2. A dialog now opens where you can define the Target folder. You can define this using
the Select folder... button.
3. Click Ok to confirm the dialog.
Note:
Please keep in mind that only the selected object is published. Resources that are part of
the object are not included. If you want to publish these as well, you have to publish the
entire workarea.
Publication on a Server
To publish your teaching material on a web server (e.g. Apache or IIS), the entire published
Workarea is copied to the desired location on the server or the publishing is done directly into
the target directory of the desired server. By calling up the corresponding HTML file, a lesson
can be viewed in a particular mode directly in the browser:
Example:
http://yourwebserver/[...]/workarea/projects/example/example_demo.html
To open a library belonging to a particular Workarea, simply call up the parent directory in
the browser:
Example:
http://yourwebserver/[...]/workarea/
Publication on an Intranet Share
To publish your teaching material on the file share of an Intranet server, the entire published
Workarea is copied to the desired location on the server or the publishing is done directly into
the target directory of the desired server. By calling up the corresponding HTML file, a lesson
can be viewed in a particular mode directly in the browser:
Example:
\\yourserver\example_share\[...]\workarea\projects\example1\example1_demo.html
To open a library belonging to a particular Workarea, simply call up the parent directory in
the browser:
Example:
\\yourserver\example_share\[...]\workarea\index.html
Note:
In connection with the use of anti-virus software that is active when accessing an Intranet
share, scanning all the files necessary for playing back a lesson (as the files are called up)
can result in a considerable delay between calling up a lesson and the start of that lesson. It
is therefore recommended that lessons always be published on a web server, if possible.
Defining a start link
The Start Link function provides you with an easy way of generating a link to learning content
or the library. The Start Link can then be attached to a webpage, for example, which can be
used to launch learning content. This is necessary if a Workarea was published on a web
server or file share.
The Start Link can be defined for all objects available in the Project Explorer. If you link a
176
08 2012
group, the library is opened when the group is launched to display the associated content.
An object's Start Link is displayed in the Object Editor's Start Link parameter when an object
is selected.
Note:
To publish navigations to a web server you are required to use the Prefix function in the
dialog for direct publication. This option is the means by which the Workarea storage
location is assigned to the navigation files so that the Navigator can find and launch the
navigations when called.
General settings
When selecting the Workarea in the Project Explorer tree structure, a general rule can be
defined in the Start Links subcategory which is then used for creating all start links.

Prefix
The prefix defines a general URL or path preceding the Start Link. This can be the link
to a web page, for example.

Use prefix
Activating this option uses the defined prefix to generate the start link.

Use dialog
With this option activated, a dialog box for defining the link is opened when you select
Copy Start Link function in an object's context menu. If the option is deactivated, the
link is copied directly and generated using the general criteria previously defined.
Selecting an object's start link
To copy the Start Link for an object, right click in the Project explorer tree structure to open
the context menu for this object. Now select the Copy Start Link … function.

If prior to this the Use dialog option was deactivated, the Start Link will be copied
directly.

If prior to this the Use dialog option was activated, a dialog box will open in which you
can define the prefix. The link is then copied by clicking on Copy.
The copy of the Start Link can now be inserted in the desired file and made available to
users.
Generate SCORM/AICC
The Producer supports the export of entire Workareas to SCORM and AICC. They can then
be imported into a corresponding Learning Management System (LMS). To find out which
standard your LMS supports and which conditions must be met, ask the person in your IT
department who is responsible for administering your system.
SCORM export
To import a lesson in a SCORM LMS, a compliant IMS manifest can be produced or exported
from Producer, as the case may be.
In order to make the export possible:

necessary preparations have to be made and

certain configuration settings need to be adapted
The output is executed by the export dialog. It is opened by clicking Generate SCORM/AICC
in the Project Explorer toolbar.
08 2012
177
Contents
In addition to the SCORM file, a ZIP archive of the Workarea for direct import into the LMS is
created. This maintains the corresponding resources necessary for the projects.
Workarea content exports depend on the group selection. If you want to expert all the content
in a workarea, select the Content group and then open the Create SCORM/AICC dialog. If
you only want to export a specific group, only select this group.
AICC export
If you choose instead to create an AICC file, the files lms.au, lms.crs, lms.cst and lms.des are
all stored in the parent directory of the Workarea. Under certain circumstances, they will need
to be adapted to the target system. The information as to whether a file name prefix or an
AICC Creator needs to be specified should be requested from the responsible system
administrator of the target LMS.
Export preparation for SCORM
To export a SCORM file, the output structure of the lessons needs to be defined exactly the
way it is supposed to be displayed in the LMS later on. It is possible to export multiple groups
and projects as well as single projects as SCORM packages.
The structure can be influenced in the Project Explorer by Category Filter or Hide in order to
filter or hide projects and groups that are not wanted.
Note:
Make sure that a text for the Task Description is entered for Test mode. It can be edited for
the first screen of the lesson in the macro Start Lesson.
Configuration settings for SCORM export
The SCORM export configuration can be changed via the menu Tools -> Options…
The configuration settings can be adapted in trainer Configuration within the left tree
structure.
Disable extern browser window
The selection fullscreen in window properties must be always deactivated and disabled in
order to prevent the preview of a separate window. The browser window will be regulated by
the corresponding LMS. This selection ensures smooth communication between the lessons
and the LMS.
178
08 2012
Attention:
Make sure that you always deactivate the fullscreen parameter in the trainer settings for
Scorm export to enable trouble-free communication with the LMS being used.
The selection is divided into Global, Global (mode) and Lesson (mode):

The option Global can be used if all selected groups and projects in the Workarea are
to be included in SCORM export.

The option Global (mode) can be used if all selected groups and projects are intended
to be exported only for certain mode.

If certain modes are intended to be exported for a project, the option Lesson offers
specific settings. This option is shown only in the settings within the project view.
trainer settings for direct coupling of all modes to LMS
Each individual mode can be edited using the corresponding scorm lms setting. These
parameters define point scoring in the LMS.
The following settings for the forward parameter should be checked:
For the Demo mode and Concurrent mode:
Since points are not scored for either one of modes, changes to these settings do not need to
be made.
For the Practice mode and Test mode:
collected_points,possible_points,result_scaled,mastery_score

collected_points: Points achieved

possible_points: Maximum number of points achievable

result_scaled: Achieved proportion (0..1) of the maximum points possible

mastery_score: Number of points required to pass examination
In addition, a number of different settings for the Test mode and Practice mode are available
which influence the application of the lessons in the LMS. The following describes the
settings used most often.
08 2012
179
Contents

Specify whether the results should be entered as points or as a percentage. To do so,
activate the corresponding settings.use_original_max - as points
score_percentage_100 - as percent

score_precision – This value specifies how many places after the decimal point
should be taken into account during the point analysis. Here the
score_percentage_100 and use_original_max parameters must be deactivated. The
standard value is '3'.

only_one_commit – If this parameter has been activated, the points will only be
declared at the end of the lesson.

bookmark_with_score – If this parameter has been activated, the number of points
achieved prior to that will be shown at the position at which a lesson was interrupted
and a bookmark set. If a lesson is restarted at this position, the point count will
continue from here.
Please refer to the corresponding dialog for additional settings.
Selecting a format
Various formats are available for outputting a SCORM file; you can select them via the
Version dropdown menu for the export process. When you select a version, the IMS
manifesto of the corresponding format is generated to reflect the requirements. The versions
are:

SCORM 1.2

SCORM 2004

SAVE 1.0 (SCORM 1.2)
For the SAVE 1.0 format, also refer to the Use of SAVE 1.0 section.
XML Schema Files
In some cases, the LMS may need XML schema definitions, which are to be integrated into
the SCORM packet. These contain SCORM-specific structure definitions for XML documents
and require correctly formatted files in order to work properly.

180
Include XML schema files
All XML schema files will be added to the SCORM packet.
08 2012

Insert schemaLocations
Attributes will be integrated into the IMS Manifest file as a reference to the XML
schema files.
Exporting books & documentation
Exporting books
Besides exporting lessons you also have the ability to export books and book pages. To allow
you to do so, use the Options for Books menu, which lets you enable book output.
The available options define the structure for representation in LMS. This gives you the ability
to reduce complex books to a specific structural level, or display the whole book as an object.
This setting has no influence on the book view in the book reader; navigation in the complete
book structure is thus possible.
Options for exporting books:

Ignore books
This selection does not export the books available in the Workarea into the SCORM
manifesto.

Show only books
This section displays the books as book objects in LMS.

Show books and direct sub objects
This option displays the books in LMS on two levels, i.e. a book and its subordinate
objects on the first level.

Show books and all sub objects
This selection displays the complete structure of the books with all subordinate
objects.
Exporting documentation
When activated, the option With Documentation allows you to import project documentation
that has already been created into an LMS.
Lesson start parameters
In the generated manifest file each lesson is given its own URL from which it can then be
accessed.
In some LMS opening a lesson is done using the query string of the URL. Here,
corresponding attributes are necessary. The Lesson start parameters selection can be used
to set which attributes are to be considered when entering the starting URL. These are
entered in the IMS manifest according to the selection.
The following settings are available:

Only"href“ attribute
Standard setting for SCORM export.

"href“"and "parameters" attributes
A parameter attribute is inserted additionally which contains the query string. This
starts with a question mark "?".

"href" and "parameters" (no „?‟ delimiter)
A parameter attribute is inserted additionally which contains the query string.
Using SAVE 1.0
SAVE 1.0 (SCORM-Anwendung in der Versicherungswirtschaft - Using SCORM in the
Insurance Industry) is a recommendation for defining universal meta information and
08 2012
181
Contents
variables in the IMS Manifest. These specifications are an extension of the SCORM 1.2
standard.
Note:
Please note that SAVE 1.0 can only be used for the SCORM 1.2 standard and not for
SCORM 2004.
The purpose of meta information defined using SAVE 1.0 is to define learning content issued
in a SCORM package in greater detail. The following parameters can be defined in the
Producer:
Meta information
Description
title
Object name.
description
Object description - also used for associated modes.
keyword
Defined object search words - these are also used for associated
modes.
version
Version of the resources issued - the value can be amended
manually.
copyright
Definition of a copyright for the issued content. The required
information in the IMS Manifest is Yes or No.
The meta information title, description, keyword for an object can be defined in the Project
Explorer, the meta information version and copyright are available as options in the Create
SCORM/AICC dialog.
Creating options in the SCORM/AICC dialog
SAVE 1.0
Activate the option SAVE 1.0 to issue meta information in the IMS Manifest in accordance
with the SAVE 1.0 specifications.
Copyright:
Activating the Copyright option indicates in the IMS Manifest's meta information whether the
learning content is covered by copyright.
Version:
You can use this parameter to determine which version of your content you are issuing.
Note:
When using the SAVE 1.0 standard you need to take care that this is supported by the LMS
you are using.
Creating a context-sensitive help file
In order to use the context-sensitive help file, you first have to define which specific
information you would like to add to the help file. Linking information according to its contents
allows users to quickly and easily search for and find the specific information they need for
any given situation within the application. e.g. , the current “transaction” (TCODE) or the
“mandant” (MANDT).
All types of information found in a workarea can be linked to the context-sensitive help file
accordingly, such as simulations, navigations, books and documentation.
182
08 2012
Once the context-sensitive help file has been created, it can be integrated directly into the
help menu in your SAP ECC system. The learners can then access this help file and its
contents at any time.
Context configuration
There are two methods for defining the context:

The context-sensitive information can be automatically extracted while recording a
project in the SAP system.

The context–sensitive information can be manually defined under Context setting.
Recording the context in SAP
During the recording, the Producer analyzes the existing SAP environment and extracts the
relevant context information from the system. This information is then displayed in the
Context setting.
The following information can be extracted during the recording:
TCODE, MANDT, DBSYS, DYNPRO, PROGRAM
Note:
For the use of further context parameters please contact your SAP consultant.
Manually define the context
The contextual information can only be extracted automatically while the project is being
recorded. For objects such as books, book pages, groups and documents as well as for
enhancing projects, the context must be configured manually.
The contextual information is entered under the Context setting which can be opened by
clicking on the button Select View under the expanded view of the Object Editor in Project
Explorer. The individual pieces of information contain a description of the type and its
corresponding value, linked via an equal sign. Additional information can be entered in the
field, separated with a comma. For example:
TCODE=SBWP,MANDT=906,DYNPRO=SAPLSINWP
Multiple context parameters will be separated with a vertical bar:
TCODE=SU01|SE80|SE63
Wild cards can also be defined for any contextual information. Wildcards accelerate and
facilitate searching for specific content within the help file. Example of a wildcard:
TCODE=SU*
Note:
The language of the context information depends on the language of learning content and is
defined automatically.
Export of a context file
Once the contextual information has been defined, the next step is to generate a context file.
All the object information to be used for the help file content is entered into a context.html file.
You can export projects for the entire workarea by selecting the first group in the list or for
projects within a specific group.
To export the data, open the menu Workarea, then click on Publish -> Export context file.
Enter the target directory or the URL of the webserver for storing the file. Click on OK to
export the file.
08 2012
183
Contents
Administration in Producer
The following chapters give an introduction to the Workarea and the Centrals Workarea as
soon as to the editing and administration of resources and contents.
The Workarea
The Workarea is the base directory for working with the Producer. It contains all the
necessary files for creating and playing back learning content as well as the actual files of the
learning content that has been created.
Producing learning content always requires one Workarea to be selected.
The Producer automatically creates all the relevant data and directories when a new
Workarea is set up. These files deposited in the Workarea are available via the Project
Explorer's tree structure, which can be used to organize, edit and replace them. The files for
creating and playing back learning content are filed as resources. The learning content is
created as projects and book pages and organized in groups and books.
When selecting the Workarea within the tree structure, the path to the relevant folder is
displayed on the right in the Object Editor. If a Central Workarea was set up on a server, then
this path will be displayed there as well.
Note:
So that lessons can be created and played back free from errors, no alteration to files and
the Workarea directory structure is permitted.
The following sections will give you an overview of the workarea, how it is presented and
used in the Project Explorer and with what objects and how it is set up in the folder structure.
Tree structure design and objects
The objects contained within the Workarea are displayed in the Producer in the Project
Explorer tree structure. This is broken down into the following areas and content:

Workarea
The topmost entry in the tree structure shows the local and Central Workarea
selection.

Resources
List of all of the resources available in a Workarea for organization and editing.
Resource group Resource

Content
The Content group is the base group with all of the Workarea's available
learning content.




184
Group
Project: Simulation Modes
Documents
Project: Context Assistant Mode
Book
Book page
Master document

Text unit

Task
Common
08 2012

Concept

Reference

Subsystem

Component

Function

Request

Problem

Error

Todo

Shortcuts
These objects are shortcuts to objects filed in another location within a tree structure
which allow these objects to be launched directly.

Unreferenced objects
Unreferenced objects are where Workarea objects that are not assigned to any base
group are filed.
The resources
The Resources
area is where you have access to all the Workarea files and settings you
need for creating and playing back learning content. These are broken down into resource
groups each with their own individual resources.
You can use the structure to apply settings for individual resources and exchange resources
when using a Central Workarea.
Resource overview
The table provides you with an overview of the resources available in the workarea:
Resource
(Name of the group folder)
Book styles
(book_style)
Bubble Types
(bubble)
08 2012
Description
Book page and book reader design. The
following types are available for selection:

Metallic

Neutral

Standard
Contains the various bubble files.
The Edit bubble types... button in the Object
Editor can be used to launch the bubble type
editor for editing the bubbles.
185
Contents
Resource
(Name of the group folder)
glossaries
(glossary)
Description
This resource contains text blocks that can be
used in a project‟s playback recording. Here
we differentiate between:

Standard - library, trainer and book
reader

Navigator
You will receive the following functions when
you select the resource group:

New glossary – Setting up a new
glossary. This causes the original
folder to be copied, as a result of
which the standard texts can be
transferred into the new ones.
You will receive the following functions when
you select the resources:
Help
(help)
library styles

Set as default – If a number of
resources are available, this allows
you to determine which one is to be
used.

Open glossary – Opens the dialog for
customizing the texts.
This resource contains the Help files for the
library, trainer and book reader in the
available languages.
This resource contains the files for designing
the library.
(library)
Macrosets
(macroset)
Mouse pointers
(mouse)
trainer panels
(panel)
Popup styles
Contains the macroset files. These are:

Context Assistant

Standard
This resource is where the various mouse
pointers for the mouse simulation are filed.
When selecting a type, you will be shown a
preview of the mouse pointer in question in
the object editor.
This resource contains the trainer bar design.
The default installation contains:

Hidden

Standard
The pop-up style defines the design of the
top-most window in Concurrent mode.
(popup)
186
08 2012
Resource
(Name of the group folder)
Quiz styles
(quiz_style)
Recognition
Description
The design of the quiz user interface and
controls for playback in the trainer is filed in
this resource.
The resource contains the application profiles
for recording the applications.
(recognize)
Content glossaries
(record_glossary)
The glossary contains the bubble text
modules. These can be edited using the Edit
Glossary dialog.
You will receive the following functions when
you select the resource group:

New glossary – Setting up a new
glossary. This causes the original
folder to be copied, as a result of
which the standard texts can be
transferred into the new ones.
If you select a resource, you will receive the
following functions:
Scripts

Set as default – If a number of
resources are available, this allows
you to determine which one is to be
used.

Open glossary – Opens the dialog for
customizing the texts.
The Scripts resource contains all the scripts
that activate special functions.
(script)
Configurations/
Styles
(style)
This resource contains the mode start and
stop pages as well as the Flash page macro
design.
If additional resources were added, the
resource to be used can be defined via the
Set as default function.
The resource also contains the document
templates for generating the Word and
PowerPoint documents.
Task window styles
Test mode task window design.
(task_style)
trainer
(trainer)
08 2012
Contains the trainer configuration files.
Which trainer version is to be used can be
defined in the Object Editor using the Set as
default function.
187
Contents
Managing resources
You can import and update resources and manage them on the central workarea:
Importing Resources
In addition to the already existing resources, you have the ability to import additional
resources into the Workarea as an archive.
1. To do so, click on the Import archive... function in the Workarea -> Administration
menu.
2. Select your archive file in the open dialog. Then click on Open.
3. You will then see the files contained in the archive displayed in a dialog. You can now
select which content is to be imported into your Workarea. Click on OK to import the
selected resources.
4. The import is displayed by a progress dialog. After completion, confirm this with OK.
The imported resource is now available in the relevant resource group in the resource
overview. A number of resources need to be activated for use. Select these in the tree
structure and then click in the Object Editor on Set as default.
Please also pay attention here to the resource overview.
Central Workarea
When using a central workarea, the resources can be managed via the tree structure to make
them available to all authors. Individual authors can then download the resources for their
own local Workarea. A local Workarea's resources can also be transferred to the Central
Workarea and exchanged.
This is done using the context menu when selecting a corresponding resource group or by
means of the Central Workarea menu.
Updating resources
If you have installed a new version of the Producer, you will need to update the standard
installation resources.
By selecting the Resources group in the tree view, you can launch the Workarea
configuration dialog via the Edit configuration... button.
Tree structure learning content
Various objects for creating content are available in the Producer. Each of these objects in
the tree structure is a reference to the actual object in the particular Workarea folder. This
enables individually specific organization and use of the objects in the local and Central
Workarea. You can refer to, or create a shortcut to, an object multiple times as well as
manage its structure accordingly in conjunction with a Central Workarea.
The Content group is the highest learning content group and is created automatically when
setting up a Workarea. This is where all the learning content is filed. Furthermore, the
structure contained in the group is used for presentation in the library.
This group can be amended via group operations in the context menu with each available
group capable of being defined as the root group. This is necessary when using a Central
Workarea so that the corresponding root group can be set up locally.
Note:
Bear in mind that only objects contained in the root group are displayed in the library.
Shortcuts and unreferenced objects are not available in the library.
188
08 2012
Root group in the Central Workarea
The root group of a Central Workarea cannot be changed.
It is therefore necessary, when working with a Central Workarea, to define the root group
locally:
1. First of all select the Check out object... function in the Central Workarea function.
Define the Workarea contents in the open dialog and click on Check out object.
The objects will then be filed as Unreferenced objects.
2. Now select the topmost group Open the Context menu and go to Group operations ->
Set root. The group is now set up as the root group, the previous group is filed under
Unreferenced objects and can be deleted.
Learning content objects
The following objects for creating and managing content are available in the Producer:
Projects
Projects are used to create lessons. Two main types are available here, which differ in terms
of their macrosets, creation and use.

Simulation projects
(Standard Macroset)
Process simulations are created in standard projects.
These are used to generate modes that explain a process to the learner, who can
work through it. This involves the creation of screenshots with active areas.
Lessons can also be created with quiz macros and documentation generated from the
projects.

Navigation
This projects illustrate the process directly within the application and are used to
support the user while he is working with it. This involves bubbles and highlights being
displayed on the application user interface.
Projects from the Standard Macroset can be converted into a Navigation. That means that a
process can be used both as a lesson and as help in an application and does not need to be
rerecorded.
The projects created can be inserted in a group for presentation in the library or exist on a
standalone basis.
Book pages
Book pages are used to present modes, documents and other content in various media
formats.
Once created, book pages can be inserted in a book or exist on a standalone basis.
Groups
Projects, book pages and books and documentation as well are structured by groups. These
can be interleaved with one another and also make possible a structured outline in a central
document.
Books
Book pages are amalgamated into books. When book pages are inserted in a book, the book
is displayed in the book reader to make it possible to scroll the pages.
08 2012
189
Contents
Templates for objects in the workarea
Templates can be made for objects that are created for workareas in the Project Explorer.
The templates are useful for saving time as well as for ensuring uniformity for newly created
objects when more than one author is working on a project.
Templates can be created for the following objects:

Projects

Groups

Book pages

Books

Text Units
Creating a template
To create a template, proceed as follows:
1. First, create a new project by clicking on New project from the toolbar in the project
editor. It is recommended that you save this in a folder in your workarea that is
specifically for templates.
2. A dialog box will appear. Enter a name for the template, e.g. Standard template.
Confirm by clicking on Ok.
3. Next, configure your project as desired. To do so, from the project editor, open the
main configuration dialog box and define all the project-specific settings.
For books and book pages, you can define the layout, the positioning grid and
content.
4. Save the project.
Choosing a template
If a template has already been created, you can use it to create a new object (group, book,
page or project) or it can be defined as a general template for creating new objects, which will
then serve as the default settings for the new objects.
To use an existing template, proceed as follows:

For an individual object
Create a new object, then select your template from the dialog box under Copy from…
Click on Change… All the objects will then appear in the opened dialog box. Select
your template and click on OK.

As a general template
If you would like to use a template for all the objects, open the central configuration
dialog from the menu Tools -> Settings in the area Application -> Templates. Select
the desired template to be used for the object and click on OK.
Using multiple references
The physical object of a learning content can be referred to as often as necessary. If changes
are made in a reference, these are also contained in the other references.
The opportunity therefore exists to use a particular object for different parts in a project
structure. This is the case, for example, if a lesson is to be offered for different target groups
in conjunction with different additional content.
190
08 2012
Creating a reference
Note:
Please bear in mind that only one reference can be created for an object within a group.
Create object references only in different groups.
1. To create a reference, select the desired object in the tree structure. Then, with the
right mouse button held down, move the object to the appropriate position using
drag&drop.
2. A context menu is opened when you release the mouse button. Select the Create
reference menu option to create the reference.
Note:
If your references contain Word documents and you use them to create a central document,
this central document will include all the documents referred to. If you wish to block the
publication of duplicate documents, then you can hide them while the central document is
being published or define the contents by means of filters.
Tip:
You can use filters to define the way objects are depicted for different users so that content
is not displayed to a user multiple times.
Creating shortcuts
Shortcuts allow you to access any string within a complex project structure. For example, a
project can be filed locally as a reference from the Central Workarea so that it can quickly be
made available for editing.
Note:
As shortcuts refer to an object and are therefore not contained in the base group, they are
not displayed in the library.
Creating a shortcut
To create a shortcut, select the desired object and right click on the context menu to open it.
Then click on New shortcut.
The shortcut is now placed beneath the base group and flagged with a shortcut symbol
the object is a group or book then it will be displayed with the associated sub objects.
. If
Deleting a shortcut
To remove a shortcut, select the object with the shortcut symbol and delete it using the
Delete (Del) key or via the Edit -> Delete menu.
Linking a shortcut
To make it easy to link objects, up to five links are displayed in the Insert link dialog. This
way, content used multiple times can be selected quickly and directly.
Unreferenced objects in a Workarea
As the Workarea objects are references, objects may in certain circumstances be displayed
in the Project Explorer as being unreferenced. This will be the case if an object is not
08 2012
191
Contents
assigned to the topmost or to a subordinate group.
Unreferenced objects can arise for the following reasons:

by objects migrating

when importing archives

by downloading objects from a Central Workarea

by setting a new topmost group
The Unreferenced Entities
are arranged at the bottom of the tree structure.
Note:
Unreferenced objects are not displayed in the library. To display them, subordinate the
objects to the topmost group.
Inserting unreferenced objects in the topmost group
You can assign unreferenced objects to the topmost group and thus relocate them to the
desired position within the tree structure. This is done by dragging and dropping the object in
question.
If you want to assign an object to a specific group or book then you can do so using the Insert
unreferenced entities. To do so, select an object, open the context menu and click on Insert
unreferenced entities. All objects filed as being unreferenced, are then assigned to the group
or book.
Unreferenced objects when using the Central Workarea
Unreferenced objects may appear in a Central Workarea for a variety of reasons. This is how
you deal with a base group in the central workarea:

Unreferenced objects may occur when using a Central Workarea if an object is
downloaded without the referenced objects.
You can now also check out the referenced objects. These will then be located within
the base group in their actual position.

Unreferenced objects can also occur if a Central Workarea has changed. This is then
to be reallocated accordingly.

It is not possible to use multiple topmost groups in a Workarea. When downloading
additional topmost groups, these are set as unreferenced objects.
When using a central workarea, always create a new Workarea.
The folder structure in the Workarea
The content of the resources and learning content depicted in the Project Explorer's tree
structure are filed in the Workarea folder.
Folders in the Workarea have a flat structure. That means that the learning content folders
are not nested. Accordingly, projects, groups, book pages and resources as well all have
their own folders in which the associated files are held.
The corresponding learning content structure and basic object attributes are laid down in the
topmost group's entity.xml. Structural changes are automatically mirrored in the relevant file.
Resource folders
The resource folders contain the necessary files for creation and playback. Similarly, the
structure depicted in the Project Explorer is available in the Workarea folder structure.
192
08 2012
The folders in question can be launched directly via the Project Explorer. To do this, select
the desired resource group or resource, open the context menu and click on Open folder.
Please note the section Resource overview for the content and names of the respective
folders.
Learning content folders
The learning content folders are organized according to projects, groups, book pages and
books. The learning content is not filed within the structure, as portrayed in the tree structure,
as this depicts object references. The advantage of this is the ability to organize and manage
the content in reference form in many different ways.
The current learning content structure is recorded in the entity.xml file contained in each
folder. The group operating as the topmost group records the content structure, and a
corresponding subgroup or book the rest of the content.
08 2012
193
Contents
Projects
The project directory contains the individual project folders. This is where the folders are
located containing the relevant files and documentation for the individual projects.
The macro folder contains the screenshots of the New page macros as well as the field icons.
The dump_page folder where the screenshot img.png is stored is set up for the New page
macro. The screenshot is integrated into an HTML page (index.html) for editing and display.
The XML file page.xml containing applicable page information on the screenshot is also
available.
When documentation is created, the doc_files folder is set up, which holds the corresponding
application page screenshots and field icons.
The project file is stored in the project.dpr format. The name is the same for all projects, the
advantage of which is that the project name can be changed in the Producer at any time
without difficulty. The name of a project in the Project Explorer is also recorded in the
entity.xml.
After a project has been generated, the various modes are filed as JavaScript files (*.js),
which can be interpreted by the trainer when being played back there.
Groups
Projects, books and book pages as well as other groups can be filed in groups. This structure
is then saved in entity.xml. The folder can also contain filed documentation.
Book pages
The folder contains all the necessary files for displaying a book page. If images or media files
were inserted, the Producer files them in the folder.
slide.xml stores all the necessary information for building and displaying the book page and
its objects. The book page's entity.xml contains the book page name.
Books
Books serve to combine a number of book pages. The folder contains the entity.xml, which
records which book pages have been included.
Creating a Workarea
If you would like to create a new Workarea, then select the Select Workarea... function in the
Workarea menu.
1. A Workarea selection dialog is opened after startup, offering a preset path for filing the
folder.
This path is under:

Windows XP:
Documents and settings/User folder/SAP Workareas/Workarea

Windows Vista and Windows 7:
Users/User folders/SAP Workareas/ Workarea
Changing the name
If you would like to change the name of the Workarea, you can do so using the path
data in the Target directory. Replace the prescribed name with the new name.
Changing the base directory
1. To set a different directory as the base directory, click on the Select
button.
2. Designate the folder in the directory structure in which the Workarea is to be set
up and click on Create new folder. Give this a name of your choosing.
194
08 2012
3. Then click on OK to confirm the dialog. The path for the Workarea folder is now
displayed in the dialog.
2. You will see the standard installation resources displayed in the window under the
Target directory. You can use this selection to define the resources to be used.
3. Click on Create to set up the Workarea. The required files are now copied into the
target directory.
Once all the files have been copied into the corresponding working directory, you can confirm
the conclusion of the creation process by clicking on OK. The resources and Content group
are now created within the tree structure.
Note:
The standard installation resources are set up when a Workarea is created. You can then
insert individual resources, such as customized styles or application profiles, in your
Workarea via Import Archive….
Multi-User Capability in Workareas
The Workarea contains a mechanism that prevents multiple users in the same network from
opening and using the same Workarea. This is the purpose of the *.lock file stored in the
Workarea folder.
If multiple users are to use a common structure for their projects, the use of a Central
Workarea should be considered.
Note:
If Producer quits unexpectedly and the *.lock file is not automatically deleted, this should be
done manually to ensure that all users will be able to access the Workarea.
Central Workarea
To support larger groups of authors, a Central Workarea can be created to collect and
manage authors' lessons.
Administration and creation of a Central Workarea via the Menu Workarea -> Administration > Select Central Workarea… is only available for super users. This feature has to be enabled
with a special key after installing Producer. Super users are also allowed to open a Central
Workarea, organize the content within and publish the content.
A normal author works with his local Workarea in which he generates his content. This local
Workarea is registered with a Central Workarea. The author can upload and download his
content or the content of other authors.
If a local Workarea is registered with a Central Workarea, the additional menu Central
Workarea is available. It contains all the functions needed to exchange data and content
between the local Workarea and the Central Workarea. For more information regarding these
functions, please read the chapters on this in this Online Help file.
In addition to the produced projects, the resources used can also be exchanged between
authors through the Central Workarea.
08 2012
195
Contents
Note:
In order for several authors to use, a fast LAN (Local Area Network) infrastructure with high
bandwidth and low latency is required.
If the Central Workarea is accessed through a WAN connection (Wide Area Network), the
bandwidth (usually low) and high latency together with the SMB network protocol used by
Producer result in extremely long waiting times when performing remote actions on the
Central Workarea.
Note:
In accordance with the WebDAV protocol, do not use the Central Workarea in a directory.
This impairs the performance of the connection between the Producer and the Central
Workarea.
Separate Administration of Content
Content is organized separately for the local Workarea and the Central Workarea.
The first time content is uploaded, the original structure is transmitted. Afterwards it can be
altered in any of the different Workarea. The correct synchronization of content is not
affected.
Unique Identifiers for Projects
In order to prevent problems caused by two projects having identical names, every project
gets a UID (Unique Identifier). This UID identifies a project correctly at any time, no matter
how often the name was changed in the past.
If a project is duplicated, the duplicate always gets a new UID.
BPM Import
For the structuring of business processes in the Producer in Business Process Model (BPM)
applications builded process models can be imported into the workarea. Thereby a group and
project structure with the accordant object namings will be created in the project explorer.
Based on the structure you get a tree in which the respective content can be created.
The structures of the following BPM applications can be imported:

ViFlow

Nimbus

Symbio

Aris
Note:
For the import of an Aris structure it is necessary to have an installed Symbio Suite, which
the Producer uses for the Import.
196
08 2012
Import of a BPM structure
Import your BPM structure as follows. Please note that the import can differ according to the
used BPM application.
1. Create the required process model in your BPM application.
2. Publish this:

ViFlow
Publish the process model under Edit -> Publish from ViFlow. The structure.xml
is created here as part of the ViFlow web model in the html folder.

Nimbus
Publish the process model as a simplified XML structure (Simplified XML) to
add all the process steps to a file.

Symbio
Publish the process model as a XML structure.

Aris
Publish the process model as a XML structure.
3. Now change to the Producer.

In the project explorer open the Tools -> Import menu and select the
corresponding import entry. The import dialog opens. Aris
The first time you import an Aris structure a settings dialog opens. Define the
directories of the executable for the Symbio Suite as soon as for the temporary
files. Confirm with Ok.
See also chapter Settings for the Aris Import.
4. Select the published structure file and click Open.

A settings dialog will be open. Adapt the following settings and conform with
Ok: Import type: new structure, update structure

Create empty projects

Language (only Symbio)
The folder structure is then created in the project explorer where you can edit it and start
creating content.
Settings for the Aris Import
The settings dialog for the Aris import can be opened about the Tools -> Import -> Aris
Import: Settings… menu. There are the following settings:

Symbio CLA-EXE:
The setting defines the location of the Symbio Suites cla.exe. An installed Symbio
Suite is necessary to execute the import.

Directory for temporary files:
During the import process temporary files will be created. About this setting a directory
for the storage of the files can be defined.
Update of a BPM structure
The update of a BPM structure in the Producer allows it to insert the modified or new content
from a BPM application in an existing structure. This can be done via the import function by
importing the updated structure. See the chapter Import of a BPM structure.
For the update it is necessary to select the import type Update Structure in the import settings
dialog. Select for the Symbio import also the language of the imported structure.
08 2012
197
Contents
The update is recommended for unmodified structures of the Producer, because manually
created objects will be moved into Unsorted. In the structure changed objects will be resorted
like in the import structure.
Export of Symbio links
The export of Symbio links allows it to export the content structure of a workarea in a XML file
for the use in the Symbio Suite. The file includes the links of the modes and documentation
as soon as the title and language information of the content.
The export of Symbio links can be done as follows:
1. Open the Import -> Export Symbio Links… menu in the Project Explorer.
2. Select the base path of the workarea for the links. Confirm with Ok.
3. Select the target directory and insert a file name.
4. Click Save to execute the export.
Using Filters in the Workarea
The ability to set up filters is offered to enable large Workareas to be better administered.
These can be applied to the tree view in the Project Explorer, for publishing Workareas or for
publishing a Workarea at a later date in the library.
A filter is based on one or more properties that you can freely create using conditions and
assign to the desired learning content. These kinds of properties can be master categories or
categories as well as language or type of objects. If a filter is selected, only those objects are
displayed in the tree view that correspond to the filter.
Creating master categories
The category filter master categories are administered via the Edit Master Categories dialog.
Open this dialog via the Tools menu.
The dialog offers you the following functionality:
198
08 2012

Creating a master category
Click on the Add button. A dialog will then open in which you can enter the name of
the master category. Confirm this with Ok.

Deleting a master category
To remove a master category, select the master category in question and click on the
Delete function.

Renaming a master category
Select the master category in question and then click on the Rename button. You can
now change the name in the open dialog and confirm it by clicking on OK.
When you have set up or edited your master categories, close the dialog by clicking on OK.
You can then assign the master categories you have set up to your objects and define
category filters.
Assigning master categories
If you have defined master categories, you can assign them to the objects within your tree
structure:
1. Select the object in the tree structure to which you would like to assign a master
category.
08 2012
199
Contents
2. Then click on the button Edit categories...
next to the parameter Categories in the
object editor to open the assignment dialog.
3. In this dialog you can now assign one or more master categories to the object. To do
so, activate the corresponding checkbox.
4. Then click on OK to confirm the dialog.
Creating categories
You can create additional categories in the Edit categories dialog. This allows you to provide
a filter with more complex criteria.
To do this, enter a category in the text box and click on Add. You can then assign the
category to your object.
Please bear in mind that the categories created in this manner cannot be altered in the Edit
Master Categories... dialog.
Creating filters
To create a filter for your workarea, proceed as follows:
1. Open the Edit Category Filter dialog. To do this, select New filter... from the dropdown list above the tree structure.
2. Enter a Filter name in the upper text box.
If you do not enter a name, the combination of the filter criteria is inserted for it.
3. You can specify the filter using the drop-down list.
You can find examples in the following section:
Selecting properties
You can select properties which are used to define the filter from the drop-down list on
the left:
200

Category

Name

Language

Description
08 2012

Short description

Context

Keywords

UID

Object type
Selecting conditions
Criteria can be defined to further specify the filter in the drop-down list in the middle:

is (not for Description, Short description)

contains

begins with (not for Description, Short description)

ends with (not for Description, Short description)

is not (not for Description, Short description)
Categories and entries
You can select the existing master categories or categories using the drop-down list
on the right.
Entries can also be made to describe the filter in accordance with the properties.
These are not saved and must be reentered if the filter is used again.
4. After a filter definition is defined, the and / or buttons are activated that you can use to
include other definitions to refine the filter.

And - All definitions have to correspond to the objects to be displayed.

Or - One of the definitions has to correspond to the objects to be
displayed.Definitions that have been added can be removed again by clicking
the Delete button.
5. Once you have defined your filter, you can confirm the dialog by clicking OK.
The created filter is now available in the filter selection in the Project Explorer.
If you have selected a filter, you can use the buttons to the right of the drop-down list to select
whether you want to edit or delete this filter.
Examples of filter definitions
The filter definitions can be combined any way you want. Several typical uses are described
in the following section:

Language – is – en-US
Objects are filtered according to their language with this filter. The language code has
to be entered in this case.
You can find the language code for your objects in the Language field of the Object
Editor.

Description – contains – description text
Objects that contain a specific word or text passage as a description can be filtered
out with this filter.
(similar to Name and Short description)

Context – contains – context name
Objects can be filtered using their context information with this filter.

Keywords – is not – keyword
Objects can be filtered using their keywords with this filter. In this case, objects that
contain this term are filtered out.
08 2012
201
Contents

Object type – is - project
Objects can be filtered using their type with this filter. The object types that can be
used are:

group - Group

project - Project

book - Book

slide - Book Page

cdoc - Text Unit
The library settings
These settings define how a filter affects the display of the library and whether the filter is to
be displayed in the library or is only intended for editing in the Project Explorer. The settings
affect both the local as well as a published workarea.

Generate prefiltered library with filter
The setting defines that when the filter is activated in the Project Explorer, the library
is open in the structure. If the setting is deactivated, the library is displayed with all
content despite an active filter.

Use filter in unfiltered library
The filter is displayed both in the Project Explorer as well as in the library with this
setting. If the setting is deactivated, the filter can only be used in the Project Explorer.

Use filter in prefiltered library
The filter is also displayed in a prefiltered library with this setting. By deactivating the
setting, only the filter necessary for the prefiltered status, for example, can be used.
The search function
The search function makes it possible to perform targeted searches for content in the tree
structure of the Project Explorer. The respective content is displayed directly when a keyword
is entered. You can also start the search by clicking the Search button.
Click the Show Search Options button to display settings that further specify the content you
are searching for. The list closes again when you click Hide Search Options. These are:

Name

Description

Short description

Keywords

Context

UID
If you want to reset a search, remove the keyword you entered or select (no filter) in the filter
list.
The last value entered is saved in the filter list for direct reuse and is written as follows:
Search: Keyword
202
08 2012
Spell checker
The spell checker enables automatic correction of the texts contained in the HTML editor.
The text is checked according to which project language is set. This requires a spell checker,
accessed by the Producer, to be installed in Microsoft Word in the relevant language.
In the same way as is familiar from Microsoft Word, a misspelled word is underlined with a
red wavy line. You can now either correct the spelling or else select the correct spelling by
right clicking to call up the context menu.
Activating spell checker
There is an option available to you in the Central Configuration Dialog for activating the spell
checker. This option is located in the Application -> User interface category.
The Spell Check default language option can be used to define a language to be used if there
is no language package available in Microsoft Office for a language being used in a project.
Bubble Type Editor
The Bubble Type Editor lets you modify the appearance of bubbles used in lessons and save
them as reusable bubble types. It is started via Edit Bubble Types... in the menu Tools.
The bubble types defined here can be assigned to the individual recording macro bubbles.
You will find the corresponding setting in the Bubble subcategory of the Macro Editor.
On the left side of the editor the available bubble types are listed. On the right side is the area
where the bubble type properties can be edited. The list always contains at least the item
Standard. Even though it can edited, it can not be deleted. It is always used if the standard
settings of a bubble are not altered.
The button New… creates a new bubble type. Clicking on Delete removes the currently
selected bubble type from the list.
If a bubble type that no longer exists is selected in a macro, the standard bubble type will
automatically be used for playback in the trainer.
08 2012
203
Contents
Creating and editing a bubble
If a new bubble type is created using the New... button, a dialog box will appear in which the
name and intended template are to be identified.
After confirming the name and the template for the new bubble type by clicking on OK, the
name appears in the list on the left side of the Bubble Type Editor.
The Key for a bubble type is derived from the name you entered for the bubble type when
creating it. It cannot be changed anymore afterwards, whereas the Name itself can also be
changed later as well as the Template at any time.
The Background Color defines the color used for the background of the text bubble. Title Bar
Color determines the color used for the title bar at the upper edge of the bubble. The Border
Color defines the color used for the border of the bubble. Each color can be entered manually
as a Hex code or can be chosen using a Color Picker dialog.
The Opacity defines whether the background color of the bubble lets the content behind the
bubble shine through. 100% stands for a completely solid background color and 0% for
complete transparency.
The button Rotate changes the preview of the bubble. Clicking shows the different
orientations of the bubbles, and arrow rotates clockwise, including showing the bubble
centered without the arrow.
By clicking on Save the new or changed bubble type is available for all projects located in the
current Workarea.
204
08 2012
Note:
Defined bubble types always apply to the current Workarea. Therefore, they can be used by
all projects located in the Workarea but also are not saved with a single project file. In order
to provide a special set of bubble types to other Workareas as well, it is necessary to copy
and add them manually. The definitions and images are located in the folder bubble of the
Workarea and need to be copied to the same location in the target Workarea.
The Bubble Templates
The following Templates are available for the appearance of a bubble:
Name
Description
Gradient
The Gradient template
depicts bubbles with twocolored gradients and thick
borders.
Bold
The Bold template depicts
bubbles with two-colored
thick borders and a wide
point.
Bulb
The Bulb template depicts
bubbles with no effects and
with rounded corners.
08 2012
Design
205
Contents
Name
Description
Standard
The Standard template
depicts bubbles with rounded
corners and gloss. This is the
default for simulations.
Feedback
The Feedback template
depicts bubbles with rounded
corners and gloss.
Formal
The Square template depicts
bubbles without rounded
corners and effects.
Glassdrops
The Glassdrops template
depicts a bubble with drops
as the point together with
shadows and gloss.
Glossy
The Glossy template depicts
a bubble with gloss.
206
Design
08 2012
Name
Description
Glossy Navigation
The Glossy Navigation
template depicts a yellow
bubble with orange glossy
border. This is the navigation
default.
Glossy Transparent
The Glossy Transparent
template depicts a glossy,
transparent bubble.
Spike45_2px
The Spike45_2px template
depicts a bubble with a point
at an angle of 45 degrees and
a 2 pixel deep border.
Sticky Note
This template replaces the
traditional bubble with a
Sticky Note. This template
also has an arrow so that it
can point to the object it
refers to.
Design
Customizing Glossary Texts
To be able to customize predefined bubble text modules and the texts used in the trainer, the
Producer offers the opportunity to edit these text files individually. That means that you can
use terminologies or sentences peculiar to your own texts, which conform to your company's
corporate language or else you can set up an additional project language which is not
contained as standard in the Producer.
08 2012
207
Contents
The dialog Edit Glossary is available to you for editing the texts. That means that direct
access to the text files is not necessary.
You can use the dialog to edit the following texts:

trainer texts
These contain the texts for the start & stop pages, the trainer bar, the book reader
bar and the library
Resource: trainer Glossaries

Bubble text modules
These texts are the project languages for the lessons.
Resource: Content Glossaries
Open dialog
You can open the dialog Edit Glossary using the resources in the Project Explorer and
thereby directly access the desired text files. To do this, select the corresponding glossary
and then click on the Open glossary button
in the Object Editor.
Once the dialog has been opened, the texts are automatically loaded from the relevant text
file. By default, the dialog is opened with the glossary in the active Producer language.
Using customized texts in a different Workarea
If you have customized texts, you can use them in different Workareas as well and not have
to re-edit the texts each time. For this purpose, the customized glossary can be outputted as
an archive and imported into the desired Workarea. Please pay attention to the sections on
exporting and importing an archive.
Setting up a glossary
To edit the texts, first create a new glossary. This involves copying the standard glossary
which you use as a template for editing the texts and IDs.
Note:
Do not change the texts in the Standard glossary so that you always have the original
version available at all times. Always set up a new glossary.
1. Select the appropriate glossary group in the Project Explorer resources.
2. In the Object Editor, click on the New glossary function. Enter a name in the open
dialog and click on OK to confirm.
The Standard glossary will now be copied automatically.
3. To use the glossary you have created for your trainer or as a project language, select
the glossary and click on the Set as default function in the Object Editor. The entry is
now bolded.
Editing texts
To customize the existing texts, open your glossary in the Edit Glossary dialog. You can edit
the text in the dialog as follows:
1. Double-click on the line of the text to be amended. This will open an editing dialog.
2. The upper field of the dialog will display the original text.
You can view this text in another language by clicking on the Other... button.
208
08 2012
Note:
The text IDs cannot be changed as they are used to assign the texts in the trainer and in the
library and in the bubbles as well.
3.
You can change the value, status and comment.
Attention:
Do not change any variables or scripts contained in texts. These are used for allocating or
formatting applicable content. Changes can cause implementation errors.
The variables are indicated with an @ sign or in curly brackets {...}. But scripts in diamond
brackets &lt;...>, for CSS information, for example, are also possible. Typically these are in
English.
Wildcard characters for assigning field names and field icons are to be found in square
brackets [] in the text modules. The HTML tag &lt;b>&lt;/b> indicates bolded texts.

Enter your desired text in the Target language field.

You can define the Status via the drop-down list. This allows the text to be
managed and determines the editing status. There are the following statuses:

new

needs-translation

translated

needs-review

needs-fix

final

As a rule, the texts are given the status final. The status of an amended text is
automatically set to new.

The Comment field allows you to enter a comment needed for editing a
particular text.
4. To restore the original text, click on Remove customization in the editing dialog. But
this can only undo the last changes made. Texts in a file that have already been
saved are therefore retained.
5. Click on Close to incorporate the text in your text document.
Search and filter
You have a search and filter function available for finding a particular text in a text file
displayed for editing. To access this function, select the relevant button in the toolbar to open
the corresponding dialog.
The search
This is how you perform a search:
1. Enter a search term in the dialog text field.
2. Various settings are available for refining the search. Activate the options you want:
08 2012

Search in IDs

Search in values
209
Contents

Ignore case sensitive

Partial match
3. To start the search, click on OK.
The filter
The filter function can be used to hide all the texts that do not meet the filter criteria.
1. Enter a term of your choosing which you would like to use to filter the column. The
following input fields are at your disposal:

ID

Value

Status

Comment
2. If so required, activate the setting Ignore case sensitive behind each of the input fields
to avoid distinctions based on spelling.
3. After confirming the entries by clicking on OK the text search results are displayed.
To redisplay the complete list, remove the entries in the filter dialog and confirm by clicking
on OK.
Setting up a new language
If you would like to add an additional language to those provided by the Producer, you can
do so via the New language function.
Click on the associated button to define a new language. You can define the following values
in the dialog that then opens:

Language:
Select the new language you would like to set up from the list. In this list you will find
an overview of different languages with their associated flags.

Copy from:
Select which project language is to be used as a template for your new language. This
is required so as to be able to assign the texts to the corresponding IDs.
Then confirm your selection by clicking on OK; this will create in the Glossary a text file for
the new language you have set up.
You can now amend the texts directly or export them as an Excel file to have them
transferred into the corresponding language by a translator. Once the Excel file has been
translated, you can reimport it. The Export Excel and Import Excel functions are available in
the toolbar to allow you to do this.
Once you have set up your new language, we recommend that you export the associated
glossary as an archive so that you can use it for other Workareas.
Creating a new entry
In addition to existing texts, you can insert further IDs for new texts, thus enlarging the
glossary.
210
08 2012
Note:
Should you require additional IDs, please get in touch with your customer advisor for
assistance with integrating the new IDs into products. This will avoid malfunctions when
displaying the texts.
Set up new IDs as follows:
1. Select the New button in the toolbar to open the editing dialog. Alternatively, you can
open it from the topmost list entry New....
2. Enter a name in the ID field. You can only enter an ID that does not already exist.
3. The setting Add to all languages can be used to determine whether the new entry is
only to be inserted in the chosen project language or in all the project languages in the
glossary.
To ensure consistency between project languages, the setting should be retained.
4. Confirm the dialog by clicking on OK.
Once the dialog has been closed, the editing dialog for the text opens. Now enter the text you
want. Please pay attention to the section on editing texts.
For the IDs, you can then enter the texts in the other project languages you are using. To do
so, select the language you want from the drop-down list.
File Formats
Producer works with two different types of file formats. The WRP format *.wrp and the DPR
format *.dpr are used for a project's work files. The main difference between them is that a
WRP file can contain an audio track, whereas a DPR file is an XML-based format, which can
contain an unlimited number of topics but no audio track. The default file format for lessons
with audio is WRP, and for lessons without audio, it is DPR.
Finished lessons are published as JavaScript files in JS format *.js. Audio tracks are saved
as MP3 files together with the lesson.
The difference between the formats is file size. The WRP format saves not only the event and
audio tracks, but, among other things, any macros that were used and other specific lesson
parameters. A JS file only contains the parts of a lesson which are needed in order to play it,
i.e. the event and audio tracks. It is common to work with better sound quality during the
production of a lesson than is available in the finished lesson in order to keep quality loss as
low as possible while working with the audio track. When saving a lesson as a JS file, the
sampling rate is automatically converted to the necessary frequency.
Topics
Topics organize a lesson into chapters or sections. Generally, topics consist of single actions
on a particular page.
The topics are automatically inserted in the application for each new screenshot during
automatic recording. For automated recording, a topic contains all macros that are used
before the next screen in the application in order to describe the action that has been
executed.
All topics are numbered consecutively, followed by the title of the topic.
08 2012
211
Contents
The topic titles are displayed as a guide beneath the trainer progress bar during playback in
Demo mode. As before, they subdivide the documentation generated into the corresponding
chapters.
A topic has various attributes that determine its behavior when a lesson is played back and
for the creation of documentation.
The Name of the topic can be changed at any time. This is especially useful if the application
windows always have the same name when recording. The Producer takes on the name of
the window as the title of the topic. This means that many topics may have the same name.
The title may also be used as chapter titles in generated documentation if this has been so
defined. If you are planning to generate documentation, the titles of the topics should be
unique.
Jump Target determines the behavior of the topic in the progress display of trainer.
Note:
Within an automatically recorded lesson, the first topic has a special status. It generally
includes only the Lesson Start macro in order to properly initialize the lesson for playback.
For this reason it is never set to visible or as a jump target.
Reference Counter
The reference counter displays all existing object references from a workarea in the Project
Explorer. This facilitates finding and managing references.
To enable the reference counter, click on View -> Reference Counter.
A number will appear in front of an object in the tree structure to indicate how often it has
been referenced. From the object editor, the existing references for each selected object will
be displayed based on the higher-ranking objects. You can add links to be able to quickly
jump to the objects. The reference that is currently selected is highlighted.
In addition to the reference counter, the option Dependencies… is also displayed in the
object editor. This button will open a dialog box with a list of all existing dependencies for an
object within a workarea.
Dependencies
The dependencies dialog box displays all existing references for an object within a workarea.
This could be other objects, files and resources. Displaying dependencies will provide you
with an overview of existing references, which is useful for publishing purposes.
212
08 2012
The dialog box can be opened from the context menu for each object. Note that when the
reference counter is activated, the option Dependencies… will also be automatically
displayed in the object editor.
Display

Dependencies: Dependencies - Tree
This displays the existing references in a tree structure format.

Dependencies: Dependencies - List
This displays the existing references as a list.

Referrer: Referrer - List
This displays the references in accordance with the individual referrers, e.g.,
according to which object or resource is being used.
Displayed Objects

Recursive
When this setting is enabled, the corresponding sub-objects for the selected object
will also appear.

References in structure
This displays existing references that have been directly allocated to an object.

References by parameter
This displays existing references that exist due to certain settings that have been
defined.

Resources only
This will only display resources that have been referenced.

Show names
This will also display the names as they appear in the project explorer.
08 2012
213
Contents
Macro Overview
Macros are applied not only for recording from the web but also with Windows applications.
The macros of the standard macro set are already optimized to work with the interfaces of
standard applications.
The Standard Macroset (Simulations)
Fundamentally, there are the following types of macros:

Special Macros

Simulation Macros

Book Page Objects

Quiz Macros

Dokumentation Macros
Special Macros
Start Lessen
End Lesson
Imported Page
Form Structure
Branch
Jump to Topic
Mode Change Start
Mode Change End
Text-to-Speech Override
Start Lesson
This macro is required for the correct initialization of the lesson in the trainer. It should
always be at the beginning of a lesson. When using the recording, this macro is embedded
into a dedicated topic, which has been set to hide and also cannot be selected as a Jump
Target in the trainer Synopsis.
The points
In the event that the user is to be rewarded with points, the parameters Maximum Points and
Required Points may be entered. The values are calculated from the number of single actions
214
08 2012
(always 3 points) and the percentages that have been entered in the Project Explorer for the
project. The command Update is applied for automatic calculation and actualization.
The task description
A task may be displayed in a separate browser popup window inPractice mode and Test
mode. This can be created in the Task Description subcategory and activated for the mode in
question.
The Generate Task Description Values option is used to insert the values from the Text input
and Single selection macros into the task. This is of use, for example, so as to have the
necessary data available when creating a user or logging in.
The position of the task description window on the screen is set by the parameter Orientation.
In addition a background color for the window can be selected via Background.
End Lesson
This macro should always be put at the end of a lesson, so that trainer can end the lesson
correctly.
Use Pause to define the display duration of the last topic.
Mode Change Start
This macro forces a mode change when playing back the lesson in a certain mode. For
example, if the macro defines thatTest mode is to be used instead of Demo mode, this
means that later on while playing back the lesson in Demo mode the Test mode will be used
instead after the point where the macro Mode Change Start was inserted, until the macro
Mode Change End switches back to the original mode.
Note:
A change of mode can only ever be performed within a topic. So please ensure that the
Mode Change Start and Mode Change End macros are within the same topic.
Mode Change End
Terminates the mode change started by the macro Mode Change Start.
Note:
A change of mode can only ever be performed within a topic. So please ensure that the
Mode Change Start and Mode Change End macros are within the same topic.
Jump to Topic
This macro makes the trainer jump to a specific topic in the lesson. The only parameter that
can be selected from the dropdown list is the desired topic under Jump Target.
This macro is meant mainly for the use of alternative paths in a lesson.
08 2012
215
Contents
Text-to-Speech Override
You can use the Text-to-Speech Override macro to replace the prescribed spoken text for a
topic with a text of your own.
Insert the Text-to-Speech Override macro in a topic once you have converted the associated
spoken text. This preallocates the bubble text as the spoken text. You can now change the
text in accordance with your own ideas.
Would you like to restore the original bubble text in the text box, then you can use the control
Insert text from bubble to overwrite the current text with that.
Simulation Macros
Simulation macros are for the recording, display and control of the lesson contents in a
browser window. They portray all the usual actions that a user can carry out in an application.

Explanation

Highlight

Click Link

Key-Stroke

Input Text

Select Single

Radio / Checkbox
New Page
As a rule, a macro always marks the beginning of each topic, since all subsequent actions
are based on this macro until the displayed content changes and therefore a new topic and a
new New Page macro will be recorded. When using the recording, this macro is created
together with every new topic as soon as the content of the displayed page changes.
Aside from the Topic name (which contains the name of the topic), the macro also contains
documentation parameters that influence the layout of the potential document file.
Tipp:
If you want to edit the screenshot for the New Page macro, it is possible to open it in an
external image editor. To do this, right click the New Page macro and open the respective
storage location by clicking Open folder. You can then open and edit the image in the
respective program.
Please keep in mind that you are responsible for any changes to the screenshot. Do not
change the name or the file format.
216
08 2012
Explanation
The Explanation macro will display a global description on the current page in either Demo,
Practice or Concurrent mode, when so desired, and highlights the area.
The macro Explanation can be inserted during recording or ReRecording via the Recording
Bar or from the toolbar in Project Editor.
In order to reduce editing time, the option Always like Demo makes the macro use the same
text entered for Explanation Demo for the bubble in Practice mode as well without the
necessity to enter it again.
The macro Explanation can be inserted during recording or ReRecording via the Recording
Bar or from the toolbar in Project Editor.
The position of the explanation area and the bubble and the texts to be used in the Demo
mode and Practice mode are defined in the macro editor. These positions are the same in
Demo, Practice, Test and Concurrent mode. It is also possible to define whether the
explanation should be displayed in Demo mode or Practice mode. Care should be taken here
to ensure that the Demo mode selection also applies to Concurrent mode and that the
Practice mode selection applies also to Test mode.
Use Edit Marker Position to improve the marker position in a generated documentation within
an editor. Screenshot Position therefore does not have to be entered manually. In addition,
the Bubble Position command will allow you to position the bubble in the current page directly
using the mouse.
Use View Control to show navigation controls within a bubble. When activated, the lesson
pauses and displays the bubbles to enable the user to read them at his or her leisure and
only resumes when the Next button is clicked on.
In addition a Type (Icon) can be assigned to the bubble, which can be selected from four
different types, each represented by a different icon:
Remark
Tip
Info
Warning
The icons are also added to the documentation generated for a project. The images to be
used are located in the resource Configurations/Styles. You may replace these with your own
images.
Highlight
This macro makes it possible to locate an additional highlight on a screenshot. The highlight
is independent of a bubble and can be used to support an explanation. As only one highlight
can ever be used for a macro, whereas it may be necessary for a number of highlight frames
to describe a situation, this macro can be used in addition to the already existing highlight
frame.
08 2012
217
Contents
How to insert and position a highlight
1. From the Thumbnail View, highlight the macro New Page to which you would like to
add your highlight.
2. Then click on Edit -> Insert Special Macro -> Highlight.
The default position for the highlight macro is directly under the macro New Page to
ensure that it is displayed throughout the entire duration of the topic's recording. If the
highlight should be displayed with a particular macro, you can simply drag the
highlight in front of the desired macro.
3. From the Topic View, you can now position (drag & drop) the highlight on the
screenshot. To adjust the size of the highlight, click on one of the frame's points and
with the mouse held down, drag the frame to the desired size. Release the mouse
button to confirm the changes.
Macro options
Display in mode:
You can use the various options to define the mode in which the highlight is to be displayed.
Hide highlight:
Activate this parameter if you want to hide the highlight in the simulation.
This setting has no impact on the highlight being displayed in the documentation if the
parameter Show in Documentation is activated.
Object name:
You can use this parameter to specify a name for the object. If you have two Highlight
macros in a topic, you will need to change the name. In the event of highlight sharing the
same name, only the second one in the sequence will be displayed.
Display in documentation:
If you activate this parameter, the highlight you have created will be displayed in the
documentation.
Click Link
This macro simulates a click on a button or link in Demo mode. InPractice mode the user is
prompted to click on the highlighted link or button. A bubble is displayed in both modes
containing an explanation.
When the macro is being recorded, a dialog box will ask for the name of the link or button and
will then insert it into the standard text.
If the action can also be activated by a keyboard shortcut, then the corresponding key
combination may be entered in Hotkey. In this connection, the key names are separated by
spaces, for example: ctrl k. The Action parameter defines what type of action is to be carried
out with the mouse. The option Highlight inPractice highlights the clicked object in Demo
mode.
Keystroke
This macro can require the user to press a key or combination of keys to continue the lesson.
This macro simulates a keystroke or keyboard combination in Demo mode. In Practice mode
the user is prompted to click on the highlighted link or button. A text bubble is displayed in
both modes containing an explanation.
By selecting the Keystroke macro a dialog opens in which the following settings are available:
218
08 2012
The key or keyboard combination is entered in Key Code. In this connection, the key names
are separated by spaces, for example: ctrl k.
In Key Name the name of the keyboard combination can be entered as they are to be used in
the bubble text. The input is applied to the automatically generated bubble texts as text
building blocks.
If this field is left empty, the Producer will use the entry under Key Code.
The dialog should be confirmed by pressing the Ok button. The input entered can be
changed at any time in the Macro Editor.
Input Text
This macro simulates text being entered into a specific text field in Demo mode. In Practice
mode the user is prompted to enter a specific text into the field. A text bubble is displayed in
both modes containing an explanation.
Additional parameters, which also have to be entered into a dialog box when recording the
macro manually, are the Input Text as well as the manner in which the entry is to be
confirmed. Three options are available: Confirm with Tab, Confirm with Enter, and Confirm
with Button. More than one option may be selected.
If the option Confirm with Button has been selected, then it also needs to be assigned an
object position. It is also possible to select an entry without confirming it Enter, Tab, Button.
In this case, the three confirmation options must be disabled.
Note:
If the Confirmation parameter for inputting a text is altered or an input is read out without
being confirmed, then the instruction in the Practice bubble for confirming the input is to be
aligned manually.
The dialog box also asks for the name of the Input Field as it will be used to automatically
generate the explanatory text in the text bubbles.
The option Highlight in Practice highlights the input field in Demo mode, if this is required.
In addition to the extended parameters in the macro editor, the parameter Set Focus is
offered. This determines whether the focus is automatically set on the corresponding input
field within the lesson page during playback, or if the user should define this him- or herself,
which actually corresponds to the behavior of a live application.
The text entered in the Input Text field contains the value given during the automatic
recording process. This is used as a text module for the automatically generated bubble text.
Changes to this field are transferred into the automatically generated bubble text.
08 2012
219
Contents
This parameter End Value supports the inputting of text in multiline text boxes. Whereas only
single line texts can be entered using the text input parameter, the End Value parameter
generates wordwraps, thus displaying the complete text in the text input box.
A Regular Expression is an exactly defined search pattern for which a match is sought
(pattern matching). When using a regular expression with an input field, the value entered
during a simulation does not need to match exactly the value that was originally recorded.
The value needs instead to correspond to a value described by the regular expression and is
thus valid. The regular expression must be JavaScript compliant. Examples:
any input: /.+/
not case-sensitive input: /input/i
valid alternatives: /^kg$|^kilogram$|^kilogramme$/
five-digit number: /^[0-9]{5} $/
four-digit number with 2 decimal places: /^[0-9]{4}[,\.]{1}[0-9]{2} $/
date: /^[0-9]{1,2}(-|/|\.)[0-9]{1,2}(-|/|\.)([0-9]{4} $|[0-9]{2} $)/
currency: /^-?[0-9]+$|^(-?[0-9]+)?[,\.]{1}[-0-9]{1,2} $/
e-mail address: /[email protected]\[?[a-zA-Z0-9-\.]+\.([a-zA-Z]{2,4}|[0-9]{1,3})\]?/
If for an application a drop-down box is included, then the Producer saves all of the dropdown box's options in the parameter All Values. The chosen entry is flagged with an asterisk
{*}. While the lesson is being edited, the value can be changed by assigning the flag to the
corresponding entry.
Select Single
Select Single simulates the selection of an element by the user (e.g. a list boxes or a
selection list) inDemo mode. In Practice mode, the user is prompted to make a selection in a
specific field. A text bubble is displayed in both modes containing an explanation.
When recording the macro, the choices are offered in a dialog box under Value. In addition,
you will be prompted to enter a Field Name required for the automatic text generation.
In the macro editor, the Value when recording is taken as the Selected Value. Additionally,
the index number of the entry is displayed under Index Selected.
The Selected Value is used as a text module for the automatically generated bubble text.
Changes to this field are transferred into the automatically generated bubble text.
The option Highlight in Practice highlights the object as in Demo mode, when required.
Radio/Checkbox
This macro simulates the activation of an option field by the user (radio button or check box)
in Demo mode. In Practice mode the user is prompted to activate a specific option field. A
bubble containing an explanation is displayed in both modes.
When the macro is recorded, a dialog box is displayed in which the given value for Selected
Value and the Field Name are displayed for verification.
The option Highlight in Practice highlights the object as in Demo mode, when required.
220
08 2012
Book Page Objects
The following section describes book page objects which can be inserted as macros into
simulations.

Arrow

Block Arrow

Text Pop Up

Image

Icon Link

Text Link

New Book Page
Please also refer to the descriptions of the objects for book pages.
Subcategory Simulation
From the macro editor, the setting Simulation is available for all book page objects. The
following settings can be defined here:

In Mode…
These settings allow you to specify in which of the four modes the object should be
displayed when being played back in the trainer.
Block Arrow
The block arrow function creates arrows in a variety of shapes and directions. These arrows
are especially useful for visualizing process workflows and sequences. It is also possible to
add text to the arrows.
To create an arrow, click on the option Insert a block arrow.
Editing block arrows
You can choose one of the following shapes for your block arrows under the option Type &
Direction:

Arrow

Chevron

Pentagon
You can specify which way the block arrow should point:

Left

Right

Top
08 2012
221
Contents

Bottom
Changing the arrow‟s size:
You can change the size of your arrow by pulling on the object‟s frame or by manually
entering the desired values for the width and length under the option Position.
Arrow color:
Click on the option Select color to specify what color the arrow should be.
Thickness:
You can specify how thick or thin the line for the arrow should be. Please note that this only
affects the arrow‟s body.
Text:
You can add text to your arrow, e.g., a description of a process step or a link. You can adjust
the size of your arrow to ensure that the text fits entirely within the space provided.
Icon Link
The Icon Link allows you to link content found in the work area or to create a link to an
external source, such as a website. An icon will then be inserted, to which a link can then be
assigned. The icon is customizable. You can insert an image as well as a tooltip for the target
link.
The design of the icon is based on the Style selected for the simulation that can be defined in
the master configuration dialog in Global Macro-Parameter -> Page style.
How to define an icon
The look of the icon will depend on what book style has been chosen, which can be defined
in the Style settings.
For your defined target link, from the option Type, you can choose what kind of icon you
would like to use:

Demo Mode

Practice Mode

Test Mode

Concurrent Mode

Quiz

Book page

Book

Document
Alternatively, your own icon can be inserted using the option Image. It is recommended that
you use your own icon when linking to an external source or when the icon should not have
the same look as the book style itself.
Text Link
Text Link is a text field to which you can add text and links. The entire surface area is actually
a button that can be easily linked to an external Internet page or an object from the workarea.
This allows you to display additional information if desired.
222
08 2012
To create a link, go to the Insert link...
function. A dialog will then open in which you can
specify a link or select an object from the Workarea. A link to a web page or similar is to be
entered in the text field under Available. This should be in the format http://www... Confirm
your entry by clicking on OK.
When launched, the linked page is automatically opened in a new browser window. If you
would like to open the page in the same window, you need to deactivate the setting Open in a
new window.
If the linked page or object from the Workarea is opened in a new window, you can define
properties for displaying the browser window that has been opened.
New Book Page
An existing book page can be inserted into a simulation with a link using the New Book Page
macro. Changes made to the book page also affect the link in the simulation.
Insert a book page as follows:
1. Use the toolbar to insert the New Book Page macro into the topic. You can select this
macro from the drop-down list for the book page objects.
When the macro is inserted, a new topic is automatically created. This is necessary to
ensure that no topic pages are forgotten and to guarantee that the lesson runs in the
proper order.
2. You can then link the book page you want using the Book Page parameter. Click Edit
link... to open the link dialog where you can select the book page.
3. You can activate the book page for the mode you want under Simulation.
Keep in mind that the objects available on the book page cannot be edited. It is only possible
to add additional objects within the Project Editor or to edit the book page directly in the Book
Page Editor.
Quiz Macros
The quiz macros enable you to check your users' learning success or query matters of topical
relevance in lessons and thus better convey linkages.
Quiz macros are not created automatically when recording the lesson but are an optional
group of macros to be input manually.

Multiple Choice

Fill in the fields

Fill in the blanks

Matching

Connection

Sorting

Slide Control

Grid
08 2012
223
Contents

Puzzle

Hotspot

Quiz Selection

Quiz Evaluation
The quiz macros are divided between quiz types and functional quiz macros. In a quiz lesson,
functional quiz macros provide additional functions such as evaluating or random shuffling of
a number of quiz types.
The macros can be inserted into a lesson via the menu Edit -> Insert Quiz Macro.
It is necessary for all quiz types that the Points, Names and Questions be set. You can find
more detailed descriptions of these settings in the Creating a Quiz Lesson section.
Multiple Choice
Using the Multiple Choice quiz macro you have the option of creating a question with one
answer or multiple answers. The quiz can be solved by selecting the correct answer.
Here, you have a number of design options available, for example, whether or not to create a
question that is answerable with just one correct answer, with multiple answers or with
apparent multiple answers.
To create a Multiple Choice quiz, please proceed as follows:
1. First enter the individual answering options into the Answer x parameter.
2. Then specify the correct answer using the Answer x correct parameter. You can
activate this parameter for a number of answers as well.
If you flag more than one answer as being correct, the possible selections are
displayed as checkboxes or alternatively as radio buttons.
Settings
Further settings can be chosen for this quiz type in the Options subsection.

Shuffle solutions:
When the Shuffle solutions setting has been activated the answers entered are mixed
individually.

Force multiple choice:
Enable this parameter if you do not immediately want to show the user that there is
only one correct answer for a question for which there is only one possible response.
This converts the input fields manually from radio button type to the checkbox type.
224
08 2012
Fill in the fields
With the Fill in the fields quiz macro you can define a question with multiple answers. These
answers should be entered as text inputs.
The answer has to exactly match the string entered by the author as being the correct answer
- if so much as one character is wrong then the answer is deemed to have been incorrectly
answered.
To create the quiz, please continue as follows:
1. You can use the Answer x parameter to set one or more answers for this quiz macro.
2. The type parameter allows the display type to be defined with which the answers are
to be input.
Overview of the types with descriptions and examples:
Type
Description
Text
The answer can be entered in any way
desired.
Text (case sensitive)
The answer must be entered with the same
capitalization as in the predefined answer.
Integer
The answer must be entered as a whole
number. Here, mathematical characters may
also be used.
E.g.: 1,1-3,&lt;4
Floating point number
The answer must be entered as a floating
point number where the dots can be defined
as commas or dots. Mathematical signs may
also be used here.
E.g.: 1.1;1-3.4;&lt;4,2
Regular Expression
08 2012
The answer must be entered as a
mathematical string.
E.g.: (^term$)
225
Contents
Type
Description
Comma separated list
The answer must be entered as a list
separated with commas.
E.g.: Answer1,Answer2,Answer3
The answer can be entered in any way
desired.
Only one answer can be selected from the
list. If identical answers are contained in the
list, each answer may only be entered once.
Comma separated list (case
sensitive)
The answer must be entered with the same
capitalization as in the predefined answer.
Note:
When creating quizzes the answers entered and the type selection should match
functionally. Incorrect entries can bring about errors when viewing the lesson.
Fill in the blanks
With the Fill in the blanks macro you can set a quiz which has text containing gaps to be filled
in where words should be.
To create one of these gap texts, please proceed as follows:
1. Enter a text you wish to create as a gap text.
2. Define the gaps. Here you should enter underscores as placeholders for the text that
is to be entered.
Here, it does not matter how many underscores are used. Corresponding to the Type
selected (see Point 3) the Producer creates the necessary input and selection
options at this position in the text.
Note:
Make sure that number of defined gaps matches the number of answers.
3.
226
Select a type in which the answers are to be entered:

Text input

Text input (case sensitive)

Drop Down List
08 2012

Drag & Drop
4. Then define the answers. The order of the answers must correspond to the order of
the defined gaps in the text. Accordingly, Answer 1 refers to the first gap, Answer 2 to
the second and so on.
5. There are differences when entering answers depending on the type selected:

When working with a Fill in the blanks via text input, only one answer is
permitted per answer field.

For drop-down lists and drag & drop options it is necessary to define alternative
answers for selection. That is why a number of possible answers are to be
inserted in the response field. The answers are separated using a comma and
the correct answer should be marked with an asterisk (*) before it.
Settings

Shuffle solutions:
Activate this setting to mix answers for the drag & drop and drop-down list types into
the corresponding selection for a gap.

First answer list only:
The use of just one answer list is possible in connection with the drop-down list and
drag & drop types if only one list with possible answers is to be made available for the
entire Fill in the blanks, to which the answers must be allocated accordingly. The
correct answers are marked with an asterisk (*). Each answer can only be used once
for a gap.
Matching
You can create a quiz in which texts or pictures must be matched to one another using the
Matching macro.
To create this quiz macro, please proceed as follows:
1. First set up how the answers are to be matched. Here the drop-down list and the drag
& drop settings can be used under Type.

In the drop-down list all available answers are listed out and must be chosen
according to the question.

With drag&drop all answers are available as fields in any order and are to be
matched to the questions.
2. Now define the matches. Here, a question must be entered and the matching answer
must be defined in the answer field.
To do this, you must enter the corresponding question / answer text into the text
08 2012
227
Contents
fields.
Note:
Make sure that the number of questions is equal to the number of answers and that an
answer has been allocated to each question.
Matching pictures
Alternatively, you can add pictures to texts. This means that either the question and answer
both contain pictures or only one of the two do. This can be done by inserting pictures using
the HTML Editor. You should proceed as follows:
1. You may only use the drag & drop function for matching up pictures. Set up this
functionality in the Type section.
2. In the HTML Editor of one of the questions or answers go to Insert Object
Insert image from file...
->
3. Open the folder containing the picture you wish to insert and select the picture file.
Confirm this with Open.
4. In addition to the inserted picture you can also add text.
5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 accordingly for the next questions / answers of the quiz macro.
Note:
Please do not use picture files that are too large (height, width) for Matching so that they
display correctly and do not have to be cropped.
Tip:
Where there is an association between an image question and text response, the height of
the text field in question aligns with that of the associated image. With images of different
height, this results in different text field heights, which betrays the correct allocation of the
answers.
To align the text fields, you can modify the height of the text fields by using spaces (Return
key).
Connection
This quiz type allows you to establish connections between questions and answers in text or
image form. This involves creating a line to highlight the assignment of a selected answer to
a question.
To create a connection, select a question by clicking on it with the mouse. Then use the
mouse again to specify the appropriate answer.
228
08 2012
The following is required to create a quiz Connection:

Define the elements to be connected. You can use both texts and images for this
purpose.
Enter a Question in the appropriate field and it a corresponding Answer.
Note:
Please ensure that the number of questions matches the number of answers and that an
answer is assigned to each question.
When playing back the lesson, questions are presented in sequence and the answers out of
sequence.
Inserting images
To define images as a question or answer, proceed as follows:
1. In the HTML Editor corresponding to a question or answer, go to the function Insert
object
-> Insert image file...
2. Call up the folder containing the image to be inserted and select the image file.
Confirm this by clicking on Open.
3. You can now insert an additional text in the text box to accompany the inserted image.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the other questions and answers in the quiz macro.
Note:
Take care when Inserting images that you do not use image files that are too big (height,
width) so that they can be displayed correctly when arranging the objects and do not have to
be wrapped.
Sorting
Text responses can be sorted into the correct order using the Sorting quiz macro. This quiz
type can be used, for example, to ask questions about the order in which a process must be
carried out where the individual steps must be sorted.
To create a quiz for sorting answers, please proceed as follows:
1. Use the type option to select how the possible answers are to be displayed. Both the
Drop-down list and drag & drop options are available.
08 2012

All of the defined answers are displayed in the drop-down list and should be
selected accordingly.

With drag & drop the answers are positioned as fields in any order and are to
be sorted into the correct order.
229
Contents
2. Select an Alignment in which the answer fields are to be sorted. Vertical and
horizontal can be chosen here.
3. Set the answers. Enter these into the answer fields in the correct order. These
answers will be mixed up on generation of the quiz.
Depending on the number of answers, a corresponding drop-down list or drag & drop
field is created.
Slide Control
The quiz type slide control makes it possible to query an answer within a range of numbers
by means of a slide control.
To create a slide control quiz, please proceed as follows:
1. Define a numerical range for your slider in the Range parameter. Enter the start and
end values as whole numbers separated by a hyphen.
Only one start and one end value can be defined. Additional values, for example, 2-59 are not permitted.
2. Now set the answer as a whole number.
You may only define one number as the answer. It is not possible to select more than
one number or define a range within which the answer lies.
Note:
Make sure only to use integers. Using alternative numerical values or words is not permitted.
Grid
You can create tables in which questions and answers are placed opposite one another using
the Grid quiz macro. The questions can be answered by ticking one of the possible answer
options.
To create a Grid quiz you must create a table with rows and columns. To do so, please
proceed as follows:
230
08 2012
1. Set the possible answers in the Possible answers section. The number of answers
defines the number of columns. These are then displayed horizontally in the head of
the table.
When entering the answers, they must be separated by commas.
E.g.: File,Edit,View,Insert
2. Formulate the questions for the quiz macro in the Question x parameter. These are
then ordered vertically in the left rows.
3. You can define the answers in the Position of the correct answer field. Here, a number
value must be entered, which refers back to an answer from the Possible answers
parameter.
For example, if you defined three answers and want one of your questions to have
Answer 2 as the correct answer, then enter 2 into the answer field of the
corresponding question.
Settings

Shuffle solutions:
Activate this parameter to show the Possible answers in any order. If this setting has
been deactivated, the entries made under possible responses are shown in the same
order in which they were input in the text field.
Puzzle
The Puzzle quiz macro lets you create a puzzle from a picture file. The task is to reassemble
the original picture correctly.
Here, an uploaded picture is divided up by the Producer and the separate parts are mixed
randomly. The degree of fragmentation can be set individually. The user can then use
drag&drop to arrange the image components in the correct layout and thus generate the
original image.
The following shows you how to go about creating a Puzzle quiz type:
1. Insert a picture file via the Image parameter.
The file can be inserted using the Replace Image
command.
Note:
Please note that quiz puzzles do not contain Media File parameters. The Media File area is
used to display the help image and is therefore not available for use in other media files.
2. After inserting the picture, the puzzle must be fragmented:

08 2012
Pieces horizontal: The numerical value entered defines the number of parts into
which the original image is subdivided horizontally.
231
Contents

Pieces vertical: The numerical value entered defines the number of parts into
which the original image is subdivided vertically.
Note:
If, when fragmenting the puzzle, two optically identical fields are found, it may be the case
that the Producer does not recognize which picture belongs to which field. For this reason,
the different puzzle parts should be fragmented in such a way as no identical parts appear.
Alternatively, it is possible to use an image processing program prior to this to change an
optically identical picture by inserting a different-colored point, the size of a single pixel, into
the picture.
3. The original picture can be shown as an aid beside the puzzle using the Show help
image parameter. This parameter is activated in the initial setup.
4. The composition of the puzzle can be set using the Type selection. A difference is
discerned between the following two modes:

arrange in one field

arrange in second field
This selection allows you to determine whether the user works directly within the parts
of the puzzle shown or is shown a second, empty field into which he drags the parts of
the puzzle.
Note:
Please note that the puzzle quiz macro is not produced as well on generation of the
documentation as the option of doing puzzles is not possible in the corresponding document
format.
Hotspot
With the Hotspot quiz macro, a quiz can be created in which a pre-defined area on a picture
must be specified by selecting it.
To create a quiz for a Hotspot macro, please proceed as follows:
1. Use the Image parameter to insert the corresponding picture file within whose area a
section must be selected by the user.
The file can be inserted using the Replace Image
command.
2. After inserting the picture, it is necessary to define an area for selection. This area can
only be defined in the shape of a rectangle.
Select the Define Hotspot function in the header of the macro editor.
After selecting the Define Hotspot button a window will open in which the inserted
picture will display. In it, you will find a red selection box whose size and position can
be changed so that the picture section can be set.
Now close the window with the Confirm Selection
232
button.
08 2012
Quiz Selection
By selecting the Quiz Selection macro, the display of the quiz macros can be modified
individually for each topic. This makes sense in terms of depicting the quiz types incorporated
in the quiz selection in any desired sequence or else displaying only one randomly selected
quiz.
A requirement for a Quiz Selection is that multiple quiz macros be contained in a topic. A
Quiz Selection that spans multiple topics is not possible.
To create a Quiz Selection, please continue as follows:
1. Select a topic to create a Quiz Selection for all of the quiz macros contained in the
topic.
In order to set up the Quiz Selection for particular macros only in a topic, select the
macro which is located in front of the start point of the desired macros. All successive
quiz macros within the topic are then incorporated in the Quiz Selection.
2. Enter the Quiz Selection macro via the menu Edit-> Insert Quiz Macro. Following your
selection, the start quiz selection macro is now inserted and the following quiz macros
indented. The quiz selection is terminated by the end quiz selection macro.
3. Making this selection lets you change the order and display of the quizzes contained
within the Quiz Selection macro. You can choose from the two following types:

Random Selection:
The effect of the Random Selection option is that only one, randomly selected,
quiz macro from the selection is shown in each case for the entire duration of
the quiz selection.
Points: Enter the point value on which the individual quiz macros should be
based.

Shuffle quizzes (all):
This will display all the quiz macros that have been selected in random order.

Shuffle quizzes (number):
This will display a specific number of quiz macros that have been selected in
random order.
Number: This specifies the number of quiz macros to display.
4. Once you have set up a random selection you can define a general point value for it in
the Points parameter of the Quiz Selection Begin macro. Each quiz macro within the
selection is then evaluated against this points score.
08 2012
233
Contents
Deleting the Quiz Selection
If a quiz selection is no longer required in a Quiz Selection, you have the option of removing it
should you wish to do so. Here, only the start and end macros of the Quiz Selection are
deleted. The macros of each of the quizzes remain intact.
You should proceed as follows:
1. Select the Quiz Selection Begin or Quiz Selection End macro.
2. Then click on the Remove Quiz Selection button in the macro editor header or select
the Remove Quiz Selection
option in the macro's context menu.
Quiz Evaluation
Once the tasks have been completed, the Quiz Evaluation macro is available for evaluating a
quiz lesson. As an option, this can be inserted in the last topic of the lesson or at any point
within a topic and thus be used for evaluating completely autonomous quiz lessons or quiz
topics within regular lessons.
It should be borne in mind here that a Quiz Evaluation returns an evaluation of all the
preceding quiz macros. If a number of Quiz Evaluation macros are located within a lesson,
the current quiz evaluation provides an overview of all the quiz macros from the last Quiz
Evaluation macro.
The following settings can be selected for the Quiz Evaluation:

Required result:
The Required result defines a value which must be reached in order to pass the quiz.
This is denoted as a percentage value.
Evaluation format
You can determine the degree of detail in the evaluation by means of the Evaluation format
setting. The following points are available:

minimal:
An evaluation of the possible points achievable and the number of points actually
achieved are displayed.

reduced:
a table containing the title of the relevant quiz macro, the result and the points score
achieved is also displayed.

full:
The table additionally shows the solutions to all of the quiz macros.
Feedback
Feedback can be put in place in each case to confirm the existence/non existence of the quiz
macro. This is shown beneath the general points evaluation.
The following settings are available for this:

Enable Feedback:
When this parameter is set, the following feedback entries are shown in the Quiz
Evaluation.

Quiz passed:
The inputted feedback text is displayed if the required result was achieved.

Quiz failed:
The inputted feedback text is displayed if the required result was not achieved.
234
08 2012
Documentation Macros
Documentation macros, which are included with the standard macroset, enable the
compilation of extensive process documentation in addition to the lesson. These special
macros are available to document the recorded lesson accordingly and to supplement the
content relevant to the documentation, as well as to structure the content. As a rule, they are
manually added to the event list after the automated recording is finished.
To do so, all you have to do is highlight the macro in the Thumbnail View after which the new
macro is to be inserted. The desired new macro is then inserted by selecting the relevant
macro from the menu Documentation -> Insert Documentation Macro. The new macro is now
positioned in the appropriate place in the thumbnail view.

Header Information

Transaction Code

Partial Screenshot

Note

Description

Heading

Highlight

Arrow

Page Break

Document Properties

Revision Entry

Input Values

Logon Values

HPQC Header
The structural order of the documentation is identical to the recorded lesson. For this reason,
the documentation macros have to be added into the thumbnail view in exactly the relevant
locations within the documentation.
Header Information
The macro Header Information allows you to insert a Title as well as a Description in the
document. The Title entered will be allocated the style sheet "Title" in the Word document.
The Description can contain a subtitle or additional text and is formatted with the style sheet
"Normal" in MS Word.
08 2012
235
Contents
The macro can be used for single documents that are not intended to be used as a master
document. In this case, a heading is generated without numbering (instead of the project
title). It is recommended that you hide the project title in the document since this would
appear over the title itself. This option can be deactivated from the global configuration dialog
box under Standard -> Settings -> Documentation -> Include project details.
Transaction Code
The Transaction code refers specifically to recording SAP applications and is created when
you select a transaction in SAP. The Transaction code is automatically parsed for the
documentation view. In addition to this, you can enter the Menu path for the transaction to be
able to find it in the SAP system menu.
When you generate documentation, a table with details of the transaction code, and the
menu path if available, is created.
Partial Screenshot
This macro enables the definition of a specific area of the current screenshot displayed in the
browser, which will be subsequently inserted at the specified position. As soon as the macro
is activated in the control bar, an editor window opens in order to define the screenshot area.
The full screen is selected as default. The selection is framed in red, which can be adjusted
by moving the eight anchors. The screenshot view can be scaled using the loupes. The loupe
in the middle resets the selection to full screenshot. To accept the partial screenshot, you
must click on the green tick to confirm that you have completed the changes. But the
recording can also be cancelled by clicking on the red X.
You may add a description of the screenshot to serve as a caption in the documentation in
Title. When no caption has been entered, a consecutive image numbering system will be
used in the documentation. Screenshot Position enables an additional specified area of the
screenshot to be used in addition to the already generated screenshot. The option Show
Actions allows that subsequent actions in the documentation are displayed on the partial
screenshot instead of the last macro New Page. Screenshot Border adds a white frame
around the screenshot, the frame is defined in pixels. Both the color and width of the frame
can be customized in the main settings.
Via the command Manual Crop the screenshot can be edited. The ScreenshotPosition
therefore does not have to be entered manually.
Note:
Please make sure that the right screenshot is displayed in the browser window before using
this macro, because it makes a screenshot of the actual browser window and not the last
screenshot of the lesson before the macro was inserted.
Note
This macro inserts a highlighted text box at a selected position in the documentation. The text
box can be selected from four different types, each represented by a different icon:
236
08 2012
Remark
Tip
Info
Warning
The desired text is entered and formatted in the corresponding text field in the HTML Editor.
Images are found in the resource Configuration/Styles of your actual Workarea. You may
replace these with your own images.
Note:
Only enter plain text into the text editor. HTML formatting and inserted images or
screenshots are not transferred completely into the documentation file, and can lead to
unexpected results.
Description
This macro inserts continuous text at the corresponding position of the documentation. It also
can edit and format the text in the HTML Editor. This editor can also be used to insert
screenshots or other images.
Note:
Formatting made in the editor follows HTML standards. Therefore, the space between two
paragraphs after the carriage return equals an empty line. In Word or PowerPoint the default
spacing is zero (depending on the application profile used); the next paragraph starts on the
next line without any additional spacing.
Heading
This macro starts a new section with the Title you entered as the heading. The result is a new
chapter on a new page in the documentation. The chapter uses the heading that was entered
Title and formats it in the Style entered under Type. This is where you have to enter the name
of the style (i.e.: Heading 2). The new chapter also influences chapter pagination of the
created documentation.
Highlight
The Highlight macro adds a scalable selection border to the preceding screenshot of the New
Page macro in the documentation. A description text must be entered. The border and the
description text are automatically inserted into the documentation with the next sequential
number in the current process step.
When the macro is being recorded semi-automatically, an editor window opens in which the
scalable selection border may be precisely positioned within the screenshot. The selection is
08 2012
237
Contents
framed in red, which can be adjusted over the eight anchors. The screenshot view can be
scaled using the loupes. The loupe in the middle sets the selection to the full screen. To
apply the frame, you must click on the green tick to confirm that you have completed the
changes. But the recording can also be cancelled by clicking on the red X.
The description text may now be revised and added to in the macro editor. In addition, the
numbering of the border can be manually defined, i.e.: which indexing Alignment should the
border have. This is automatically defined while the macro is being recorded, yet can be
changed according to your own wishes.
Positioning and alignment of the selection border can subsequently be revised in the editor at
any time using the Edit command. Therefore the Screenshot Position does not have to be
entered manually.
Arrow
The Arrow macro adds an arrow to the preceding screenshot of the New Page macro to call
attention to an element on the page.
When this macro is activated, an editor window opens in which the arrow can be precisely
positioned within the screenshot. The selection is framed in red, which can be adjusted using
the eight anchors.
Position the anchor exactly where you want the arrow to point. The direction of the arrow can
be rotated with the R key, or you may define its position later. The screenshot view can be
scaled using the loupes. The loupe in the middle resets the selection to the full screenshot.
To accept the position of the arrow, you must click on the green tick to confirm that you have
completed the changes. The recording may also be cancelled by clicking on the red X.
238
08 2012
Alignment
The Direction of the arrow can be modified in the Macro Editor using the Direction dropdown
list. Additionally, you can use the Edit command to open the Editor window where you can
modify the position and direction of the arrow on the screenshot.
Text
An additional explanation about the arrow or object to which the arrow is pointing can be
entered in the Text field. This is inserted below the screenshot when generating
documentation. An arrow symbol in front of the text establishes the connection to the arrow
on the screenshot.
Page Break
This macro inserts a page break in the created documentation. It does not have other
configurable parameters.
Document properties
The document properties macro assigns contents to field functions. This requires defining
these field functions in the template.
In the macro you can now assign the designated content to the field function. In order to do
so insert the field function contained in the template under Name. Define the content which is
to be displayed in the Value field.
Defining a field function in Word
A field function in Word is defined as follows:
1. Open the template the field function is supposed to be inserted into.
2. Now open the document properties and navigate to the Adjust tab.
3. Insert the field function into the Name field and the corresponding content into the
Value field. The content can be replaced by the macro.
08 2012
239
Contents
4. Confirm the dialogue with OK.
5. Then insert the field function into the template under Insert -> Field....
Select as a field DocProperty and as a Field property your defined field function.
6. Now save your template.
Note:
If you insert the Document properties macro for a BPP or Audit & Compliance document in
your tutorial the field functions which are contained in the particular templates are read out
automatically and displayed in the macro editor.
Generation settings
The settings in the macro editor determine in which documentation type the documentation
macro is displayed. In order to do so display the Extended settings and activate the particular
type.
Note:
Please note that the variables cannot be executed in HTML documents as these field
functions are Word specific.
Note:
The Document properties can only be output for single documents as they relate to the
corresponding document templates. Avoid the use of this macro in a master document for
this reason.
Revision entry
The Revision entry macro documents modifications in processes. In order to do so a table is
created when the document is generated which displays the following contents:

Revision date:
Indicates the revision date

Revision:
Allows describing the revision

Revision ID:
Allows defining a reference number for the particular revision

revised by:
Indicates by whom the revision was made
A revision entry is specified with a macro. If several revision entries are to be created as a
revision history, individual macros are to be grouped below one another for this purpose.
They are listed in the table when exported to a document.
Generation settings
The settings in the macro editor determine the documentation type the documentation macro
is displayed in. In order to do so display the Extended settings and activate the particular
type.
240
08 2012
Central settings
Settings for the macros can be defined in the master configuration dialog under Default ->
Settings for every document type in the Revision history area:

Hide in Project Content:
Defines whether the macros within the project document are to be displayed in the
position inserted in the project or displayed as a fragment in any position of the
document.

Sorting:
Defines the sort order of the table if several revision entries have been created.
Entry values
The Entry values macro creates a table including all available entries of the Insert text
macros in a project. As a result they can e.g. be clearly subdivided at the beginning of a
document to make them directly available in a work process.
The following columns can be defined to display them:

Field name

Value

Bubble text

ROC

Description
Activate the particular option in the macro editor to display them.
Generation settings
The settings in the macro editor determine the documentation type the documentation macro
is displayed in. In order to do so display the Advanced settings and activate the particular
type.
Input values as fragments
Instead of this macro, you can also insert the input values as documentation fragments. You
can make the respective settings for the documentation type you want in the master
configuration dialog.
Logon values
The Logon values macro allows creating a table including the necessary data requested by a
process to log on to the particular system.
The following definitions can be made:

User ID
In this column the ID or ID number of the user can be defined.

Role
In this column the role of the user, e.g. administrator, learner etc. is established.

Application
In this column the application or system to log on to is defined.
08 2012
241
Contents

View
In this column the corresponding application page or view, which has to be selected
for the process, can be defined.
Generation settings
The settings in the macro editor determine the documentation type the documentation macro
is displayed in. In order to do so display the Extended settings and activate the particular
type.
The Standard Macroset Macro Editor
The display in the standard macroset macro editor is divided into different sections. The
parameters are grouped into subcategories, depending on the complexity and number of
parameters in the macro.
Moving the mouse cursor over a parameter's identifier unhides an explanation about the
parameter in the yellow field at the foot of the macro editor.
A subcategory can be opened or closed using minimizing and expanding icons at the
beginning of the title line. The corresponding setting applies to the display of all macros in a
project.
As a rule, the logical parameter allocation found in a specific subcategory is identical
throughout all macros. The number of parameters displayed depends however on the macro,
since only those parameters relative to the macro are displayed. This relates also to the
subcategory itself. Should there be no parameters in a specific subcategory, then these will
not be displayed.
In macros that contain bubbles, HTML Editors for bubbles content are displayed in the main
area beside the other main parameters to enable immediate check and revision.
While editing a project the macro editor offers a button for showing and hiding additional
parameters for an object in the editor. The advanced parameters are mainly interesting for
advanced users who need more detailed possibilities to edit the recorded content of a project.
242
08 2012
The field name and field icon parameters
The Field Name and Field Icon parameters are present in all recording macros describing an
action. If a control is recorded, the Producer inserts the name in the Field Name parameter
and the screenshot of the action that has been carried out in Field Icon.
The contents of both parameters are used for the bubble text when automatically generating
the text modules and inserted at an appropriate point in the text.
Altering values
It may in certain circumstances be necessary to alter the name or screenshot of the
parameters. For example, this will be the case if a control in an application has changed but it
is not worth ReRecording a lesson.
Any change to the parameters is automatically incorporated in the bubble texts forDemo
mode and Practice mode.

You can change a name by making an input in the text box. This will automatically
amend the associated bubble text.

You can use the function Replace image…
function to alter the screenshot.
Clicking on the button opens an option menu offering you functions for creating or
inserting a screenshot. Select the appropriate method.
Once the screenshot has been altered, it will also appear in altered form in the bubble
text.
How to update a field icon
If changes have been made to the highlights on a screenshot, it may be necessary to modify
its field icon as well. You can do so by clicking on the option Update Field Icon
in the
Macro Editor. An editing window will then appear in which you can make the necessary
changes to the icon. Drag the highlight to the desired position and confirm by clicking on OK.
Subcategory Bubble
All further parameters are listed in the Bubble subcategory, which are used for the display of
bubbles created by macros that are not displayed in the upper main area level. As a rule,
08 2012
243
Contents
these parameters are automatically defined while recording. Only when a macro is manually
inserted must these parameters be manually defined so that the macro functions properly.
For most of the action macros the settings for bubbles in Demo mode and Practice mode are
located in two separate categories; Demo Bubble and Practice Bubble. It provides the
possibility to define different appearances for the bubble in the different modes.
A different text style used for the display of text in your bubbles may be selected under
Textstyle. Five styles are available from A through E. These can be found in the regarding file
for each mode (bubble_demo.css, bubble_uebung.css, bubble_test.css and
bubble_praxis.css) in the Configurations/Styles resource in the current Workarea. In addition,
bubble dimensions in pixels as well as bubble duration (in seconds) can be defined here.
In Type you can select a different bubble type than Standard in case you defined additional
types with the Bubble Type Editor. The default is always Standard if you did not define
special settings for a certain kind of macro in the central configuration dialog.
The definitions for the bubble macro Alignment and Position are also found here.
The option Translate Manually option ensures that customized bubble content is not replaced
by text automatically generated by Automated Translation or a ReRecording. The options are
activated as soon as the contents of a bubble is edited manually or is altered by the function
Bubble Search & Replace. In this case the contents can be exported in a word file by Export
Translatable in order to be translated manually by a translator.
Subcategory Documentation
The macro parameters required for documentation creation are found in the subcategory
Documentation.
244
08 2012
You may define over the Show In Documentation option whether this macro is to be taken
into consideration during the creation of documentation. Disabling this parameter makes it
possible to hide certain, specific actions described by macros in the documentation.
The Show in Process setting can be used to activate or deactivate a topic for output to the
process sequence of documentation.
Screenshot Position shows which area of the screen was used for the screenshot. As a rule,
you should not need manually to edit this value.
There are even more parameters available for the New Page macro. As Heading in
Documentation allows the use of the Topic Name to be used as the heading in the
documentation. Screenshot Border puts a border at your defined pixel width around the
screenshot. The standard color is white. You may however choose a different general color in
the Standard Macroset Configuration Dialog.
Subcategory Rerecord
The subcategory Rerecord contains parameters that Producer requires for an automated
ReRecording.
The option Interactive means that when a recording is being repeated, the Producer will stop
at this macro and manual recording of the macro will resume. Automatic ReRecording will
continue thereafter. This option is particularly important at those points in the project where it
is known that the desired object for the action to be recorded is to be found in another
position or a different object for the recording must be selected.
The parameters Element Type and Click Position should as a rule not be manually changed.
Subcategory Advanced
The subcategory Advanced contains the parameter Jump Target. This are required for the
creation of tree structures within a lesson. For the exact application of this parameter please
refer to Specifying Jump Targets within the Lesson in these online help.
Subcategory Control
The parameters governing how a control is displayed and executed in the lesson can be
defined in the Control subcategory.
The Position and size parameter defines how a control is orientated in the screen view in
relation to the upper left-hand corner as well as the width and height of the control. The Edit
button can be used to open an editing dialog box in which the parameter values can be
edited.
Various individual parameters are available for the different recording macros describing an
action.

The color and text design of the Text input macro can be defined. It can also be
defined whether the text entry is to be portrayed as a password.

For the Click on link macro it is possible to define both the cursor type and the state of
the button when it is clicked.

For the checkbox macro it is possible to define both the cursor type and the type of
checkbox, whether the latter is to be used as a radio button.
Please refer to the yellow help boxes in the Producer Macro Editor for additional information
about the individual parameters.
08 2012
245
Contents
The Navigation Macroset

Display context Assistant

Display Process Assistant

Application Context

Screen Context

Click Link

Input Text

Select Single

Radio / Checkbox

Explanation

Active Area

Additional ID

Included Navigation

Process Step

Process End
Process Step
The Process Step macro defines the individual process steps for the process. This macro can
be used to define the process sequence. This macro is found at the beginning of a topic.
The name of the process step is defined in the Name field. This can be selected in the Next
Process Step macro.
Process End
The macro is used in the process wizard and displays information at the end of a completed
process. The process can also be restarted to use different entries by clicking a button. The
macro is usually found in the first topic under the Display macro.
If you move the macro under a page context, the bubble is only displayed for this context. In
this case, we recommend deactivating the option to repeat the process and only display
information in the bubble.

Text:
You can enter the text to be displayed in the bubble in the text box. The text box is
preset with a default text.

Restart button:
When this option is activated, a button appears in the bubble that can be used to
246
08 2012
repeat a process. This makes it possible to carry out a process again with different
entries.
Manually inserting a process end
Use the Insert Process End function on the toolbar to manually insert the macro. You can
place the macro in the first topic to display it at the end of a process or for an individual topic.
After the function is selected, a text box appears where you can define the text to be
displayed. Click Ok to confirm the dialog.
Editing the bubble
You can select the bubble type and position the bubble on the screen using Edit Bubble.
The bubble style can also be changed in the main configuration dialog under Navigation ->
Global Macro-Parameter. The Style option is available in the Bubble Process End area for
this purpose.
Subcategory Next Process Step
The subcategory Next Process Step defines the process flow based on the process steps.

Action:
Defines the action from which the next process step is jumped to.

Process step:
Defines the process step to be jumped to.

Alternative Step 1-3:
Defines alternative process steps for the process sequence.
If it is not possible to jump to a defined process step because the application page is
not available, the defined alternative steps are jumped to one after the other. If no
application page is found, the process wizard terminates.

Step on Same Page:
This option defines that the next process step is on the same page as the current one.
This prevents fast identification of the application page.
This action should only be deactivated when the defined Alternative Steps do not
reference other application pages.
08 2012
247
Contents
Producer Interface
This chapter describes the structure of the Producer. This involves going into the Producer
interface's different areas and functions.
Program Window
The program window switches between two main views: The first view is the Project Explorer,
which is used to edit the currently selected Workarea. The second view is the Project Editor,
which is used to edit an open project or book page in the Book Page Editor.
The Project Explorer and the open projects are arranged as tabs below the toolbars. The tab
of the Project Explorer is always located on the left.
The tab of the project which was opened last is always located right beside the tab of the
Project Explorer.
In case there are more projects open than can be displayed in the tab bar, the invisible
projects can accessed using the pull-down menu on the right side of the tab bar.
In the tabs you will find a button with an X which can be used to close the corresponding
project.
A context menu is opened by right-clicking on one of the tabs. This can be useful when you
wish to close a project, close all projects or close all projects except the one you are working
on.
248
08 2012
In addition, the projects can be accessed via the menu Window.
Depending on if you are working in the Project Explorer or the Project Editor, the menus and
tool bars change to provide the necessary tools, depending on the current context.
Project Explorer
The Project Explorer serves to organize the lessons in a Workarea. The Project Explorer
window is divided into two areas. These are the Workarea organization structure on the lefthand side, and the object properties on the right-hand side.
08 2012
249
Contents
The structure built for the Workarea within the Project Explorer is also the structure displayed
later on in the library of the published Workarea.
Project Administration in the Tree Structure
The display name of the Workarea is displayed in the header above the tree structure for
easier orientation. The Filter administration is located right below. Filters can be used to
differentiate between views in a Workarea.
250
08 2012
The display name and the path to its location are displayed in the root of the Workarea.
The resources used in this Workarea can be viewed in the upper part of the tree. The
administration of the resources is explained the related chapter of this help file.
The individual objects in the Workarea can be edited directly in the tree structure. The project
file, the lessons generated in their various modes and the documentation files that have been
generated appear for each project there. The following actions are possible:

Using drag & drop (moving with the mouse pointer by holding the left button and then
releasing it), any of the projects of the Workarea can be sorted, regrouped and
moved. The objects belonging to a project (DPRs, lessons, etc.) cannot, however, be
moved from one project to another.

If you hold the Shift key while dragging and dropping, the object, or project, and all of
its content will be copied to the chosen location instead of being moved. This means
that the original will not be deleted.

In order to change the display name of an object in the library, you need to give it two
single clicks separated by a short interval (not a double-click). The display name can
then be edited directly. It will also be changed accordingly in the file structure of the
Workarea.

The Del key can also be used to delete projects.

These and more features are also available in the context menu by right-clicking
above the corresponding project.
Dependencies between objects and resources
Projects and book pages use specific resources, such as styles and configurations, for
display and execution purposes. In Producer you have a certain selection of resources and
their use can differ from object to object. In the Project Explorer you can visualize the
08 2012
251
Contents
resources used by a project or book page. This is useful when exporting archives to identify
existing dependencies and thus allow for the output of required resources.
Right click to select a project or book page, and then select Dependencies in the context
menu. A dialog box showing you all resources used then appears.
Object Editor in the Project Explorer
The Object Editor allows you to edit the settings for an object selected in the project explorer.
Information on the object as well as the current settings are displayed in the editor. In
addition, actions are displayed in the Editor's heading that can be used for the selected
object.
Edit object parameters
Some of these parameters can be edited directly and are the same for all objects:
Display name
Display name is the name under which a lesson is shown in Project Explorer, the library and
the documentation.
Hidden
This option will allow you to hide an object in the library. It can also be used to hide objects
when generating global documentation or when publishing a workarea.
library autostart
The library autostart parameter allows a particular mode, book page or document to be
started or opened automatically when selecting a lesson in the library. This function is useful,
for example, if only one mode is to be displayed in the library for a lesson or else to highlight
a particular mode or particular document. When the mode has been terminated or the
document closed, the user is free to select the project content as usual.
This function can also be defined for groups, for example in order to display a document or
book page when selecting the group.
To select an object, click on the Edit
button. A dialog displaying the project modes and
available documents will then open. Select the corresponding object and confirm by clicking
on OK. The selection will now be displayed in the text field of the setting.
If you would like to remove an assignment after you have made it, you can do so via the
Remove
button.
Keywords
You can specify keywords for an object in the Keywords parameter. The student can use
these to search for specific learning content in the library or in the book reader.
The Keywords parameter can be unhidden by means of the advanced functions. To define a
number of search terms, they should be entered separated by a semicolon (e.g.:
search_term1; search_term2).
Preview
The Preview displays a thumbnail view of imported graphic images or generated book pages.
Description
In Description, you can edit a descriptive text, which will be shown later in the library,
together with the object information. Formatting can be also applied by using the buttons
above the entry field. Besides the usual text attributes, you can decide on the alignment of
the text and choose whether to have it displayed as a list. Using the corresponding buttons,
you can add screenshots and other images to the text in order to illustrate the description.
252
08 2012
Maximum Score and Required Score for Lessons
To evaluate the learning success in Test mode within an LMS (Learning Management
System), the Maximum Score and the Required Score can be specified in Project Explorer for
the project.
To do this, enter the corresponding percentages for the project concerned in the Subcategory
LMS of the Object Editor. The project must be selected in the tree structure. The preset
values are 100 and 80. The values entered are used later on by the Start Lesson macro to
calculate the numeric values for the Maximum Score and the Required Score for the lesson.
Insert a file
In addition to the learning content and documentation that has been created, you can insert
other files. The Insert file function in the Producer is available to you for this purpose. For
example, these files can be Word or PDF files containing additional or general information but
images and media files are also possible.
This is how you insert a file:
1. In Project Explorer, select an object in your tree structure.
2. In the object editor header you will find the Insert file function. Click on it.
3. Select the file that you want in the open dialog and click on Open.
The file is inserted in the last place within the object.
After they have been inserted, the files integrated in this way can be selected both in the
Project Explorer and the library and can also be inserted in book pages.
Note:
If you insert a Word document, it is integrated along with everything else when a master
document is created. Please therefore ensure that the document is hidden, if necessary,
before a master document is generated.
Tip:
Instead of using the function to insert files, you can also drag and drop them to the Project
Explorer. This inserts the file in the currently selected object.
Updating a file
An imported file can be re-imported and updated by clicking on Update file. The Producer
accesses the original file location – this is the path that was entered and saved upon
importing the file under the setting Original path.
The setting Last Import displays the date and time that the file was last imported so that you
can verify whether the file is up-to-date.
Tip:
This option is only displayed if the original file is available. Otherwise, you can import a new
file by clicking on the option Replace file.
Central Workarea
If a Central Workarea is selected, the path is shown here. In addition, the path is shown
together with the path of the local Workarea in the header of the tree view. Please read the
chapter Central Workarea in this help file.
08 2012
253
Contents
Displaying the Workarea in the library
A library can be displayed in the browser window by clicking the button Open as library
it should look similar to the screen shot below:
;
Filters defined for the Workarea are also relevant for the published Workarea.
Project Editor
The project editor can be used to record, create and edit projects. The project editor displays
macros, settings and screenshots as well as specific macro set functions.
The project editor‟s main components are as follows:
1. Menus and toolbars
You will find more detailed information on the menus under the section Menu
overview
2. Thumbnail view
3. Topic view
4. Macro editor
Attention:
Projects that have been edited in the project editor in the topic view cannot be used in the
Producer versions without this view. In order to view the topic, new project configurations
are required in order to prevent any errors from occurring. Furthermore, objects will be
deleted that are inserted on a screendump without a macro.
To use the Project Editor without the topic view, enter the expert feature no_wysiwyg=1; in
the appropriate area of the central configuration dialog.
Navigation in the Project Editor
An alternative and user-friendly way to navigate in the project editor is by using the mouse's
scroll wheel and the keyboard. This facilitates scrolling up and down in the work area and
alternating between objects from the Topic View. In addition, the keyboard allows you to
easily jump between topics and select macros. The following shortcuts can be used:

Pos 1: jumps to the first topic

End: jumps to the last topic
254
08 2012

Image up / image down: alternates between the topics or macros, depending on the
currently selected object.
Thumbnail View
The thumbnail view sequentially displays the learning topics with their screenshots and
corresponding macros. When selecting a macro, the corresponding screenshot is displayed
in the topic with its highlights and bubbles, and the macro settings are displayed in the macro
editor.
Simply click on the object you wish to edit. The selected object will turn orange and the
corresponding settings and actions will be displayed in the macro editor.
The display size of the screenshots can be adjusted using the plus and minus keys or the
numbers 1 to 5 on your numeric keypad of your keyboard.
Changing the macro or topic order using drag & drop
The order of the macros and topics in thumbnail view can be changed using drag & drop. You
can even move one or more macros within a topic or all topics as a whole as well as assign
new positions to one or more topics in the lesson.
For this purpose, select one or more macros/topics. To do so, click on the objects. To be able
to select multiple macros or topics, hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard while clicking on
the objects. Drag your selection using the left mouse button to the corresponding position and
then release the mouse button.
Note:
Changing the order of topics or macros always results in a subsequent change to the lesson
itself. For this reason you should make sure the lesson is still a coherent unit.
Icon for Show in Documentation
Every macro that has the Show in Documentation option has a small icon in the upper righthand icon. This shows the status of the option and thus also the macros to be included for the
documentation. If the option is deactivated, this is also visible in the icon.
Topic View
The topic view displays the screenshot of the new page macro and allows you to edit the
highlights and bubbles for the control element directly on the screenshot. Here you can also
add additional macros via the toolbar and position them as desired.
The Topic View Display
From the Topic View, different views can be activated to facilitate editing and positioning
objects. A variety of options are available from the toolbar:

The Modes button allows you to switch over to selected bubbles for editing purposes,
allowing you to preview the bubbles in each of the different modes. This setting will
have an effect on the activated preview mode.
08 2012
255
Contents


Edit Demo Mode

Edit Practice Mode

Edit Test Mode

Edit Concurrent Mode
For topics with more than one macro, all bubbles can also be viewed simultaneously.
This facilitates positioning bubbles and ensures that other areas in the application are
not hidden by the bubbles by accident.

Show Bubbles for Topic

Show Bubble for Macro
How to position objects
There are two ways to position objects:

Via Drag & Drop

Via a keyboard using the arrow keys
For more information on how to edit highlights and bubbles for recorded macros, please refer
to the corresponding section of this user‟s guide.
Macro Editor
All the settings for the macro selected in the thumbnail view are displayed in the macro editor
and can be directly edited there as well. At the top of the editor, there are additional options
for enhancing your macros.
The macro's settings are divided into application-specific categories which can be opened
and closed by clicking on the plus and minus symbol. The green button located in front of the
setting's name indicates whether the setting is active or inactive. By clicking on the setting, a
description will be displayed at the bottom of the macro editor.
In the Title toolbar, you will find the option Layout selection, which allows you to switch the
macro editor‟s view modes. Here you have the choice between standard and advanced
views, in which the settings that are used less frequently can be hidden or made visible
depending on your needs.
Please refer to the macro reference section for descriptions of the individual macros and their
corresponding settings.
Selecting multiple macros
If you would like to edit a specific setting for a type of macro, it is now possible to select
several macros at one time, which will display the common setting to be edited for all the
macros at once. This feature will save you time, eliminating the need to manually select each
individual macro. From the Edit menu, simply click on the option Select Macros by type...
If the settings vary for the selected macros, a note will automatically appear on the screen.
From here, you can save the setting, edit it for all the macros or deactivate it. To make
changes to the setting, click on the button in front of the name. This will open a menu with the
options Determine joint value and Delete values. Select the desired action and edit the value
as desired.
Insert a comment
256
08 2012
You can enter a general comment to assist the editing in the Comment field. This is displayed
in the thumbnail view in place of the macro text.
You can amend the displayed comment as follows:

Comment preceded by '+': Comment is appended to the macro text in brackets

Comment preceded by '*': Comment is inserted in brackets in front of the macro text

Comment preceded by '/': The comment is not displayed, only the macro text
Macro List
In the left-hand part is the event list, which is activated via the menu View and in which
individual macros are listed chronologically. The beginning of each topic is indicated in the list
by a violet marker with the number of the topic.
In order to show the parameters of a macro to the right of the list in the macro editor and then
edit them, this macro must be selected in the list, which is done simply with a single mouse
click. If a macro is marked in the macro list, you can move to the next or the previous macro
using the arrow keys on the keyboard. Several macros can be highlighted at the same time.
In this case, the macro editor displays the parameters that all of the selected macros have in
common and which can therefore be at the same time for all of these macros.
History
The History can be viewed as the memory of the Producer. It chronologically documents all
actions that are taken, starting with the opening of the project. This allows the user to return
to any stage in the editing of the document, going back to the opening or creation of the
project. With a simple click on the History list item, it is possible to directly undo or redo one
or more actions. To provide the user with a better overview, the actions taken since the
document was last saved are marked with a plus. The history is used as the basis for the
Undo and Redo commands in the Edit menu.
Book Page Editor
The Book Page Editor is where the book pages are edited. This is where you can define the
book pages' design and create the content.
After a book page has been created in the Project Explorer, it is opened in the Book Page
Editor. You also have the option of opening the Book Page Editor in the Project Explorer by
double clicking on a book page.
08 2012
257
Contents
The Book Page Editor is broken down into the following areas:
1. Toolbars
In the toolbar you will find a complete object overview from which you can insert the
objects. Functionality is also provided for editing the objects and book page.
2. Object editor
The object editor is where you can define the individual objects' properties. To this
end, when you select an object you are offered corresponding parameters that are
subdivided into various areas.
3. Book Explorer
The Book Explorer depicts the content of a book, its book pages and groups. Doubleclicking selects a book page for editing, which is then opened in a new tab.
4. Object list
The object list provides you with an overview of all the objects inserted on the book
page.
5. Book page view
The book view is where the book page is shown for editing. Select the inserted
objects to edit them. You can use drag and drop to place the objects in the desired
position.
The book view operates on the “what you see is what you get” (WYSIWYG) principle.
That means that your book page will be displayed in the book reader or library in the
same way you created it.
In order to be able to test the objects, select the Preview function in the toolbar. The
Producer will then activate the corresponding functionality, such as launching a
mode.
Object list
The object list provides you with an overview of all the objects inserted on the book page.
You will find the book page's background in the topmost position. Select this entry to edit the
background.
The objects that have been inserted are itemized in a list and appear in the same order as
258
08 2012
they do on the respective level. Selecting an object from the list will highlight this object on
the book page. It is now ready to be edited.
Changing an object‘s level
To position an object on a different level in a book page, simply drag & drop it to the desired
position and level.
Hiding objects
From the list of objects, you can define whether objects should be hidden or visible on the
book page. This is an important setting to remember to use with actions. An Eye icon is
displayed for each object, indicating its current status: Show or Hide. To change an object's
status, simply click on the desired status icon.
HTML Editor
The HTML editor allows you to create and edit text for various learning content. The HTML
editor can be accessed via the Producer from the project explorer, project editor or the book
page editor. Text is created in HTML format using a WYSIWYG display.
The editor contains a variety of options for editing and formatting text. These options are
displayed in a pop-up window that can be opened by clicking on a text field. The editor can
also be repositioned on the screen via drag & drop, and the size can be adjusted by pulling
on the sides and corners.
Attention:
The HTML editor is entirely HTML-based and does not support any additional integrated
script. Such script will be automatically deleted upon saving it in order to avoid problems with
displaying and using the learning content.
If you would like to use Java script in your html editor, please contact your SAP consultant
for assistance.
Inserting text and images
When inserting copied text or images into the HTML editor, in some cases it may be possible
that the formatting is displayed incorrectly. The HTML editor is equipped with several options
to prevent this from happening. Copy your text or image and click on the right mouse button
in the HTML editor. The context menu option Paste in format will appear with the following
options:
For inserting text:

Formatted text – the formatting will be preserved

Unformatted text - removes any existing formatting
For inserting images:

Formatted text – the formatting will be preserved

Bitmap image – inserts the image as a bitmap
Tip:
Since the HTML Editor displays text in HTML coding, a new paragraph (<p>...</p>) will be
created by clicking on the Enter key, which should normally give you larger line spacing. If,
however, you would like to create a line break (<br />), then click on the keys Shift + Enter.
08 2012
259
Contents
Features of the HTML Editor
The toolbar offers basic functions for editing text and adding links and objects to your project:

Style sheet
A list will appear with predefined formats for paragraphs, headings, lists, etc.

Font type
A list will appear with all the available fonts that are installed on your PC.

Font size
A list will appear with predefined values for various font sizes

Undo / Redo
This option allows you to undo and redo the last action performed.



Bold / Italic / Underlined
Remove formatting
This option will reset the highlighted text back to its original format.
Align left / Centered / Align right

Ordered list / Unordered list

Outdent / Indent

Insert object – see chapter

Font color – see chapter

Search text – see chapter

Toggle background color
This option switches the background color from yellow to grey in order to better view
and edit text with lighter or darker font colors as needed.

Design /
Source
This option allows you to switch between editing text and HTML source text.

OK
By clicking on OK, the changes will be saved and the HTML Editor will close.

Cancel
This option closes the HTML Editor without saving any changes.

Maximize height / Restore down height
This option enlarges the window vertically to adjust itself to the screen size or resets
the Editor to its original size.

Maximize window / Restore down window
This option minimizes or maximizes the Editor's window size.
260
08 2012

Close
This will close the HTML Editor. If changes have been made, a dialog box will appear
reminding you to save your changes.
How to insert a screenshot or image
By clicking on the option Insert object
, screenshots can be created from various views
and then inserted into a bubble. The following options are available for defining a screenshot:

Insert screenshot of window – by moving the mouse over the screen display, specific
areas will be recognized and outlined in red. Click on the mouse button to select the
desired outlined area.

Insert screenshot of object – by moving the mouse over the screen display, specific
objects will be recognized and outlined in red. Click on the mouse button to select the
outlined object.

Insert screenshot of area – with the mouse, pull the red frame over the desired area
and release the mouse button.
After selecting the area, an editing window will appear where you can make adjustments as
needed. To complete the process, click on Confirm selection. The dialog box will close and
the screenshot will be inserted into the HTML editor.
The option Insert Object allows you to insert graphic images. The following options are
available:

Insert image file...
A dialog box will open from which you can select an image from a data medium of
your choice. Select the desired image and click on Open (in the Editor) to insert the
image.

Insert image from workarea...
A dialog box will open, displaying the contents of the workarea. Select the desired
image and click on OK (in the Editor).
Inserting a link
You can insert a link into your text in order to call up a website or an object from your
workarea. The Producer provides you with several editing options for customizing your link.
Note:
If you have linked content from the Workarea with the bubble, then take care when
publishing or issuing archives that you issue the lesson you have linked to as well.
Select the Insert object
function in the HTML Editor. In the open menu, click on Insert
link... A dialog will then open in which you can designate the link. To do so, select one of the
buttons:

Current Object:
Displays the current project's modes and documents.

Workarea:
Displays all of the Workarea's modes and documents.

Free:
You can use this option to define a link to a web page.
08 2012
261
Contents

Shortcut:
Shows linked content in the tree structure for direct selection. Up to five links are
displayed here.

Actions:
Actions can be defined for controlling the trainer or book reader using this option.
If you have selected learning content or a link, then confirm the dialog with OK. The link
destination is now displayed as a link in the bubble.
Inserting a link into a topic
If you are working within a project, you can insert a link within the project to jump to another
topic.
In the HTML editor, choose the option Insert object. Then click on the option Insert topic link...
A dialog box will appear. Select the topic you would like to have the link be associated with.
Confirm by clicking on OK.
Importing files
When you select Current Object you are given access to the Import... button. Select this
button to import a file into your project. This can be a document or audio file, for example. A
link with the file will be established automatically after it has been imported.
You can remove a selected file from the workarea by clicking the Delete button.
Open in a new window
The option Open in new window allows you to determine whether the object is to be opened
in the same lesson window or a new one. Activating the option opens the link destination in a
new window.
Selecting the option activates the Parameter button. This button displays a dialog in which
you can define properties for the new window.
Searching and filtering
Performing a search or selecting a filter in the header of the dialog makes it easier to find
content in a complex tree structure. The respective content is displayed directly when a
keyword is entered. You can also start the search by clicking the Search button. The filter list
contains filters that have been created for selection. If you want to reset the filters, select (no
filter).
New window options
If you have activated the option Open in new window you can use the Parameter button to
call a dialog containing options for displaying the window. You have the following options at
your disposal:
Position
The values Position from top and Position from left are used to determine the distance of the
new window from the top and left hand margin of the screen area. The values are stated in
pixels.
Size
The values Width and Height are used to define the size of the new window. The values are
stated in pixels.
The parameter full screen defines whether the window is to be opened in full screen view.
This requires the setting to be activated.
The parameter Resizable defines whether the window can be scaled. This requires the
parameter to be activated.
262
08 2012
Layout
You can have the following elements of the browser window displayed in the new window by
activating the relevant setting:

Address line

Menu bar

Status bar

Tool bar

Scrollbars
Searching for text strings
If there are longer and more complex text strings in the HTML editor, there is a text search
function to facilitate finding specific text strings. Click on the option Search text. A dialog box
will appear.
Dialog box for searching for text
A text field appears where you can enter one or more words to search for. The search
function has several options to choose from to quicken the search:

Match whole word only
If this option is deactivated, possible matches will be shown directly during the search.
If this option is activated, the results will be displayed only when the entire word is
found in the text.

Highlight all matches
If this option is activated, all the matches found will be highlighted. If this option is
deactivated, only the first match will be highlighted.

Match case
This defines whether the search should be case sensitive. If this option is activated,
the search function will only find exact matches. If this option is deactivated, capital or
lowercase letters are irrelevant for the search.
The buttons Next and Previous allow you to switch between the displayed results. If no
matches are found, a message will appear at the bottom of the dialog box.
Overview of supported HTML tags
The following HTML tags are supported by the HTML editor:
Attention:
If tags other than those listed here are used, they will be automatically deleted upon saving
the changes in your project. This is important because using tags that are not supported
could cause problems when displaying or using the learning content.
If you would like to use Java script in your html editor, please contact our SAP technical
support for assistance.
Description
Tags
Attribute
Text formatting
&lt;font>…&lt;/font>
Color: color=”…”
Size: size=”…”
Paragraph
08 2012
&lt;p>…&lt;/p>
Alignment:
align=”left,center,right”
263
Contents
Description
Tags
Text markup
italic: &lt;i>…&lt;/i>
Attribute
bold: &lt;b>…&lt;/b>
underlined: &lt;u>…&lt;/u>
line break
&lt;br />
Links
&lt;a>…&lt;/a>
Link target: href=”…”
Images
&lt;img />
Image source: src=”…”
Table
&lt;table>…&lt;/table>
Border: border=”…”
Table row
&lt;tr>…&lt;/tr>
Height: height=”…”
Table cell
&lt;td>…&lt;/td>
Alignment: align=”…”
Vertical alignment:
valign=”…”
Width: width=”…”
Background color:
background-color=”…”
Merge cells: colspan="..."
Color selection dialog box
The color selection dialog box allows you to define and customize your font colors. It can be
used in various parts of the Producer, such as in the HTML Editor, the Edit Bubble Types
Dialog box, the Book Page Editor, Macro Editor, etc. The dialog box can be opened by
clicking on Choose color... / Font color.
The following settings are available for defining the color values:

Color wheel
The color wheel contains a wide variety of shades that can be selected by simply
clicking on the desired color.

Brightness
The brightness control allows you to define the brightness of the color wheel or the
selected color.

RGB color value
The RGB color value allows you to define a color via an RGB color space.

HSV color value
The HSV color value allows you to define a color using an HSV color space.

Web colors
This option displays all web-compatible color values in the color wheel and in the
brightness control.

Hex – hexadecimal color value
The hexadecimal color value allows you to define a color using the RGB color space
as a hexadecimal value.

Picker
The Picker allows you to choose a specific color shade on the screen. Click on the
button and with the mouse button held down, drag the picker icon onto the desired
color shade. Release the mouse button to confirm the color value shown.
264
08 2012

New / Old
These two fields display the current (old) and the selected (new) color values. By
clicking on Old, the New color value will be removed and the value will be reset to its
original state.

Quick picks
This option displays 8 standard, predefined shades in two different brightness levels
for you to choose from.

Last used colors
This option displays the last 16 color shades that have been previously selected.
Toolbars
The toolbars in Producer allow you to access the most common menu commands by clicking
on the corresponding icon.
Moving the mouse over a button and leaving it there without clicking the mouse will cause a
tooltip to be displayed, which provides short, helpful information on the function of the tool.
The various toolbars can be shown or hidden by clicking on Toolbars in the View menu and
making a selection.
Status Bar
The status line comprises the following areas:
On the left is a button that, when clicked, displays a menu that lists all open browser windows
by name in order. To bring one of these windows to the front, simply click the corresponding
list item. To open a new browser window, click on New Internet Explorer. Close All closes all
open browser windows.
This is then followed by the area which shows which topic has been selected or whether a
macro was clicked on.
Recording bar for Recording
As soon as automated recording of applications is initiated by executing the Record
Application command located in the Action menu, a recording bar for recording applications
appears at the top of the screen.
The control bar has two main sections: the status section on the left and the controls on the
right. The status section shows if the user is expected to perform an action or if the Producer
is working on a recording in the background. In addition, supporting icons and text messages
are displayed:

If the recording feature has been activated but the recording has not yet been started,
the status section is yellow.
08 2012
265
Contents

If an application is being recorded and the user is required to perform an action, this
section is green. After an action has been performed (e.g. clicking on a menu), the
recording bar also shows what kind of element was detected with the action, as well
as the text that is automatically allocated to it in the bubbles in the lesson (Name,
Type, Value and Subtype).

If Producer is busy with an action in the background, the status area is red and
displays the message: busy. When this is displayed, no actions should be taken in the
application being recorded.
The controls for recording applications are on the right.
The Profile list box contains the list of applications for which an automatic application profile
exists. If the application is automatically detected, the correct application profile is
automatically selected and shown in the list. This box can also be used to switch between
application profiles manually.
Button
Explanation
Click on Record to begin recording the
process. Afterwards, it will pause itself.
Clicking on the Pause button will pause the
recording, which is useful, e.g., when
switching applications. It will then resume
recording (status Record).
Clicking on the button Stop will end the
recording and the macro Lesson End will be
inserted into the last topic.
The Undo button allows you to reset the
previous action made in a lesson. Please
note that the Undo function will only work with
the last change made to your project. You
cannot delete multiple actions.
Menu Insert
Insert Explanation
see chapter Inserting additional macros
during recording
Insert Screenshot
see chapter Inserting additional macros
during recording
266
08 2012
Menu Tools
In order to be able to edit a recorded control
while the recording is in progress, click on the
Edit control button in the recording bar once
the corresponding action has been
performed. This opens the control selection
dialog which can then be used to apply
changes. Once the changes have been
confirmed by clicking on Ok, recording can be
resumed.
The button Execute mouse actions / Do not
execute mouse actions defines whether a
control is to be recorded and executed in the
application or whether this is to be recorded
without an action.
Recording controls without executing actions
may make sense, for example, if a number of
controls on a page are to be recorded and
explained without quitting the application
page. This requires the button to be
deactivated.
The Choose Application button allows you to
reselect an application for recording or else
switch application. After selecting the button
click on the application to define the
application profile.
By clicking on Options, you are taken directly
to the Record tab, which is normally accessed
by clicking on the Producer Tools menu and
then on Options.
Clicking on the button Minimize will minimize
the recording bar and an icon will appear in
the Systray instead. Controlling the recording
can be carried out over the context menu. By
clicking on the icon, the recording bar will
return to its original size.
Clicking on the X will stop the recording. The
program will exit recording standby mode and
the recording bar will be hidden.
Recording bar for ReRecording
The control bar for ReRecording applications works analogously. The only difference is that
there are no icons for starting, pausing and stopping the recording. Instead, there is a single
icon for starting the ReRecording.
08 2012
267
Contents
Button
Explanation
Accept Control
If a control is not displayed correctly you can
directly rerecord it via the Show Control
function. Select the function and click on the
control.
This button opens the Step Preview. The step
preview displays the originally recorded topic,
allowing it to be replicated and the object
customized accordingly
The Rerecord button starts the ReRecording
process. The parameter dialog is then
opened.
Clicking on the Pause button will pause the
ReRecording session, which can useful, e.g.,
when switching applications. It will then
resume recording (status ReRecord).
Menu Insert
The Record Control button starts automated
recording. This allows additional steps to be
automatically recorded during ReRecording.
These are inserted in front of the current
topic. The ESC key terminates the recording
mode and ReRecording continues. This
function is available during interactive
ReRecording.
Clicking on the button Stop will end the
recording of further actions in order to
continue with the ReRecording. The button
will display the status Record control.
The button Insert Explanation allows you to
insert an explanation macro during the
ReRecording session.
Menu Tools
The Delete Control button offers the
opportunity to delete the currently selected
object. Then the ReRecording is resumed
using the following object in the tutorial.
The Skip Control button allows skipping a
recorded control if it does not need to be
taken into account for the ReRecording and
thus remains unmodified.
The Choose Application button allows you to
reselect an application for ReRecording or
else switch application. After selecting the
button click on the application to define the
application profile.
268
08 2012
Button
Explanation
By clicking on Options, you are taken directly
to the Record tab, which is normally accessed
by clicking on the Producer Tools menu and
then on Options.
Clicking on the button Minimize will minimize
the recording bar and an icon will appear in
the Systray instead. Controlling the recording
can be carried out over the context menu. By
clicking on the icon, the recording bar will
return to its original size.
Clicking on the X will stop the recording. The
program will exit recording standby mode and
the recording bar will be hidden.
08 2012
269
Contents
Menu Overview
This chapter describes the different functionality in the Producer menus. You will be given an
introduction to the Workarea and Central Workarea of the Producer and to editing and
managing resources and content.
Workarea Menu
The Workarea menu includes all the functions related to the general selection and
administration of Workareas and projects. In addition to selecting and creating Workareas, it
is possible to archive and import Workareas and projects, as well as open folders of the
projects most recently displayed in Windows Explorer.
Select Workarea...
By clicking on Select Workarea…, you can create a folder or select an existing one. All
projects are saved in that folder as long as the Workarea is active. This ensures that all
relevant learning content files and resources are saved in the proper hierarchical structure.
Note:
An already existing Workarea can only be selected. The resources in it can not be changed
from this dialog. To be able to change resources, select the Edit Configuration... function in
the Workarea -> Administration menu.
Note:
You must always select a Workarea. Projects can only be created if there is an active
Workarea.
Administration
The menu contains functions for the administration of the workarea.
Select Central Workarea…
This command registers the current local Workarea with a Central Workarea.
Note:
The registration cannot be reverted. It should be done very carefully.
The creation of a Central Workarea is reserved to the administrator, who must have the
feature activated in his installation of Producer.
To create a Central Workarea, activate the Activate administrative functions option in the
central configuration dialog. This option is located in the Application -> Central Workarea
category. Click on OK to confirm the setting.
If a local Workarea is registered with a Central Workarea, the additional menu Central
Workarea is available in the menu bar. It contains the commands related to exchanging
content with a Central Workarea.
270
08 2012
Note:
In order for several authors to use, a fast LAN (Local Area Network) infrastructure with high
bandwidth and low latency is required.
If the Central Workarea is accessed through a WAN connection (Wide Area Network), the
bandwidth (usually low) and high latency together with the SMB network protocol used by
Producer result in extremely long waiting times when performing remote actions on the
Central Workarea.
Edit Configuration…
The Edit Configuration... dialog exists to update the Workarea. This is useful, for example, if
you would like to use a Workarea from an older version of the Producer in the current
version.
The dialog will offer you the standard installation resources. The resources to be updated are
selected once the dialog has been opened.
The resource overview in the dialog corresponds to what is also available in the Project
Explorer. The resources comprise resource groups; each individual resource has a version
number. New versions are referred to as an upgrade , resources that are older than the
current version as a downgrade.
If a resource is already available in the latest version, then you are alerted to this by freshen.
Generally you can disregard this. Overwriting the current resource is helpful, for example, if a
resource was damaged during the work process.
You can now select all the resources or only those to be updated. After selecting the
resources, click on OK. These are then imported into the Producer.
08 2012
271
Contents
Export Archive…
This function creates an archive in the form of a DKP file (*.dkp). This allows you to transport
an entire workarea, individual learning content or resources simply and compactly.
This is how you create an archive:
1. Select the command Export Archive... from the Workarea -> Administration menu.
This will open a dialog for selecting the content for the archive you wish to create.
2. In the area on the left you will find all of the content and resources located in the
Workarea. These are selected by default.
To deselect the entire workarea, you need to deactivate the Workarea option. To
deselect the resources or content, deselect the relevant resource folder or topmost
group.
3. Compression type:
This parameter determines whether the files are to be compressed or not.
Compression is recommended to reduce the file size.
4. Max. size before splitting volumes:
The technical size limit for a DKP file is 4GB. The drop-down list allows you to define
a maximum volume size of the DKP files generated. Once an archive file's maximum
size has been reached, a new one will be created automatically. As many archive files
will be generated as are required to store the entire Workarea. This allows large
Workareas to be broken into a number of parts for transport, which can then be
spread across a number of DVDs or CDs, for example.
5. Click on OK to confirm the information in the dialog.
6. The dialog for specifying the destination path and filename will then open. Provide this
information as appropriate. Confirm the dialog by clicking on Save to create the
archive.
Import Archive…
You can insert an archive in the current Workarea using the Import Archive... command in the
Workarea -> Administration menu. This may be individual projects or customized resources,
for example.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the command Import archive... from the Workarea -> Administration menu.
2. Clicking on the command will open a dialog for selecting the archive. Select the file
and click on Open.
3. The archive content is displayed to you in an overview. You can select whether you
would like to import all the archive content or only a part of it.
Confirm the dialog by clicking on OK to insert the files in your Workarea.
Learning content inserted by importing the archive are filed as unreferenced objects and can
then be assigned to the project structure.
If the same resources or learning content already exist in the workarea, you are alerted to this
and asked whether they are to be overwritten or duplicated.
Older archive formats
In addition to the DKP archive format, you also have the option to import archives from older
versions of the Producer in CAB format (*.cab) for Workareas and resources as well as DPP
format (*.dpp) for an object archive. These files are migrated into the Workarea and
customized to the workarea's structure and technical implementation in such a way as not to
conflict with current content.
272
08 2012
Once learning content has been imported, it needs to be regenerated so that it can be played
back by the trainer.
Publish
This menu contains the commands for publishing a Workarea. It also contains the publishing
rules created by the author, which can be executed directly from the menu.
When publishing a Workarea, only elements needed to playback content are copied to a
target directory. Elements which are not necessary or parts of the Workarea which have been
masked by a filter are not copied to the target directory. This reduces and optimizes the
amount of files in the target Workarea.
Publish Directly
This command allows you to publish a Workarea or only specific parts of a Workarea. The
overview displays the Workarea in just the same way it is available in the Project Explorer.
This also takes account of the filter currently being applied to the Workarea in the Project
Explorer view.
Also note the details in the section Publishing a workarea directly.
Edit Publishing Rules
This is the dialog box where you create and manage publishing rules. A publishing rule is a
fixed view of the currently selected workarea of which a copy will be created as the
publishable workarea. The dialog lets you define the Name, Destination, Filter, Prefix and
Type for a rule. The rule then becomes available as a directly selectable item in the Workarea
-> Publish menu.
Also refer to the section Creating publishing rules.
Generate SCORM/AICC
This function creates corresponding files according to the SCORM and AICC standards for
importing content into an LMS (Learning Management System). For more information, please
read the chapter about creating SCORM/AICC-compatible packets.
Publish Documents
The Publish Documents... menu lets you export all the documentation available in a workarea
to a folder and thus deposit directly on a filesystem. On exporting the existing groups are kept
as the folder structure. The document filenames reflect the designations assigned in the
Project Explorer.
You can publish all the documents in the workarea, or just the documents belonging to a
group‟s projects. If you want to publish all the documents, select the Content group. If you
only want to publish the documents in a certain group, first select the group and then publish
the documents
New Group
This creates a new group in the Workarea under the item that is currently selected.
08 2012
273
Contents
New Project
The New Project icon will create a new project in the current workarea group that was
selected from the tree view in the project explorer.
After clicking on New Project from the workarea menu or the toolbar, a dialog box will appear.
You have the following options:

Project name
Enter a name for your project in this field. The default setting is the type of object with
an ID.

Template
This option allows you to use an existing project as a template for a new project.
Using predefined settings from an existing project will save you loads of time when
creating a new project.
You can select additional templates by clicking on Change... A dialog box will appear.
Select template for the current object or the entire workarea. Click on the option No
template if you do not wish to use any templates for your project.
If a template has already been used, this template will act as the default and will be
automatically selected upon creating a new project.
Tip:
You can make templates your default setting from the main configuration dialog box. Please
refer to the section on Templates for objects in the workarea for more detailed information.

Language
Here you can select a language for the automatically generated text for speech
bubbles that are created during the recording.

Type of project
This option defines the macro set to be used for creating simulations or navigations.

Use audio
This option allows you to create an audio project. You can assign audio files as well
as convert bubble text to text-to-speech. When you activate this option, the following
settings will appear:

Output audio format
Defines the audio format for playing a project.

Output audio format
Defines the audio format for editing a project.
Note:
It is also possible to convert a completed project into an audio project. To do so, go the Edit
menu in the project editor and choose the option Convert to audio project.

Save to the server
If you are using a central workarea, you can activate this option to save a new project
directly to the server and assign writing tokens to authors.
Confirm by clicking on OK and your project will be created and saved to the server. The
Producer will automatically switch to the project editor.
274
08 2012
Open Base Directory
This command opens the Workarea's base directory in Windows Explorer, which, in addition
to the project folders, contains the components of trainer needed to directly playback offline
lessons.
Open as library
Running this function generates a library of lessons based on the structure set up in the
Workarea and displays it in a new browser window. Only lessons that have not been set to
Hidden will be included in the library.
Exit
This command exits Producer.
Central Workarea Menu
This menu is only available if the local Workarea was registered with a Central Workarea via
the menu Workarea -> Administration -> Select Central Workarea…
Some of the specified entries are only used when working with the Manager and are not
required for a Central Workarea via a FileShare. A note draws attention to this fact.
Work offline (Manager only)
If the Manager is used to launch a Central Workarea this function allows the connection with
the Manager to be severed while work is in progress. The connection therefore only exists for
downloading objects and for saving objects on the server. While the connection is severed,
entries in the Central Workarea menu are grayed out.
Disconnect
The option Disconnect will completely disconnect a local workarea from a central workarea.
The workarea can then only be used locally. All existing connections to the workarea
(resources and objects) will be removed.
Check out Objects...
This command allows all of the objects contained in a Central Workarea to be downloaded to
the local Workarea. Selecting the command opens a list containing all the objects in the
Central Workarea. The objects that are not yet located in the local Workarea are selected.
Once the desired objects have been selected, they can be copied to the local Workarea using
the Check out Object function.
Save to server
This command saves the object currently selected in the Project Explorer to the Central
Workarea.
Update from server
This command updates the object that has just been selected in the Project Explorer with an
up-to-date copy of the object from the Central Workarea.
08 2012
275
Contents
Revert object...
This command replaces the local version of the object with the most recent version deposited
in the Central Workarea. This requires possession of the write permission for the object.
Start editing
This command acquires the write permission for the object selected in the Project Explorer
from the Central Workarea and updates the version available in the local Workarea. The
object can then be edited in the local Workarea.
An object for which no write permission is available is indicated by a red padlock on the
object icon. If you possess the write permission a green pencil appears on the object icon.
Note:
You can only acquire the write permission for an object if it has not already been checked
out by another author from the Central Workarea into his local Workarea.
Finish editing
This command relinquishes the write permission for the object selected in the Project
Explorer to the Central Workarea and saves the changes made in the local Workarea within
the Central Workarea.
The relinquished write permission is then symbolized on the object by a red padlock.
Change workflow...
This command allows an object's workflow to be edited. It opens a dialog box which can be
used to enter a comment and assign the object to another user. It is still possible to amend
the status, set flags and publish the object.
Add comment...
This command allows a comment to be made in respect of an object that has not yet been
saved in the Central Workarea.
Save all objects to server...
This command saves a number of local Workarea objects to the Central Workarea. It does so
by opening a dialog in which the available objects can be selected.
Update all objects from server...
This command updates the objects available in the local Workarea with an up-to-date copy
from the Central Workarea. It does so by opening a dialog displaying the objects contained in
the Central Workarea which are to be updated. These objects can then be selected and
copied to the local Workarea using the Update from the Server button.
Start editing all objects...
This command checks out the write permission for the objects available in the local
Workarea. It does so by opening a dialog displaying the objects contained in the Central
Workarea. These objects can then be selected and the objects' write permission checked out
using the Commence Editing button. This involves copying the current versions of the objects
to the local Workarea.
276
08 2012
The objects for which write permission has been checked out are indicated by a green pencil
on the object icon.
Note:
You can only acquire the write permission for an object if it has not already been checked
out by another author from the Central Workarea into his local Workarea.
Finish editing all objects...
This command relinquishes the write permission for all objects in the local Workarea and
saves the changes applied in the local Workarea to the Central Workarea. It does so by
opening a dialog displaying the objects with locally available write permission. The write
permission for the selected objects can now be saved in the Central Workarea using Finish
editing.
The relinquished write permission is then symbolized on the object by a red padlock.
Change workflow for all objects...
This command allows editing of the workflow for all objects. It does so by opening a dialog in
which the objects available in the local Workarea can be selected. Clicking on Ok opens a
dialog which can be used to enter a comment along with a user to whom the objects are to be
assigned. It is still possible to amend the status, set flags and publish the objects.
Add comment for all objects...
This command allows a comment to be made in respect of objects that have not yet been
saved to the Central Workarea. A dialog box can be used to select the desired objects and
then create the comment.
Manage tags... (Manager only)
This command opens a dialog in which new flags can be created and existing flags can be
deleted.
Manage tasks...
The command opens a dialog displaying the object tasks. Double clicking on a task selects
the object in the Project Explorer and closes the dialog box.
The Filter... button calls a dialog box in which various filter criteria by which the list can be
filtered can be selected. Remove Filter regenerates the original state.
Open Manager (Manager only)
This command opens the Manager in a browser window. You can then log onto the Manager
via the login area.
Project Menu
The Project menu contains all the functions related to saving projects as finished lessons.
Save
Saves the project currently open and displayed.
08 2012
277
Contents
Clone...
In some situations, it may be desirable or helpful to make a copy of an existing project,
including all of its files (e.g. screenshots), and to save it under a new name as an
independent project in the Workarea. In order to automatically translate lessons, it is
necessary not only to write-protect them but also to clone the project so that the original
language version is not simply overwritten.
Note:
What is required to clone a project is to close all the documentation and other files belonging
to a project. This is required in order to be able to clone the files as well.
Click on the Clone... menu item. This then opens a dialog box in which you can assign a
name to the clone to be made of the lesson.
After clicking OK to confirm the input, the lesson is cloned within the Workarea. It then
appears in Project Explorer and is opened in Project Editor.
Note:
When it comes to ReRecording, the project can be cloned directly via the parameter dialog
when starting ReRecording.
Export Archive...
You can use this feature to export an entire project folder from a Workarea to an archive file,
allowing you to easily move and integrate it into other Workareas. The archive file is saved in
the *.dkp format.
Publish...
This command allows you to publish an individual project. That means that it is not necessary
to issue numerous resources and projects; projects can be distributed individually instead.
Note:
If you would like to publish individual projects to add them to an already existing and
published Workarea, then publication should be by means of the Direct publication...
function.
In this regard, please also pay attention to the section on selective publication in the Direct
publication chapter.
278
08 2012
This is how you publish a project:
1. In the Project menu, select the Publish function.
2. After executing the function you will be presented with a dialog allowing you to
specify, in the Target folder field, the storage location for the project you wish to
publish. You can use the Browser for folder
button to change the folder.
3. Depending on what type your project is you can apply additional settings as described
in the following sections.
4. Then click on OK to proceed with publication.
Publishing navigations
If you publish a navigation project you can define a prefix for it for the Workarea storage
location. This is required when launching navigations from a web server or file share. Enter in
it the URL and name of the Workarea.
Web server example http://yourwebserver/[...]/Workarea
File share example: …\Workarea\index.html
Open Project Directory
This causes Windows Explorer to open the folder of the currently active project in the
Workarea containing the folders for the project files.
Close
Closes the project, which is currently open and displayed.
If you do not save the project before closing it, a dialog box will appear, prompting you to do
so.
Book Page Menu
The Book Page menu combines the basic functions required for editing a book page file.
Save Book Page
Saves the book page opened and displayed at that time.
Clone...
The Clone... function allows you to duplicate the book page together with the content it
contains. This retains the objects' configuration.
Duplicating a book page supports the creation of a book page in another language, for
example, with only the links and inserted text for the new language having to be replaced. In
similar fashion, this supports the design of a basic layout with specific objects in which the
book page can be duplicated and used at will.
1. Select the Clone... function in the Book Page menu. The original book page will then
be closed to avoid duplication errors as a result of the open file.
2. A dialog will open in which you can name the duplicate. Confirm this by clicking on OK
to create the duplicate.
08 2012
279
Contents
Export Archive...
This function enables a book page to be exported from a Workarea into an archive file to
facilitate the transport of this file and be able to integrate it into other Workareas. The archive
file is in the *.dkp format.
Select the Export Archive... function to create an archive. Then enter a name in the open
dialog and select a destination. Confirm the data you have entered by clicking on Save.
Note:
Outputting an archive using this function excludes the Workarea's linked modes and
documents. Therefore, only use the function for book pages in which you have not created
any links.
When exporting book pages containing links to the Workarea, pay attention to the section on
exporting an archive for book pages.
Open Folder
This is used to open the directory of the currently active book page in the workarea, which
contains the relevant book page files.
Close
Closes the book page opened and displayed at that time in the book page editor.
If a book page has not been backed up before closing it, you will be alerted to the absence of
a backup via a dialog.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains all the general features that directly manipulate objects.
Undo
This command is used to undo, i.e. reverse, an action and can be repeated until the first item
in the history has been reached.
Redo
This command is used to reverse the undo action, and can be repeated until the last item in
the history has been reached.
Cut
Cut cuts the selected element or object and places it in the Windows clipboard. This
command can be applied to almost all elements, objects and input fields in Project Explorer
and Project Editor.
Copy
Copy copies the selected element or object to the Windows clipboard. This command can be
applied to almost all elements, objects and input fields in Project Explorer and Project Editor.
280
08 2012
Insert
Executing the Paste command inserts the clipboard content at the insertion point in
Producer. Please note that clipboard content must be compatible with the location into which
it is inserted.
Delete
This command deletes the object or element which has just been selected. It can be applied
to almost all elements, objects and input fields in Project Explorer and Project Editor.
Select All
Select All highlights the largest possible selection in the context of the currently active focus
in Producer. It can be applied to almost all elements, objects and input fields in Project
Explorer and Project Editor.
Insert Simulation Macro
Simulation macros can be inserted via the menu entry. These can also be actions in addition
to explanations and highlights. They can be used to support existing content or for process
changes in a simulation.
Note:
Please keep in mind that, when inserting actions, no object information is saved. If a new
recording is to be made, the object is to be manually defined in its sequence or skipped.
These can also not be used for navigations. It is generally only recommend to create actions
during a recording.
Insert Quiz Macro
Quiz macros are stand-alone macros used in the design of quizzes. These can be
incorporated into a lesson or function as parts of independent quiz lessons.
From the menu Edit -> Insert Quiz Macro you can select the quiz macros and insert them into
a lesson.
The descriptions of the quiz macros can be found in the Quiz Macros Reference.
Insert Special Macro
Special Macros are macros which influence the playback of a lesson and are not recorded
during an automated recording, but are added later during the editing process.
Explanations regarding the Special Macros can be found in the chapter Macro Reference.
Insert Book Page Object
Book page objects can be inserted into simulations. This allows topics to be enriched with
additional information. Please refer to the section on Macro reference book page objects.
Select Macros by type...
This command gives you the ability to select all the objects of a specific macro type in the
thumbnail view. The dialog shows you all the macros available in the currently accessed
course content and shows you a count. When you select a macro type, all objects of this type
are selected in the thumbnail view. This gives you the ability to make settings for all macros
of one type in the Macro Editor.
08 2012
281
Contents
Add Topic
This command inserts a new empty topic in the currently open project. Depending on the
position selected, the topic is inserted directly in front of the next topic or as the last topic.
Search & Replace Bubble Content
Words or passages of text in all the bubbles contained in a project can be replaced using the
Search & Replace function.
In the field Search the term or text string is entered which is to be found within the bubbles of
the project; in the field Replace by the text string is entered which is to replace the original
one.
For more complex tasks, the Search & Replace functionality of Producer can also be used
with a regular expression. In order to do so, please activate the option Search & Replace
using Regular Expressions. The semantics and syntax for such task must comply with the
standard PCRE (Perl Compatible Regular Expression). You can find more information on this
subject at: http://www.pcre.org
After triggering the function by clicking OK, an additional dialog informs you how many times
the search string was found and replaced.
Note:
Searches performed by the search engine are case-sensitive!
If the content of a bubble has been modified by the command Search & Replace, it is
considered to have been edited manually, and the appropriate option is ticked in the
subcategory Rerecord of the macro. This has an effect on the automated translation and the
export of a translatable.
Clean Up...
If a project has undergone extensive editing and parts of it have been recorded multiple times
and others deleted then a number of files will have accumulated in the project folder which
are no longer required for playing back a lesson or for generating documentation.
The Clean Up command deletes all of the files from the project folder that are no longer
required for the project. First and foremost these are all the pages and the elements they
contain which were created once during automated recording but are no longer referenced by
the lesson.
The redundant files are itemized in the Unreferenced files list. Select the objects to be
deleted and click on Delete.
282
08 2012
Note:
Deleting files cannot be undone. On rare occasions it can happen that files that are still
required are also deleted. In particular, this can happen with projects containing numerous,
very complicated pages that have also been extensively edited. That is why you may wish to
make a backup copy of the project before you clean it up.
Convert to Audio Project
Menu item Convert to audio project in the Projects menu creates an audio project out of a
regular project. This allows you to convert a project to an audio project at a later date if you
have not done so when creating the project. Consequently, this menu item is also only
displayed in projects without audio.
Note:
Once a project has been converted into an audio project, this step cannot be undone.
Selecting the function opens the Select output audio format menu. The settings to be applied
there are required to define the properties of the audio project or its audio files:

Editing format
Defines the audio format in which the project is created and edited.

Output format
Defines the audio format in which the project is generated.
After the dialog has been confirmed by clicking on the OK button, the project is converted into
an audio project. This saves the project file as a WRP file. You also have audio editing
functions at your disposal.
Audio Menu
This menu is only available if the current project contains an audio track.
Import Audio File...
Audio files can be imported into Producer. The audio file is imported into the selected topic.
If no topic is selected or no topic exists in the lesson, a new topic is created automatically.
Formats supported when importing audio files are WAV, AVI and MP3. If a file is in AVI
format, the audio in the file must not be compressed.
If an audio file was imported into a topic, this is indicated by an icon.
Note:
Importing an audio file overwrites the existing audio of a topic.
Import Audio Again
If an audio file is already imported into Producer, this action can be repeated without
selecting the file in the import dialog again. This is helpful if changes already made to the
audio track did not work out as expected and the audio track needs to be restored or the
audio file was edited with an external editor and the changes need to be applied to the
project.
08 2012
283
Contents
Export Audio File...
The audio track of a project can be exported from Producer as a file in WAV format for other
purposes. All usual sampling rates for audio files in this format are available.
Note:
The exported audio file always contains the audio track of the whole project. Any gaps with
no audio information are filled with silence.
Delete Audio
Imported audio files can be removed with the Function Delete Audio Track.
Change Audio Format...
Editing Format
The internal audio format of a project which is used for editing can be changed at any time.
All usual sampling rates for work with digital audio in mono or stereo are available. Existing
audio tracks are automatically converted into the new format. This procedure is time intensive
and can take several minutes.
Note:
When changing the project from a higher to a lower sampling rate, the sound quality
decreases. As soon as the project is saved, the changes cannot be undone anymore.
Output Format
With dialog the output format for generating a lesson can be defined. The MP-3 format is
considered the best compromise between file size and sound quality and should be the
preferred setting.
Action Menu
The Action menu contains all the basic features needed to record and playback lessons.
Record Application
This command activates the automated recording of Windows and Web applications. A
corresponding recording bar is displayed at the top of the screen.
For further information on using the automated recording feature for Windows and Web
applications, please see the relevant chapter in this manual.
Rerecord Application
This command starts the automated ReRecording of Windows and Web applications. It can
be used to record a different language version of an existing lesson (together with all its
topics) which has already been recorded using a Windows application.
For further information on using the automated recording feature, please see the relevant
chapter in this manual.
Play Audio
This command plays the audio track of the current topic.
284
08 2012
Stop Audio
The Stop command stops the playback of an audio track.
Record Audio
This command records an audio track for the current topic.
Pause Audio
This command pauses the playback of an audio track.
Repeat Audio
Switches loop mode for the playback of an audio track on and off.
Documentation Menu
This menu contains all necessary functions for generating documentation with Producer.
Generate Word Master Document
This command generates a Word master document from all existing Word documents in the
Workarea.
By clicking on the command, a dialog box opens in which the file name can be assigned and
edited. The target directory for the master document is displayed as before. This cannot be
changed as the master document is filed in each Workarea's doc folder so as to be displayed
in the Project Explorer.
If a folder in the Workarea is selected, all existing Word documents that are located in this
section of the Workarea as part of a project will be merged into the master document.
Documents that have been set under object properties as being hidden will not, however, be
included.
If the uppermost node, meaning the entire Workarea, is marked, a master document will be
generated for the whole of the Workarea.
Insert Documentation Macro
Documentation macros can be added to the project via this menu. The macro will be always
added directly behind the selected macro in the project. The documentation macros are
explained in the chapter Macro Reference of this help file.
Generate Word Document
This command generates the documentation of the recorded lesson as a Word document. In
this regard, the document template is the dot file specified in Documentation Settings.
The macros contained in the project are chronologically integrated into the documentation
file, provided that they are relevant to the documentation. In this case, data from
Documentation is always transferred to the macro editor, or when documentation macros are
used then their content is transferred.
The generated document is stored in the project directory folder and displayed accordingly in
the library.
Note:
The installation of Producer also contains a neutral template for generating documentation
in MS Word without a logo. It can be selected via the Central Configuration Dialog.
08 2012
285
Contents
Generate PDF Document
This command generates a PDF format document of the recorded lesson. The document is
generated in the same way as for Word documents. The PDF is generated using the set
document template.
Note:
Please note that a PDF reader needs to be installed on the workstation to view the PDF
documents.
Prerequisites
The Producer supports PDF files generated with MS Word versions 2007 and 2010.
While Word 2010 contains the standard settings for generating Word documents in general
with the Producer, for Word 2007, you must first install an additional add-in Microsoft Save
as PDF in order for this feature to work properly. This add-in can be downloaded from
Microsoft's official website.
Generate HTML Document
This command works similarly to the command macro Generate Word Document, where as
in this case a HTML document is generated and no template is used for the creation of the
document.
Generate PowerPoint Document
This command works in a similar way to the command macro Generate Word Document. As
in this case, a PowerPoint document is generated. It is also possible to change the basic
template in the main settings.
Note:
Controls (Field-Icons) within bubbles are not displayed when creating PowerPoint
documents. Therefore, post processing of this bubble text fields is necessary.
View Menu
The View menu offers various options to configure the display of the program window. This
makes it possible to customize the general display of program parts, as well as the display of
the various functions.
JavaScript Console
This command opens the JavaScript Console of Producer. A significant portion of the
mechanics for recording in Producer is based on JavaScript. The console can help track
down problems that may occur in the course of working on a project. In the case of an
inquiry, SAP Support may ask you to open the JavaScript Console and describe its contents.
You can also easily copy the contents into a text file. Right-click in the console window and
select the command Copy all. The contents are now on the clipboard and can be pasted into
a text document.
Layout & Components in the Project Editor
The project editor's view can be customized. You can change the layout and hide/display
components as you please so that you can optimally work with the project editor in
conjunction with the Producer.
286
08 2012
Choice of layout
You can choose from a variety of different layouts to organize your standard components in
the project editor. Layout changes will influence the thumbnail view, topic view and the macro
editor. The various layouts make it possible for you to change the look of your project editor
to fit your needs, such as the screen size.
The following layouts are available:

Horizontal layout
The components are aligned horizontally.

Divided layout - 1
The thumbnails and topics are aligned side by side, with the macro editor below it.

Vertical layout
The components are aligned vertically.

Divided Layout - 2
The thumbnail view is displayed horizontally and the macro editor and WYSIWYG
editor appear below next to one another.

Divided Layout - 3
The thumbnail view is displayed horizontally and the WYSIWYG editor and macro
editor appear below next to one another.
Hide and display components
From the View menu, you can also define which components should be made visible in your
layout. The following components can be made visible or hidden:

Toolbars

Timeline

Thumbnail view

The WYSIWYG editor is subdivided into two views:

Topic view

Documentation view

Macro Editor

List of macros – the macro editor must also be made visible in order for this list to
appear

History – to display the list, the macro editor must also be made visible
Floating Windows
The option Floating windows makes it possible to position specific components from the
project editor as desired, independent of the main window on the screen, e.g., components
can be repositioned onto a second monitor. This function allows you to keep the main window
free from too much clutter for your work comfort.
To enable this option, go to View -> Floating windows and select the desired components.
The selected components will then be displayed in a new window that you can move freely or
change its size. When the new window is closed, the components will be automatically
displayed in their original location.
08 2012
287
Contents
The following components can be used in a floating window:

Audio editor

Thumbnail view

Macro editor

WYSIWYG editor (topic view, documentation view)
Set Preview Mode
This command determines in which mode the preview of your project starts in the trainer.
Show/Hide Macros
Macros not meant to be displayed are deselected in the dialog. Carrying out this action does
not delete them, and they can be shown again at any time.
Show Unknown References
Select this function to display a Workarea's Unknown References.
Show UIDs
Selecting this function displays the corresponding UIDs behind the name for the objects in
the Workarea. With projects that share the same name, this allows you to see whether these
are references for one object or for different objects.
Show Language
Selecting this function displays the project language abbreviation in the tree structure. This
allows you to see at a glance which project is in which project language.
Show Language Icons
Selecting this function displays the project flags in the tree structure. This allows you to see at
a glance which project is in which project language.
288
08 2012
Show reference counter
When this option is enabled, the number of references will be displayed in the tree structure
and an overview of the references with links will appear in the object editor.
Tools Menu
This menu contains the Producer Central Configuration Dialog as well as tools providing
general functionality when working on a project.
Settings...
This menu command opens a dialog box that includes various tabs for configuring the basic
settings of the Producer. The settings are made independent of projects and are therefore
available to every project that is processed using the Producer.
More information about the various settings available can be found in the chapter on the
Central Configuration Dialog.
Keyboard Settings...
Many functions in Producer may be executed using keyboard shortcuts (hotkeys). It is
important to distinguish between shortcuts that relate to the Producer menu commands and
keyboard shortcuts that relate to particular actions during the recording of a topic. All actions
can be assigned or reassigned from default settings to individually selected keys using the
command Tools -> Keyboard Settings... This is where you may also assign hotkeys to actions
that have not been assigned a default shortcut setting.
This function allows the user to freely assign shortcuts to the keys that seem the most logical
or are the easiest to remember.
On the left you will see a complete list of available actions. These are subdivided into groups
which can be selected via a drop-down list box. The list box contains the actions in that
group. If an action has been selected, its name and its current key assignment are displayed.
The PC keyboard layout is displayed on the right side of the screen. Under the keyboard
graphic in the Action box the name of the selected action is displayed along with the previous
and new key assignment (if any new assignment has been made).
08 2012
289
Contents
All keys are color-coded. Yellow indicates the key assigned to the action in question. Red
indicates that a key already has an assignment. Green indicates a free key. Blue indicates
whether the Shift, Alt, or Ctrl key needs to be held for the particular action. White fields
indicate keys that are not available for individual assignments.
The currently assigned keyboard shortcut for each of the different keys can be checked by
moving the mouse pointer over it. A small status line under the keyboard displays which
action is using the key. Pressing the Shift, Alt or Ctrl keys is simulated by simply clicking on
the corresponding position on the keyboard display. Clicking it again deactivates it.
To assign a new hotkey, simply click on the green key of your choice. When all changes have
been made, click on OK or Apply in order to activate all hotkeys. If you would like to return to
the default settings, simply click on the button System Default. Individual key assignments
can be deactivated using the button Remove Hotkey. The key will then be available for a new
action assignment. Please note that the corresponding action can no longer be carried out
with a keyboard shortcut until a new one is assigned.
In addition to default keyboard shortcuts, there are several actions that have no default
keyboard shortcuts. You may assign these shortcuts as you wish.
Language/Version Change
This menu contains tools for importing and exporting text used in projects as well as
executing an automated language and version change.
Export Translatable…
This command exports the manually altered content of all of a project's macros and the value
in the field Topic name in the New page macro to a translation template. This makes it simple
for a translator to transfer the texts into the desired language and then reimport them.
There are two translation template formats available for outputting:

Microsoft Word

XLIFF
The default output format for the translation template is Word. If you would like to create a
translation template in XLIFF then activate the setting Use XLIFF.
You will find additional information on outputting and how to work with translation templates in
section Translating of a lesson using translation templates. Please follow the explanations it
contains so as to avoid errors when working with the translation templates.
Note:
When using this feature, it is mandatory that the project itself is not further edited before the
translation is reimported. Adding or removing topics or single macros as well as changing
their order results in a faulty import of the translated text blocks. This is due to the fact that
the macros do not have unique IDs. They are numbered. Therefore, any change in the order
of the macros or topics causes Producer to place the text blocks in the wrong bubbles.
Attention:
Pictures placed in the bubbles will not be applied to the exported Word file.
290
08 2012
Import Translation...
This function reimports a translation that was exported as a translatable and edited by a
translator, using the command Export translatable. Producer automatically overwrites the
contents in the appropriate bubbles.
Attention:
Pictures placed in the bubbles will also be overwritten by the translation.
Revise Values
The Revise Values function allows the text box entries or choices made in the lesson to be
revised prior to a lesson being automatically translated or rerecorded. The text stored in each
text entry macro and the selected entries from list boxes within a lesson are all listed in a
dialog and can be edited.
This function is useful if, because of the target language, entries need to be adapted or an
existing piece of data cannot be deleted after the original recording without additional effort.
Note:
When it comes to ReRecording, the project values can be revised directly via the parameter
dialog when starting ReRecording.
Automated Translation
In some cases it is not necessary to record the whole project again if only the contents of the
bubbles need to be translated into a different target language.
The control macro Automated Translation replaces the text modules inserted automatically
into the bubbles during the original recording with text modules of a different language offered
by Producer.
In the dialog that appears the desired target language can be chosen.
Clicking on OK replaces all text modules with the text modules of the new target language.
The Automated Translation does not replace the contents of a bubble if the options
Interactive Explanation in the subcategory Bubble of the Macro Editor are activated. These
options are activated automatically if either the text of bubble was changed manually or was
altered by the function Bubble Search & Replace. However, it also can be activated or
deactivated manually at any time.
08 2012
291
Contents
Modify Project Language
The dialog Modify Project Language allows the project to be switched to another language or
one supported by the Producer. The project language determines in which language the text
templates for the automatic generation of the bubble texts will be used.
Edit Bubble Types
This command opens the Bubble Type Editor for Producer. Read more about its
functionalities in the related section of this help file.
Edit Master Categories...
Objects in the Project Explorer can belong to several categories which can be used later on
with Filters in order to mask the content of a Workarea for different kinds of users.
You can manage these categories in the dialog.
Automation
The Producer can be controlled by JavaScript via an integrated JavaScript engine. As a
result, the recording and editing of a topic can be significantly automated. The activated
control modules can be started using the Tools submenu.
Bubble Duration all
This command sets the display duration for all the bubbles to the value entered in the dialog
using an adjustable display duration. Prior changes made in the macro editor to the duration
of bubbles will be overwritten.
Use the Include Explanation parameter to set whether or not the defined bubble duration
should also be used for inserted Explanation macros or just for the bubbles of the action
macros. If this parameter is activated, the Explanation macros will also be shown with the
defined bubble duration.
This parameter should be deactivated if individual times are to be used for the Explanation
macros. This is necessary if the respective macros contain longer texts and thus require
more time for processing.
Auto crop all screenshots
This function creates a crop for a screenshot around the Control selected during the
recording. This entails the crop being applied in accordance with the settings defined in the
Central Configuration Dialog in the AutoCrop subcategory. These are located in the Default > Settings -> Documentation area.
292
08 2012
Note:
While ReRecording a lesson, you can retain the crop you have applied. To do so, activate
the Keep Crop option when starting the ReRecording. Please pay attention in this regard to
the section Project-specific settings for ReRecording.
Uncrop all screenshots
This function removes all the cropping applied manually or automatically to the screenshots
in a lesson.
If you only want to remove the crop for individual screenshots, then this is achieved by
selecting a New Page macro using the Uncrop function in the Macro Editor.
Merge selected New Page Macros
This command merges all selected macros of the type New Page. The first screenshot is kept
and all other selected New Page macros are deleted. All the related macros are merged in a
single topic.
It is necessary to amalgamate New Page macros so as to be able to create a form structure
or branches.
Merge New Page Macros
This function allow you to merge a lesson's New page macros automatically with a topic. This
involves merging sequential topics with identical screenshots i.e. the same application page
and it's status, into one topic. The initial New Page macro is retained and the following New
Page macros deleted. Subsequent recording macros are inserted in the lesson within the
topic according to the sequence in which they occur.
The merged New Page macros can now be used for a form mode, for preparing to generate
navigations or other post-editing, for example.
Note:
To merge specific New Page macros only, please refer to the Merge Selected New Page
Macros function.
Graphical Matching and Tolerance
The New Page macros are merged by graphically matching the screenshots. The Producer
compares individual screenshot pixels to recognize differences. This includes differences that
are already small, such as for example a drop-down menu that is open on one screenshot
and not on another. This menu occupies a particular area on the screenshot which differs
from the one with which it is being compared by a certain percentage.
The degree of percentage match for merging screenshots is defined by the tolerance. This
value can be ascertained in the Central Configuration Dialog using the Merge Tolerance for
New Page Macros which can be found under Standard -> Settings -> Windows Recording.
Increasing the value raises the tolerance threshold. The standard value is 0.4 %, resulting in
screenshots that differ by 0.4% or less being merged.
Note:
After the function has been executed, check whether the New Page macros have been
merged correctly and that no necessary screenshots have been deleted. It may be
necessary to undo the merge, using Undo or History and repeating the merge with a
different tolerance.
08 2012
293
Contents
Defining a tolerance
The optimal tolerance may differ from one application to the next. We therefore recommend
that you test different application values for different projects. This can be carried out for
example by a project manager who then communicates the value identified as being optimal
to the authors. When testing you should now ensure that screenshots that differ only slightly,
for example an open drop-down menu, are not merged. The tolerance threshold should
therefore be modified one small step at a time. (Example: increase 0.4% to 0.5%).
We recommend selecting a value greater than 0.0 %. With this tolerance, screenshots
exhibiting only small differences, such as small animations or rollover effects, which are
typically ignored when comparing screenshots, are not merged.
Import
The menu contains functions for the import of content and files.
Import Images...
This function allows you to import images into a lesson. The images can be used, for
example, to enhance your lesson contents with visual information or as an introduction for
various sections within a lesson.
When importing an image into the Producer, a topic and the macro Imported Page are
automatically created.
To import an image, proceed as follows:
1. Select the topic into which image should be inserted.
2. Then Select Tools -> Import-> Import images...
3. A dialog box will appear. Select the desired image or images. Then click on Open.
4. You can now edit your image if desired.
1. Size: Width/Height
Enter the desired Width and Height for your image.
2. Display duration
This option allows you to define how long an image is visible in the lesson. This
image setting can also be adjusted at a later time in the Macro Editor.
3. Import as New Page macro:
When this option is activated, the image will be inserted as a New Page macro
instead of an Imported Page. Note: this option must be activated if you would
like to create branches for your topic.
5.
Confirm the changes by clicking on OK, and the image will be imported.
Note:
If you insert the images as New page macros, the lessons cannot be rerecorded. As the
images cannot be skipped during ReRecording, this leads to errors in the recording process.
You should therefore perform a ReRecording before importing the images.
PowerPoint Import
In addition to the regular topics, you can import slides from a PowerPoint document into a
lesson. For example, these can be used as supporting information for the content of a lesson
or to introduce different sections of a lesson.
Slides are converted into images when importing them into the Producer. One topic and one
New page macro are created for each slide and placed in it.
294
08 2012
The following steps are necessary when importing PowerPoint slides:
1. Open the PowerPoint file, from which you would like to import the slides into your
lesson, in PowerPoint.
2. Select the topic after which the PowerPoint slides are to be placed.
3. In the menu Tools -> Import click on the function PowerPoint Import.
4. You can now apply settings for displaying the slides. Then click on the OK button to
confirm the dialog.
1. Specify the desired width and height of the slides.
2. The Display duration defines for how long a slide is visible before the next one
is displayed. You can also subsequently amend this for each individual slide in
the macro editor.
3. Import as new page macros:
When you activate this setting, the PowerPoint slides are inserted as New page
macros rather than as Imported pages. This is necessary if, for example,
branches are to be created for an imported slide.
Note:
If you insert the PowerPoint slides as New page macros, the lessons cannot be rerecorded.
As the slides cannot be skipped during ReRecording, this leads to errors in the recording
process. You should therefore perform a ReRecording before importing the slides.
5. The next step is to display a dialog requiring you to highlight the slides to be inserted.
Note:
Do not close the dialog until after the slides have been selected as it is the dialog that starts
the import process.
Switch to PowerPoint and highlight the slides to be imported in your PowerPoint file's
slide outline.
6. Now confirm the dialog by clicking on OK.
Flash Page
So that lessons can be made more varied and interesting, the Producer offers the facility for
incorporating Flash video clips. For example, these can display additional explanations or
provide summary information about the sections within a lesson.
08 2012
295
Contents
The special Flash Page macro is available for incorporating Flash movie clips (SWF). The
inserted file is displayed as a standalone page as the lesson progresses.
Note:
Please bear in mind when using the Flash Page macro that a Flash Player for playing back
SWF has to be installed on the workstation of the individual using the lessons.
This is how you create a Flash Page macro:
1. So that the lesson remains clear and easy to follow, it is a good idea to create a new
topic for the macro.
To do this, go to Add topic in the Edit menu.
2. Insert the Flash page macro in the topic using the menu Tools -> Import. You can then
edit the macro in the Macro Editor.
3. The Flash video clip to be shown can be incorporated in the macro using the SWF file
parameter. To do so, click on Select file
Open.
, choose your SWF file and then click on
4. You can then customize the size of the view using the Width and Height settings.
5. The content of a Flash video clip is not always suitable for each mode. You can
therefore use the Available in mode parameter to select the mode in which this is to
be shown. To do so, activate the relevant type.
Tip:
For more complex settings and applications, we recommend inserting Flash films as book
page objects and integrating the respective book page into the project.
Workarea Structure
Using the Workarea Structure functions, you can view the workarea layout and existing
references to have an overview of them. When displaying references, only groups, projects,
books and book pages are taken into consideration.
The following functions are available here:

Export Structure...
Exports the workarea structure into a CVS file. The position on the level, the object
type and the language are specified.

Export Reference List...
Exports an overview of the existing references on the workarea into a CVS file. The
objects are listed in the order in which they appear on the workarea. In addition to this,
the superordinate reference and the UID are displayed.
Window Menu
This menu offers different options for organizing the different file and program windows on
the screen, including the defined relationships between the Producer window and the
Internet Explorer window. Below these options is a listing of all open projects.
New Browser Window
Open a new browser window with a control bar.
296
08 2012
Size
This command sets the current browser window to the specified size or configures the
relationship between the Producer program window and that of Internet Explorer.
The following options are available:
Setting
Effect
800 x 600
Switches the browser window to a size
comparable to the available space with a
screen resolution of 800 x 600 pixels
800 x 600 + trainer
Switches the browser window to a size
comparable to the available space with a
screen resolution of 800 x 600 pixels when
the trainer control bar is also displayed at the
bottom
1024 x 768
Switches the browser window to a size
comparable to the available space with a
screen resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels
1024 x 768 + trainer
Switches the browser window to a size
comparable to the available space at a
screen resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels when
the trainer control bar is also displayed at the
bottom
Tile Horizontally 1:2
Places the Producer and the browser
window side by side at a ratio of 1:2, using all
available screen space. Allows full access to
Producer during recording and playback.
Tile Horizontally 1:1
Places the Producer and the browser
window side by side at a ratio of 1:1, using all
available screen space.
Tile Horizontally 1:3
Places the Producer and the browser
window side by side at a ratio of 1:3, using all
available screen space. Allows full access to
Producer during recording and playback.
Tile Vertically 1:3
Stacks the Producer and browser windows
horizontally at a ratio of 1:3, using the all
available space on the screen (browser on
top). The width of the screen is fully utilized
for the timeline or the thumbnail view.
Help Menu
This menu allows the user to access the Producer online help files, get info how to act in a
possible support case or display information about the Producer version being used.
Diagnostics... generates a text file containing valuable information which the SAP support
staff can use to detect configuration conflicts.
08 2012
297
Contents
Diagnosis...
With Diagnostics... Producer automatically transmits key data; the hardware being used, the
operating system version, the installed Producer components, and the software components
being used by Producer, such as Internet Explorer.
This information would be very useful to the SAP support staff if they needed to analyze a
problem.
Save... stores the data in a text file which can then be easily sent as an attachment with an email.
298
08 2012
Central Configuration Dialog
The Central Configuration Dialog is opened via the menu Tools -> Options...
It contains all the global settings for working with Producer as well as the settings for
recording and editing projects and settings for the trainer installed in the current Workarea.
Settings relating to working with macros can be made globally as well as on a project-specific
basis. The same applies to the trainer Configuration, which can be influenced globally or
specifically for various modes and the library.
When a project is opened in Producer, additional project-specific parameters are available.
There are four main categories of parameters:

Application

Navigation

Standard

trainer Configuration
They are organized in a tree structure. Branches of the tree view can be opened and closed
with mouse clicks. The parameters of the currently selected parameter category are
displayed on the right side in the editor area.
The button Reset to default resets the parameter values to the original default in the
displayed category.
When you click on a parameter, you will receive a description of it in the lower part of the
configuration dialog box.
Initialization and fallback default parameters
Parameters defined in the central configuration dialog are differentiated in terms of how they
are used into initial and so-called fallback parameters. This involves differentiating according
to whether they are supposed to initiate a global default of the available parameters or
overwrite non-individualized parameters.
Note:
Parameters are saved for each Workarea where they are filed under Resources ->
Configurations/Styles. Particularly close attention is to be paid to this if individual parameter
settings are also to be made available to other authors or used as a Workarea standard
when connecting to Manager.
Use in the macro settings
Macro Initialization and Macro Fallback Defaults allow you to define specific macro
parameters across a Workarea. However, they do not apply in the case of individualized
parameter definitions (with green lamp activated).
Macro Initialization
You can use the Macro Initialization to define all of the relevant macros' parameters prior to
the project creation process, thus ensuring the greatest possible project consistency.
Parameters that are predefined using Macro Initialization are shown as being activated in the
relevant macro settings (the green lamp preceding the parameter is activated). That means
they they are unaffected by changes in the Macro Fallback Defaults.
08 2012
299
Contents
Note:
Please note that Macro Initialization depict initial parameters! The parameter definitions they
contain only apply once they have been established and are not applied to already existing
projects.
Macro Fallback Defaults
The Macro Fallback Defaults allow you to determine undefined parameters in all of the
Workarea's previously recorded projects, thereby ensuring, for example, consistency within
the Workarea upon conclusion of the project creation process. Unlike when defining Macro
Initialization parameter settings made via the Macro Fallback Defaults in the relevant macros
are NOT shown as being activated (the green lamp preceding the parameter remains
inactive). The advantage of this is that settings specified using Macro Fallback Defaults can
always be changed globally again.
Note:
Please note that Macro Fallback Defaults only take effect in NON activated parameter data.
Application example
The following case study is intended to explain the different Macro Initialization and Macro
Fallback Defaults application examples using the explanation bubble.
When creating the Workarea prior to recording the projects, it needs to be stipulated that all
explanatory bubbles to be inserted should use the Info display type. The author can apply
any necessary variances himself on a case by case basis although as a matter of principle
the explanatory bubble should be used for this type of information.
To avoid inconsistencies as a result of omitting this parameter configuration and to free the
author from having to reapply this setting each time, this setting is defined as a Macro default.
To this end, parameter type (2) is defined in the central configuration dialog under Standard > Macro Initialization (1) -> Explanation. It will then be placed in the explanatory bubble in all
the projects that are to be recorded.
300
08 2012
Once all projects have finished recording, it is recognized in the Workarea finalization
process that most explanatory bubble content contains excessively detailed additional
information, thus distorting in Test mode what the learner has actually learned. As this was
not considered in the planning phase, the parameter In Test mode was not activated in any of
the recorded projects and consequently was not defined either. At this point, the extra effort
of rectifying all the projects manually can be avoided by amending the specific Macro
alternate parameter. Deactivating the parameter In Test mode (2) in the central configuration
dialog in Standard -> Macro Fallback Defaults parameter (1) -> Explanation deactivates the
parameter in all Workarea projects.
08 2012
301
Contents
Note:
Please note that Macro Fallback Defaults only take effect with default parameters, namely
ones which have not been changed. Activated parameters (green lamp) are unaffected
when an alternate parameter is changed.
Application
The Settings contained in the category are related to the tools of Producer and the functions
for editing projects. They depend neither on the currently opened project nor on the currently
active Workarea.
User Interface
Settings are located in this category which influence the appearance and the use of specific
editing tools of Producer. Some of the settings require Producer to be restarted before they
become active. In this case you will be informed by a dialog as soon as the settings are
applied or the dialog closes.
Language:
The interface language may be switched to either English or German using the Language
command.
Default language for spell checking:
This option defines a default language to be used for spell checking. Typically the language
used is the one defined for an object. If no language package for Windows Office is installed,
the Producer uses the defined default language.
Spell Check:
This options activates spell checking for HTML-Editors. This presupposes an installed spell
checker for Microsoft Word.
302
08 2012
Drag-and-drop event editing:
Select the way you wish to work with events. Drag-and-drop event editing allows elements in
the event list to be moved around by simply dragging the event to a new location.
Move time with macros:
The effect of this option is that when a macro is inserted or removed, the other macros are
seamlessly shifted along the timeline or any gaps arising are closed. Move time with macros
enables the other macros to seamlessly shift along the timeline when a macro is inserted or
removed. When a macro is inserted, all subsequent macros shift back along the timeline by
the exact duration of the inserted macro. If a macro is deleted within a topic, the resulting gap
is automatically closed.
Max. most recently used folders:
This allows you to define how many of the recently opened directories are to be displayed in
file dialogues.
Show disabled warnings:
If dialogs were suppressed by selecting the option 'Don't show this message again', activating
this parameter can redisplay the dialogs.
Directories
The settings in this category affect the paths used by Producer for saving settings and other
program components, as well as the Autosave functionality.
Updates' path:
This allows automatic updates for associated resources to be configured. In the process, an
administrator creates a central folder in which the new resources are filed. When the path is
specified, the new resources are imported into the Workarea when the Producer is launched.
Autosave:
When this option is activated, projects are saved automatically at regular intervals with the
time increment entered under Autosave Interval.
Autosave Interval:
The value entered here specifies the frequency in minutes with which projects are
automatically backed up if the option Use Autosave is activated.
Save
This is the area where you can define which modes are to be created when generating a
project. All modes are activated by default. Deactivate a mode for a particular macro set if
you do not wish to generate that mode for your projects.
Record Application
The settings in this category pertain to the recording of lessons. They control the way
screenshots are made when recording an application.
All settings made in this category are effective for projects which are recorded or edited after
the change in settings took place.
If a project is opened, the additional subcategory Project Overrides is available. It provides
specific settings which apply only to the currently opened project.
Settings
Record Bar Position:
Record bar Position determines whether the record bar for recording is displayed on the top
or bottom edge of the screen.
08 2012
303
Contents
Area:
This setting determines if the entire window currently in the foreground should be copied, or a
specifically defined area of the screen. When the option Screen Area is selected, an area of
the screen can be accurately specified in Rect.
Rectangle:
The distance of the edges of the screen area to the top and to the left side of the screen is
entered in the input field. The button located beside it displays the selected area in a red
frame. You may adjust the size and position by placing your mouse pointer on an edge and
dragging it to the desired position or size. The corresponding values in the respective fields
are updated automatically.
In addition, some default values may be selected. Screen defines the whole screen as the
selected area, while Workarea selects the whole screen excluding the windows task bar.
Stretch Appl. Window:
This option maximizes the application window when starting the recording and when
rearranging the window.
Stretch newly opened Appl. Window:
While the recording is underway, this option automatically maximizes a newly opened
application window to the initial window size.
Automatic profile change:
If application changes are performed during the recording process, the selected application
profile might need to be adapted. This option defines in that situation whether the profile is to
be changed automatically during the recording process.
If the "always change" option is selected and no application profile is associated with the
shot, the standard profile will be used.
HTML Template:
Offers the option of setting some of the parameters, such as background color, page margin,
and other styles for the HTML pages that the screenshots will be embedded into. A HTML file
may be defined as a template via the selective dialog box.
Record Hot Keys:
With this option, the Producer is prompted during the recording process to record the
keyboard shortcuts that have been assigned.
Generate Window Information:
This option is used to save additional information that forms the basis for subsequent Control
Recognition. The process is computer intensive. It can be used in a later process for
additional Control Recognition. The process can be time intensive.
Control Recognition Method:
Profound recognition enables optimal control recognition via interfaces and thus the best
possible read out of page and object information. Simple recognition primarily allows
graphical objects to be recognized. This is required, for example, when recording via Citrix or
when using terminal applications. An individual cursor is displayed for this setting if the Allow
Rollover Effects option is deactivated.
Note:
When recording using the Simple recognition option the mouse option In dialog fields
automatically jump to the standard button is to be deactivated in the Windows settings. This
mouse attribute impairs the control recognition functionality by preventing mouse
movements.
Allow RollOver Effects:
This setting defines whether rollover effects are suppressed during recording when moving
the cursor over a control. This prevents an unintended change of menu, for example, with
304
08 2012
rollover effects also not being visible on the screenshot. Activate the option if you would like
to allow rollover effects.
Fallback method for object recognition
Fallback method:
When a control element is not correctly identified during the recording, the Producer uses an
alternative method in order to create the control element:

Recognize Hotspot: To create the control element, an area that has been predefined
in size is placed onto the position that has been clicked on, and the macro settings are
defined with standard values. Once the recording is complete, the macro can be
edited in the macro editor.

Create Selection Dialog: This option will open a new control element selection dialog
box in which the control element can be manually defined.
Hotspot Size:
This option allows you to define the size of the click area. To do so, activate the option
Recognize Hotspot under Fallback method. The size is defined in pixels and is rectangular in
shape. An editing dialog box can be opened to change the size by clicking on the button next
to the text field.
Templates
Under Settings, you can configure standard templates for use when creating new objects in
the workarea. A template is an object that has been created with predefined settings and
properties. For more detailed information, please refer to the section on Templates for objects
in the workarea in this user guide.
Templates can be created for the following types of objects:

Group

Project

Book

Book page

Text unit
Book Page Editor
Here you can define the grid lines for the book pages in the book page editor as well as the
snap-in-place function with the ledger lines, which is a helpful tool when dragging an object to
ensure that they are properly aligned with other objects.
Configuring the grid
The grid is part of the background and assists you in precisely designing the layout of your
objects on a book page. You can define the space between the grid lines as well as the
distance from the upper-left corner.
Configuring the snap-in-place function
You can activate and deactivate the Snap-in-place option as well as define which objects
should use this option and how much distance there should be between the object and the
grid area where it will be snapped into place. If this option is activated, when dragging an
object, it will automatically lock to the grid, which facilitates positioning objects and helps to
maintain conformity and accuracy throughout your project.
08 2012
305
Contents
Book Page Fallback Defaults
In this category the defaults for all editable macro parameters of the objects for book pages
can be adjusted. In order to overwrite a build-in default with another value the check box at
the beginning of the regarding line must be ticked. The new setting applies to all book pages
in the workarea. However, parameters that are already specified in a book page will not be
affected.
Book Page Initialization
In this sub-category the initialization defaults for all editable parameters of the objects for
book pages can be adjusted. In order to overwrite a build-in default with another value the
check box at the beginning of the regarding line must be ticked. The new setting applies to all
book pages in the workarea. However, the changes do not apply to macros already recorded.
Only objects inserted after the new setting was made are affected.
Expert Features
In this category you may activate additional Producer functions that have been reserved for
special users. This is accomplished by entering parameters in the list. The syntax used for an
entry follows this example: Feature=1;
One entry per line can be made. 1 activates a feature, 0 deactivates it without deleting the
line.
Please note that additional functionality created by entries made in this tab is not covered by
the standard support package offered by SAP AG and are not standard guaranteed system
properties.
Standard
This category is only visible if a project containing the Standard Macroset is open in
Producer.
Settings made in this category apply to all projects in the current Workarea. Only settings
made in the subcategory Project Overrides are restricted to the project currently open.
Settings
This category contains configuration parameters which influence the creation of
documentation files and the behavior of Producer in connection with a Macroset.
The new settings apply to all recordings made with existing or newly created projects, as well
as generated documentation files. However, the changes do not apply to macros that have
already been recorded.
Audio
The general settings for creating and editing audio files are displayed here.
Category Documentation
This category provides parameter settings for the creation of project documentation. It also
provides the possibility to choose the templates used by Producer to generate the
documentation files.
Category Recording
In this category you can find general parameters for recording with Producer which influence
the automatic creation of bubbles.
306
08 2012
Category Web Recording
In here you can find settings which influence the automated recording of Web Applications.
Category Windows Recording
This category summarizes settings which influence the automated recording of Windows
Applications.
Category Windows ReRecording
The settings contained in this category influence the behavior of Producer when using the
built functionality for ReRecording Windows Applications.
Global Macro Parameters
The settings here define how Highlights and Bubbles are displayed globally for all projects
contained in the current Workarea. They are used as default settings for all recorded
Highlights and Bubbles. For changed settings to take effect, the lessons of a project need to
be generated again.
In the subcategory Project Overrides the same group of settings can also be applied
specifically to the current project only. The global settings for all projects are not affected.
Concurrent mode Link Text (Back):
You can enter a text here for continuing the lesson in Concurrent mode which will be used as
a link text for continuing in the displayed bubble. The text may contain HTML attributes.
Therefore, it is also possible to include an image file path.
An image is used as default. If you would like to use your own image, file them in the
style/standard/image folder.
Concurrent mode Link Text (Close):
Clicking on the link in the displayed bubble can close a lesson in Concurrent mode. This uses
the text you have entered here. The text may contain HTML attributes. Therefore, it is also
possible to include an image file path.
An image is used as default. If you would like to use your own image, file them in the
style/standard/image folder.
Concurrent mode Link Text (Forw):
Here is where you can specify a text for continuing the lesson in Concurrent mode, which will
be used as a link text for continuing in the displayed bubble. The text may contain HTML
attributes. Therefore, it is also possible to include an image file path.
An image is used as default. If you would like to use your own image, file them in the
style/standard/image folder.
Show note in Test mode:
If this option is activated, a bubble is displayed in Test mode which contains a link which
opens an additional window in Demo mode showing the actual step and closing it again
afterwards. The bubbles for entry fields also show the explanation fromPractice mode.
Link Text for (show step):
Defines the link text in the bubble for the option Show Step bubble.
Bubbletype OK:
Defines the Bubblestyle used for the text OK bubble when the option OK in Test mode is
activated.
Show Mouse:
This option also shows the mouse pointer for actions that are performed in the application
with the mouse. By default the mouse pointer is hidden.
08 2012
307
Contents
Highlights
Effect:
This option determines the kind of highlighting effect used in the lesson. Available effects are:
Frame fixed, Underline solid, Frame flashing, Frame Zoom in and Frame Zoom out.
Border:
This parameter defines the thickness of the lesson highlight frame in pixels. Pixel widths
available are from 1 to 10.
Color:
This defines the standard color of the highlight border. The color may either be selected from
out of the Color Picker dialog box or entered directly as a value in HEX format.
Note:
A color value defined here is only valid if no color has been defined in Style.
Name:
This parameter determines the name used to address regular highlighting within the lesson.
As a rule the name should not be changed.
Style:
This parameter offers advanced options for manipulating the appearance of a highlight. If a
color has been entered here it overrides the color settings entered under Color.
An image from out of the trainer/sat/widgets/highlight2 folder in the active Workarea can also
be applied. If it is a PNG file for instance, it will be able to contain a proportional
transparency. The border of the highlight will also become correspondingly transparent as a
result of using this image to generate it.
Fillstyle:
This parameter works in a similar way to the parameter Style but fills the inside area of the
highlighted area with the defined color or image. In this case transparency is also an option if
you decide to use an image.
Macro Fallback Defaults
In this category the defaults for all editable macro parameters of the macros in this macroset
can be adjusted. In order to overwrite a build-in default of the macroset with another value the
check box at the beginning of the regarding line must be ticked. The new setting applies to all
projects using this macroset. However, parameters that are already specified in a project will
not be affected.
Macro Initialization
In this category the defaults for all editable macro parameters in the macros in the standard
macroset can be adjusted. In order to overwrite a default of the macroset with another value,
the check box at the beginning of the appropriate line must be ticked. The new setting applies
to all projects using this macroset. However, the changes do not apply to macros that have
already been recorded. Only macros recorded after the new setting was made are affected.
trainer Configuration
In this category parameters can be edited which are interpreted by trainer at runtime.
The default settings can be edited for all modes and all projects in the Workarea as well as
globally for specific modes or for the modes of the currently opened project. The check box
on the left in the categories activates the editing option for the related parameter.
308
08 2012
If no project is open in trainer, the names of the configuration files are shown in the tree
view.
Then the setting for the library and the book reader can also be edited.
For every parameter a short description is displayed at the bottom of the editor area.
Attention:
Changes to the trainer configuration files can result in malfunction of the trainer when
playing back lessons. Therefore only experienced users should edit the configuration files.
08 2012
309
Glossary
Glossary
Application profile
Bookpage Editor
An application profile is an resource object
within the workarea. It contains specific
information about an application and its
controls. This information is used in
process of recording and rerecording to
recognize and record select controls.
The bookpage editor is your tool for
editing bookpages. It displays a bookpage
with its objects and their corresponding
parameters. Double clicking a bookpage
object within the project explorer starts the
bookpage editor.
Opposite to: project editor
Archive
book reader
An archive is a file containing multiple
contents like projects, books, resources
and so on. This enables to compress and
easily transfer this contents. Producer
archive files use the file suffix *.dkp.
The book reader is the functionality to playback
books. It displays the single bookpages as well
as it enables to browse, search and control
contents. The appearance of the book reader
is set by style resources.
Audio editor
The audio editor is your tool for creating
and editing audio files. Beside offering
various editing functions it displays the
audio track as well. The audio editor is
available within the project editor and the
bookpage editor.
Audio project
An audio project is a lesson accompanied
by a soundtrack. Thanks to this
soundtrack, the author, in the same way
as in a video tutorial, can explain the steps
being demonstrated and thus guide the
user through the lesson.
Book
A book is a structuring object within the
workarea. It may contain multiple
bookpages as well as other books and
acts like a group. Nested books can be
used as chapters. Books can be set with
various options for display and control of
their behavior within the book reader
functionality.
More structuring objects: group
Book Page
A bookpage is a content object within the
workarea. It basically shows a HTML page
on which various contents like text,
images or even multimedia can be
positioned freely. Single bookpages can
be structured by books. Editing is to be
done within the bookpage editor.
More content objects: project, text unit
310
Bubble
Bubbles (speech bubbles) display text
content. In the E-learning arena, bubbles
are frequently used to provide
explanations or advice.
Bubble type
Bubble Types are resource objects within
the workarea. Each bubble type is a
display variant of the bubble which has
been created individually or by using a
template. You can set your specific bubble
type within the macro parameters or in the
central settings. Bubble types are
managed as resources and edited with the
bubble type editor.
Categories
Categories can be assigned in Project
Explorer for the use of filters at a later
date. This makes it possible to provide
particular user views of the workarea at a
later date by means of defined categories.
Central settings dialog
Within the central settings dialog you can
setup all superordinate parameters for the
Producer globally or even project specific.
Furthermore it enables access to common
and macro set specific parameters as well
as for the trainer functionality.
Compound document
A compound document combines different
contents of a workarea within one
documentation. Every object type is taken
into account and placed within the
08 2012
Glossary
document accordingly to its place in the
tree structure. It can be generated as
Word, PDF and HTML directly from within
the project editor.
Opposite to: central document
Central Workarea
SAP Workforce Performance Builder
Producer functionality for supporting
author groups. Individual author lessons
are collated and managed in the central
workarea. Individual authors can use write
permission management to edit or review
projects in their local workarea and
transfer changes to the project in the
central workarea. Administration of the
central workarea is via the CWA super
user.
Concurrent Mode
Concurrent mode is the name used in the
Project Explorer and in the library for the
German „Praxismodus“. It is necessary to
use the English term in order to ensure
the consistency of the application interface
independent of language.
Control
Controls are graphical objects that support
the end user's application-specific
(mouse) interaction. They include
elements such as, for example, buttons,
selection boxes, radio buttons, dropdown
menus, text boxes (input and output),
etc...
Demo Mode
Users have their application's processes
explained to them by means of a
simulated lesson running on its own. The
lesson is played back in a sequence that
runs automatically with appropriate
comments.
Description
The description is an object parameter to
be defined for each object within the
property sheet editor. It can be used as
explanation to be displayed in the library
or, if used at a text unit, as text content
itself.
Feedback
Response to the triggering of an event or
a query that issues a dialog defined by the
08 2012
application or system or customized by
the author.
Field icon
A field icon is a macro property. It contains
the image clipping of an recorded area
which will be used to visualize the object
to be selected within the bubble.
Fieldname
The field name is a macro property
containing the readout text identifier of the
recorded control. It is used to name the
recorded object within the bubble.
Filter
Filters help you to sort contents within the
tree structure of a workarea. Filters can be
created on a base of existing categories
and various object properties being
available within the Producer and the
library functionality afterwards.
Glossary
Glossaries are resource objects within the
workarea. According to the use within the
SAP Workforce Performance Builder
glossaries are collections of contentspecific (Content glossary) and runtimespecific (Record glossary) texts in all
supported project languages. The content
glossary contains texts as used for the
automatic generated bubble texts as well
as for the generation of documents. The
record glossary provides texts as used by
Navigator and trainer functionality while
playback.
Group
A group is a structuring object within the
workarea. It acts similar to a file directory
and is mainly used to arrange the tree
structure. For example it can be used to
structure the contents by specific topics or
languages. Having the parameters like
description it can provide information
about subordinated objects or the topic
they belong to.
More structuring objects: book
Highlight
Visual marking / emphasis of an element
or location by using optically conspicuous
elements such as for example a yellow
border.
311
Glossary
HTML Editor
The html editor is for the purpose of
editing and creating contents based on
HTML and CSS definitions. The editor is
basically a WYSIWYG editor, providing
basic functions to format and structure
text. It is available within every area in the
Producer where formatted contents can
be created.
Hotkey
A hotkey is a key combination of a defined
order to invoke specific commands within
an application or the operating system
itself.
Lesson
The subject matter is broken down into
lessons. The length and duration of the
lesson depends on the amount of
knowledge to be taught and the size of the
application.
Macro editor
Der macro editor is a component of the
project editor. It lists all existing
parameters for a selected macro and
enables to edit those. Layout can be
switched between standard layout and
advanced layout, which displays a bigger
set of parameters.
More components: WYSIWYG editor,
Thumbnail view, audio editor
library
The library functionality provides a
structured display of contents. It provides
all published contents of a workarea
including subordinated groups and their
subordinated projects, books and
additional learning materials. Filters and
the search function enable you to find your
specific contents. The appearance of the
library functionality is set by style
resources.
Macroset
A macroset is a resource object within the
workarea. It provides a collection of
common and thematically and functionally
adapted macros together with its
configuration set. Within the Producer
there is a common macroset Standard (for
312
simulations) available as well as the
macroset Navigation (for navigations).
Master Document
A central document (also known as a
master document) contains shortcuts to a
group of related documents (single
documents, MS Word: sidecar
documents), and functioning as a
container document. Initially, when
opening a master document, only the
shortcuts to the sidecar documents are
displayed, these only being loaded into
the document if required. Especially with
large documents, this avoids a single,
extremely large file being created, while at
the same time allowing sidecar documents
to remain separated within the network by
topic and the way they are dealt with.
Navigation
A navigation is a project type within the
Producer. Navigations are provided as
context- or process-specific help directly
within the live application, enabling the
user to be supported not only by initial
learning of the new application, but also
within the ongoing use of it (also known as
Electronic Performance Support).
Playback of navigations is done by the
Navigator.
More project types: simulation
Navigator
The Navigator is the component for
playing back navigations. It is installed
independently from a workarea and runs
in the background while playback of
navigations.
Object recognition
The term object recognition describes the
recognition and readout of specific object
information within an application. It is
processing while recording and
rerecording as well as while playback of
navigations. Information for recognition is
saved within the respective macros.
Placeholder
A placeholder is a variable in a defined
syntax which is replaced automatically by
dynamic contents. Placeholders can be
used in all contents of the workarea
displaying specific values within each one.
08 2012
Glossary
Changing the source value of a
placeholder changes the value of a
placeholder everywhere where used.
simulations and the process assistant
whereas it is done object-related for the
context assistant.
Opposite to: Rerecording
Practice Mode
Practice mode is the name used in the
Project Explorer and in the library for the
German „Übungs-Modus“. It is necessary
to use the English term in order to ensure
the consistency of the application interface
independent of language.
Reference
A reference is the mirrored occurrence of
an object within the tree structure of the
workarea. Each object can have multiple
references which are updated immediately
if one of the set of references is has been
changed.
Project Editor
The Project Editor displays the topics,
complete with thumbnail view, as well as a
project's macros and parameters and
makes it possible to edit them. It is
launched by double-clicking on the
relevant project within the Project
Explorer's tree structure. The project
editor is also used to start the recording
and rerecording.
Rerecording
Rerecording means the automatic
recording of an already existing project
within the corresponding application with
the aim to update the contents or even to
record the same process in another
language.
Opposite to: recording
Resources
Project Explorer
The project explorer displays the workarea
structure within the Producer. Resources
and contents are shown in a tree view
where they can be managed.
Publish
When applied to the SAP Workforce
Performance Builder Producer, this refers
to the publication/distribution either of
individual projects or of the entire
workarea from the SAP Workforce
Performance Builder Producer. This
implies the purging of unused material
from the structure.
Quiz
Direct questions can be put to the user
and automatically evaluated by means of
a quiz. The task of a quiz is to test and
deepen knowledge. To this end, the SAP
Workforce Performance Builder Producer
provides various macros incorporated
within lessons or which can be used to
develop a standalone quiz lesson.
Recording
Recording means the recording and the
mapping of actions done within an
application. For each action a screenshot
of the application and the field icon itself is
recorded as well as the field name is
readout. This is done sequential for
08 2012
In the context of working with the SAP
Workforce Performance Builder Producer,
they refer to application modules and
expansions that can be individually
imported, exported and managed. The
latter are integrated into the respective
current workarea and are thus only valid
for the respective workarea in their version
or variant. The SAP Workforce
Performance Builder Producer provides
resource standards when it is installed.
Task window
The task window displays a task
description with corresponding values
within the Test mode and optionally within
the Practice mode. It appears as an
additional browser window. The
appearance of the task window is set by
style resources.
Test mode
The lesson is played back in an interactive
simulation without instructions. The user is
shown a task which he or she then has to
carry out without further instructions. Each
step is individually assessed and help
offered if required. Upon conclusion of the
test an evaluation is carried out, which is
judged as being successful or not
successful depending on the score
achieved. This way users can be certified.
313
Glossary
Thumbnail view
UID
The thumbnail view is a component of the
project editor. It displays an overview of
the whole amount of lesson steps showing
a thumbnail for each screenshot.
More components: WYSIWYG editor,
macro editor, audio editor
The Unique Identifier (UID) is used to
identify a project beyond doubt, thus
enabling it to be used across all the
different workareas and archives, even if
projects are given the same name.
Topic
Workarea is the name given to the folder
in which all of the relevant data and files
for creating and publishing learning
content are filed. The workarea structure
can be launched and administered via the
Project Explorer.
Topics are sequential sections of a lesson.
A topic contains the current process step
screenshot and all macro information
required to present and explain this step.
topmost window
The topmost window is a display variant of
the concurrent mode. It displays a window
in Internet Explorer which is split into two
parts. In the upper part text and controls
are placed, beneath the corresponding
screenshot is shown. The appearance of
the topmost window is defined by style
resources.
Translatable
Workarea
WYSIWYG editor
The WYSIWYG editor ("What you see is
what you get") displays contents as they
will be displayed in corresponding output
format. This facilitates the editing and
styling of contents since it directly shows
what it will look like.
WYSIWYG editors: HTML editor,
bookpage view, lesson step view,
document view
A translatable is a structured document
which enables the export and
subsequently the import of text for
translation purposes. Within the Producer
the use of translatables is available for
projects and books. You can select
between Word and XLIFF based
translatables.
Simulation
Simulation is a project type within the
Producer and can be understood as
lesson. In a simulation a process is shown
in a virtual environment to be displayed in
four different modes. Simulations are
played back by the trainer functionality.
More project types: navigation
Single document
A single document contains a
documentation for a specific simulation
project which can be generated by using a
specific definition of structure and
contents. It can be generated as Word,
PDF, HTML and PowerPoint directly from
within the project editor.
Single documents are used as a base for
master documents.
314
08 2012
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement